Setting the UCC Record Straight on Mortgage Notes

 

The press is full of articles concerning residential real estate foreclosures. Sometimes questions arise in these judicial and non-judicial proceedings concerning ownership and enforcement of the notes and related mortgages. Uniform Commercial Code Articles 3 and 9 (and related definitions in Article 1) address some of the issues that have come up in these proceedings. The litigants and the courts considering these matters sometimes do not recognize the applicability of the UCC or may have difficulty applying the rules of the UCC. See, e.g., U.S. Bank v. Ibanez, 458 Mass. 637, 941 N.E.2d 40 (2011).

The Permanent Editorial Board for the Uniform Commercial Code has just issued a report (Report) to explain the application of UCC provisions that govern selected aspects of these matters and how those provisions apply to common fact patterns in this area. The PEB Report addresses how the UCC governs the following matters:

  • Who is the person entitled to enforce a mortgage note?
  • How is the transfer of a property interest (ownership or a security interest to secure an obligation) in a mortgage note accomplished?
  • What effect does the transfer of a mortgage note have on the related mortgage?
  • How can a person enforce a mortgage note by foreclosing non-judicially if the person does not have a recordable assignment of the mortgage?

Procedure

The PEB prepared and issued a draft Report for public comment in March 2011. The PEB received comments and prepared revisions to the Report. The final Report was issued in mid-November. It is available on the webpages of the two sponsors of the UCC, the American Law Institute (www.ali.org) and the Uniform Law Commission (www.uniformlaws.org).

During the course of the comment period, at least two courts cited the draft Report when considering issues addressed by the Report. See In re Jackson, 451 B.R. 24 (Bankr. E.D. Calif. 2011) and In re Veal, 449 B.R. 542 (9th Cir. BAP 2011). In each case the court held for the homeowner, concluding that the person seeking to enforce the particular mortgage note had not satisfied the relevant requirements of the UCC, as explained in the (draft) PEB Report.

What the Report Does Not Cover

The Report limits its discussion to selected UCC issues:

  • The Report states several times that the UCC governs the issues that it governs, but does not address issues of real property law.
  • The Report sometimes refers to the UCC’s use of other law in connection with the application of the UCC’s rules, for example agency law. In those circumstances, the Report notes the applicability of the other law (such as agency law) but does not discuss the content of the other law. In particular, where the UCC requires “possession” of a note to create certain rights, the Report observes that both Article 3 and Article 9 (with an assist from UCC § 1-103(b)) recognize that possession of the note can occur through an agent.
  • The Report’s discussion of Article 3 recognizes that Article 3 applies only to “negotiable instruments” as that term is defined in Article 3; the Report observes that if a mortgage note is not a “negotiable instrument,” the Report’s discussion of Article 3 issues does not apply to that mortgage note.
  • The Report’s discussion of Article 9 issues notes that Article 9 applies to all instruments, i.e., both negotiable and non-negotiable notes.
  • The Report does not address all issues that might arise under the UCC in this context, such as the possible status of a holder of a mortgage note as a holder in due course of the mortgage note and the effect that that status might have on possible defenses that the maker might be able to assert.

Who is Entitled to Enforce a Mortgage Note?

Article 3 employs the concept of a “person entitled to enforce” a note to determine the person to whom the maker of the note owes its payment obligation. UCC § 3-301. That person might or might not be the owner of the note (UCC § 3-203, Comment 1), but payment to that person discharges the maker’s obligation under the note. UCC §§ 3-412 and 3-602.

A person is the person entitled to enforce the note if any of the following is true:

  1. The person is the “holder” of the note,
  2. The person is in possession of the note, which was “transferred” to that person, but the person is not a “holder” of the note, and
  3. The note has been lost or destroyed (or is unavailable for other reasons) and the person who had been in possession was a person entitled to enforce the note

These alternatives for becoming the person entitled to enforce the mortgage note are satisfied (or not) as follows:

  • The first alternative is satisfied only if the person (or its agent) has possession of the mortgage note and the mortgage note is payable or endorsed to that person or endorsed in blank.
  • The second approach also requires that the person (or its agent) has possession of the mortgage note. If the mortgage note is not payable to the person in possession or to bearer, then the person is not a “holder.” However, if the mortgage note was “delivered” to the person in possession “for the purpose of giving” that person the right to enforce the instrument, the second alternative applies.
  • The third alternative requires proof of the elements noted above, along with the terms of the mortgage note.

Transfer of Ownership

Unlike Article 3, Article 9 applies to interests in both negotiable and non-negotiable instruments. UCC § 9-102(a)(47). Article 9 applies to both a security interest in a mortgage note to secure an obligation and to the rights of a buyer of a mortgage note. UCC § 9-109(a)(1) and (3). Article 9 thus determines the requirements for an “effective” transfer of rights in those two situations. UCC § 9-203.

The requirements for an effective transfer of ownership (in the case of a sale) or a security interest to secure an obligation (in the case of a loan secured by the mortgage note) are straightforward:

  1. Value must be given–this is typically satisfied by the payment of the purchase price in the case of a sale of a mortgage note and the promise to make a loan or the advance of the loan amount in the case of a security interest to secure an obligation. UCC § 1-204.
  2. The seller or person creating the security interest to secure an obligation must have “rights” in the mortgage note–this too is usually easy to satisfy.
  3. Generally, the seller or person creating a security interest to secure an obligation must “authenticate” a security agreement describing the mortgage note. UCC § 9-203(b)(3)(A). Whether the agreement covers the sale of the mortgage note or a security interest to secure an obligation, the agreement sufficiently describes the mortgage note if the agreement “reasonably identifies” the mortgage note. UCC § 9-108(a). For example, a description of mortgage notes by “category” or “type” is sufficient. UCC § 9-108(b)(2) and (3). (An oral (or other unauthenticated) security agreement is also possible in some circumstances. UCC § 9-203(b)(3)(B)).

If these requirements are satisfied, the buyer or lender with a security interest in a mortgage note to secure an obligation obtains a property interest in the note as owner or holder of the security interest to secure an obligation.

The Mortgage Follows the Note

The law in the United States has long followed the Mary’s Little Lamb rule–wherever the mortgage note goes the related mortgage is sure to follow. Restatement (Third) of Property (Mortgages) § 5.4. UCC § 9-203(g) codifies this rule for both sales of a mortgage note and a security interest in a mortgage note to secure an obligation. Further, perfection of a security interest in the mortgage note (whether in favor of a buyer or a lender with a security interest to secure an obligation) also perfects the security interest in the buyer’s or lender’s security interest in the seller’s or borrower’s rights in the mortgage. References to a “mortgage” in UCC § 9-203(g) include other types of consensual rights in real property to secure an obligation, such as a deed of trust. UCC § 9-102(a)(55).

Getting the Mortgage in the Secured Party’s Name

To save effort and money for all concerned, often a buyer of a mortgage note or a lender with a security interest in the mortgage note to secure an obligation will not record an assignment of the mortgage in the real estate records. As Article 9 makes clear, recording an assignment is not necessary for the buyer or lender to perfect its rights in the seller’s or borrower’s rights in the mortgage.

However, if the buyer or lender wants to foreclose, it may not have and may not be able to obtain the documents necessary to record the assignment in the real estate records, which may be necessary under local real estate law. Article 9 provides a procedure for the buyer or lender to record a document in the real estate records to reflect that assignment. UCC § 9-607(b).

Conclusion

The PEB Report describes the application of selected provisions of UCC Articles 3 and 9 to several key issues that may come up in connection with mortgage notes. There may well be additional UCC issues or issues arising under other law that also must be resolved, but the Report should help both practitioners and courts understand many of the issues that the UCC addresses in this area.

Transactional Attorneys and Pro Bono Asylum Work—A Better Match Than You Might Think

Each year, thousands of people flee persecution in their home countries and seek protection in the United States in the form of asylum. Applying for asylum in the United States requires an understanding of the laws of our country and familiarity with our legal procedures. Most applicants for asylum are financially strained and woefully unequipped to effectively represent themselves, making the need for pro bono representation in the field of asylum law especially crucial.

At major law firms, where practices are generally divided into either transactional or litigation groups, conventional wisdom holds that the work of representing asylum-seekers is best suited for litigators. After all, representing an asylum-seeker often involves traditional litigation skills, such as arguing a case in front of an adjudicator, writing a legal brief, and preparing a witness to testify.

However, there is much to be said about the unique skills developed by attorneys practicing in the transactional field that can be applied to pro bono work in asylum law. Such skills can render a transactional attorney uniquely well-position to serve as an outstanding advocate for an asylum-seeker, for whom legal representation could mean the difference between being allowed to live safely in this country or being returned to the arms of persecutors.

To be sure, there are certain skills that attorneys develop in either a transactional or litigation practice–including empathy, intellectual curiosity, excellent listening skills, integrity, and a devotion to high quality work product–that are essential when representing asylum-seekers. Nonetheless, the nature of work in a transactional field provides special training for several important characteristics, as discussed below.

Attention to Detail

We transactional attorneys are the detail attorneys. We are trained to find the single item of concern in the far corner of a page buried in a stack of agreements, and to know quickly how to make connections within seemingly distant aspects of a financing. Our eyes are sharp, and so is our passion for finding even the most insignificant of discrepancies, knowing that such may be the most vital aspect of a transaction.

This skill is a true advantage in asylum work. Because a case depends largely on an adjudicator’s determination of the applicant’s credibility, completing an application for asylum requires careful attention to detail. In determining credibility, immigration judges consider, among other things, the consistency between an applicant’s written or oral statements, the internal consistency of such statements, as well as any inaccuracies or falsehoods contained in the applicant’s statements, whether or not material to the asylum claim. So, while seemingly minor details of an application–for example, names of towns or approximate dates of events–may not be material to the specific events of an asylum-seeker’s persecution, any discrepancy has the potential to lead to a finding of non-credibility, and, in turn, to a denial of an asylum claim. Having an attorney with a keen appreciation for detail–who looks carefully over an application, as well as between the application, the written affidavit and the various supporting documents–can better ensure an applicant is presenting an accurate and consistent narrative in a way that will avoid an application being denied for otherwise insignificant reasons.

Cultural Understanding

In the increasingly global market place, more and more of our transactional representations require us to think and act across borders. As our clients and financial markets cross borders, transactional attorneys are increasingly gaining experience interacting and negotiating with clients and attorneys from across the globe. Law firms are also merging internationally, giving transactional attorneys more routine cross-cultural interaction. As a result, transactional attorneys today are developing a sensitivity to cultural, religious, and other differences, in a way that our colleagues in the litigation field may not.

Such expertise is precisely the type of skill that can have a positive impact in a pro bono asylum case. Asylum-seekers do not come to the United States from just one or two places. In fact, the top countries of origin in recent years have included China, Haiti, Colombia, India, Ethiopia, Egypt, and Somalia. In 2010, 148 different nationalities were represented among successful asylum cases in U.S. Immigration Courts. Accordingly, asylum-seekers speak a host of different languages and come from all walks of life. Asylum-seekers come to our country with varying concepts of social class relations, gender roles, and even the importance of date and time in defining events. Having an attorney who appreciates that such differences may exist and who is willing to find creative ways to address these differences can have an immeasurable impact on the outcome of a case.

Access to Business Expertise

In most transactional practices, attorneys work with clients over a long period of time. Our clients are in the world of business, and often have bodies of knowledge and expertise that can be put to excellent use in asylum cases. While relationships between attorneys and clients in the litigation realm may typically last only a brief amount of time, relationships in the transactional field are relatively longer-lasting. Especially at large law firms, clients in the transactional realm come to us for repeated transactions, and seek us out in between transactions as issues require attention.

The relationships we develop with business professionals can be of special use in an asylum case. Most observers agree that one of the most critical elements in a case can be identifying an expert witness who can help bring an added layer of credibility to an asylum-seeker’s testimony. Often times, it can be especially difficult for an asylum-seeker to identify and obtain the assistance of potential expert witnesses, while a transactional attorney may have much better access. Transactional attorneys in media law might find that their media clients can serve as excellent resources when taking on pro bono cases for journalists fleeing their countries because of their political opinions. Transactional attorneys in educational law may have developed relationships with individuals at universities, including professors and researchers, who could serve, or readily identify colleagues to serve, as expert witnesses in a variety of cases. In my field of public finance, many of my clients are hospitals. Many of my pro bono cases have involved instances of past physical abuse for which a medical evaluation was helpful in documenting past persecution. Several of my past pro bono clients have demonstrated symptoms of post traumatic stress disorder, for whom receiving professional mental health services has been critical. I have found that my relationships with transactional clients have helped me to identify medical professionals who can offer advice and support, including in the form of written affidavits or oral testimony. Such relationships can certainly make a difference, by providing corroboration for an asylum-seeker’s narrative and by providing victims of abuse with the treatment they desperately need.

The need for the services of pro bono attorneys in the field of asylum law is great, and such need cannot be met by our colleagues in the litigation field alone. Unlike the criminal justice system, there are no provisions made by the government to provide asylum-seekers with legal representation. Even in removal proceedings, which are held before an immigration judge, the Immigration and Nationality Act states that asylum-seekers may be represented by counsel but that such representation shall be at no expense to the government. Not surprisingly, the U.S. Department of Justice’s Executive Office for Immigration Review, which has oversight of the immigration court system, has stated that the large number of asylum-seekers appearing pro se is of great concern. In 2010, 57 percent of cases in immigration court were pro se, and in 2009, 60 percent of cases were pro se. Studies have found that having representation in court is the single most important factor affecting the outcome of the asylum-seeker’s case. Indeed, one recent study found that from January 2000 through August 2004, asylum-seekers with representation were granted asylum at a rate of 45.6 percent, compared with only 16.3 percent for pro se asylum-seekers over the same period.

Even for transactional attorneys worried about extending their pro bono practices outside of their transactional field, odds are they would ultimately feel satisfied with their pro bono representation of asylum-seekers. A 2009 report from the ABA on pro bono work looked in part at the types of pro bono engagements that attorneys take on. ( Supporting Justice II: A Report on the Pro Bono Work of America’s Lawyers (2009) .) The ABA found that while about 80 percent of pro bono attorneys carried out their representation in an area within the scope of their regular practice, only 27 percent of the attorneys who practiced in pro bono outside of their field of expertise indicated that such representation caused them any concern. This should provide comfort for transactional attorneys looking to step outside of their day-to-day practice and take on the challenge of representing an asylum-seeker.

So clearly there is a place for transactional attorneys to make a difference. With the unique talents and experiences that come from transactional work, transactional attorneys are well-positioned to make excellent and needed contributions to the field. The work of a pro bono attorney can truly make a life-altering difference for someone in need.

Corporate Director’s Guidebook—Sixth Edition

FOREWORD

This is the Sixth Edition of the Corporate Director’s Guidebook. Since its initial publication in 1978, directors, business executives, advisors, students of corporate governance, and others have all come to rely on the advice and commentary in the Guidebook. Indeed, the Guidebook is the most frequently cited handbook in its field.

The primary purpose of the Guidebook is to provide concise guidance to corporate directors in meeting their responsibilities. The Guidebook focuses on the role of the individual director, in the context of providing advice about the duties and operation of the board and its key committees (audit, nominating and governance, and compensation). Although many director decisions and tasks occur against a legal backdrop, we emphasize the law only in limited instances and otherwise attempt to avoid legalisms.

The Fifth Edition of the Guidebook, published in 2007, assumed that certain legal reforms like the Sarbanes-Oxley Act were a baseline for director action and focused on company performance under the spotlight of investor interests. This Sixth Edition is being published in the wake of the 2007–2010 financial crisis and the resulting legislation, the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (Dodd-Frank Act). As a result, this edition emphasizes themes arising out of the crisis and important to all directors, particularly those in public companies.

The Sixth Edition explores the role of directors in overseeing both strategy and risk. Strategy and risk are interrelated, and directors cannot understand and guide strategy without also focusing on risk. Corporations must manage risks appropriately. Although not engaged in day-to-day risk management, directors are charged with its oversight.

Today, director decisions are subject to a much more significant level of public and shareholder scrutiny than ever before. To help directors engage in effective oversight and decision-making processes in the current environment, the Sixth Edition emphasizes the following:

  • Risk management and its role in company strategy and operations;
  • Executive compensation decision-making by compensation committees, with a focus on the links between compensation, performance, and risk;
  • Chief Executive Officer (CEO) succession planning and its relationship to strategy and risk oversight;
  • Enhanced shareholder activism and power, including the pressure for proxy access in director elections; and
  • New federal statutory and regulatory requirements that set forth legal baselines for boards and public companies.

The Sixth Edition also adds an appendix of corporate governance websites and blogs, as well as listings for associations, institutional investors, and other resources.

The Guidebook provides important information for directors of public companies, but it is also relevant to directors of all companies in understanding their duties and obligations. In short, it provides a concise guide to boardroom best practices for all directors. The Corporate Laws Committee hopes directors and their advisors will benefit from this Sixth Edition of the Guidebook.

    Respectfully submitted,

A. Gilchrist Sparks, III

Chair

Corporate Laws Committee

CORPORATE LAWS COMMITTEE

The Corporate Laws Committee of the American Bar Association’s Section of Business Law is composed of active or former practicing lawyers, law professors, regulators, and judges with corporate law expertise from throughout the United States and Canada. In addition to the Corporate Director’s Guidebook and other scholarly writings, the Committee is responsible for the development of the Model Business Corporation Act.

The Model Act, first issued in 1950, has been adopted substantially in its entirety by more than thirty states in the United States and in important respects by many other states. The Model Act has played an important role in the development of corporate law in the United States and elsewhere.

The Committee serves as the permanent editorial board for the Model Act, reviewing, revising, and updating its provisions on a continuing basis. Moreover, the Committee publishes the Model Business Corporation Act Annotated, a comprehensive compilation of the Model Act and cases and authorities relevant to its provisions.

The roster of active Committee participants during the publication of the Guidebook’s Sixth Edition (including appointed members, consultants, and liaisons from other ABA committees) is listed below.

 

Frederick H. Alexander

Wilmington, DE

Claudia H. Allen

Chicago, IL

Stuart D. Ames

Miami, FL

Professor Stephen M. Bainbridge

Los Angeles, CA

Lawrence J. Beaser

Philadelphia, PA

Alan L. Beller

New York, NY

James H. Cheek, III

Nashville, TN

William H. Clark, Jr.

Philadelphia, PA

Richard E. Climan

East Palo Alto, CA

John P. Coffey

Bronxville, NY

Professor James D. Cox

Durham, NC

Professor Michael P. Dooley

Charlottesville, VA

Karl J. Ege

Seattle, WA

Professor Lisa M. Fairfax

Washington, DC

Margaret M. Foran

Newark, NJ

Diane Holt Frankle

East Palo Alto, CA

Mark J. Gentile

Wilmington, DE

Allen Cunningham Goolsby

Richmond, VA

 

———————

Holly J. Gregory

New York, NY

Carol Hansell

Toronto, Ontario

Whitney Holmes

Denver, CO

Mary Ann Jorgenson

Cleveland, OH

Eliot L. Kaplan

Phoenix, AZ

Stanley Keller

Boston, MA

Thomas J. Kim

Washington, DC

David B.H. Martin

Washington, DC

Michael R. McAlevey

Fairfield, CT

 

David C. McBride

Wilmington, DE

Thomas R. McNeill

Atlanta, GA

James P. Melican

Naples, FL

James C. Morphy

New York, NY

Patrick Pohlen

Menlo Park, CA

Steven A. Rosenblum

New York, NY

 

 

Kim K.W. Rucker

New York, NY

Professor Hillary A. Sale

St. Louis, MO

Larry P. Scriggins

Baltimore, MD

Marshall L. Small

San Francisco, CA

Laurie Smiley

Kirkland, WA

A. Gilchrist Sparks, III

Wilmington, DE

 

 

The Honorable Leo E. Strine, Jr.

Wilmington, DE

Tina S. Van Dam

Midland, MI

The Honorable E. Norman Veasey

Wilmington, DE

Robert M. Walmsley, Jr.

New Orleans, LA

Herbert S. Wander

Chicago, IL

James B. Zimpritch

Portland, ME

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

This edition of the Guidebook, like its predecessors, explores the relationship of the board of directors to the CEO and other senior management officers as well as to shareholders. Directors are elected by the shareholders and have a duty to advance the interests of the corporation to the exclusion of their own interests. Shareholders do not have the right to manage the corporation. Instead, the board of directors oversees the business and affairs of the corporation and delegates to the officers the day-to-day operation of the enterprise. This book focuses on the balance in the allocation of rights and duties, emphasizing the ways in which directors of public corporations devote their time and experience to the strategy and oversight of the company’s business.

The book is geared to the individual directors of public companies, or those with public shareholders and a trading market for their shares. The Guidebook is, however, relevant to all corporate directors. It provides an overview or guide to the role of the board, the functions and responsibilities of the board, and the board’s structure, including committees and operations. The goal is to help directors be effective in fulfilling their duties to the corporation and in the boardroom.

Directors make many decisions on a regular basis. In doing so, they must apply their business judgment based on reasonably available material information and act in what they reasonably believe to be the best interests of the corporation. In some cases, a board may even make a decision, in good faith, knowing that a substantial percentage of shareholders might disagree with that decision.

In today’s world, most directors are “independent directors.” The key challenge for directors is to oversee the corporation’s activities and strategy by utilizing effective oversight processes and making informed decisions, without becoming day-to-day managers. In doing so, directors must be cognizant of their obligation to act free of conflicts and in what they perceive to be the best interests of all shareholders. This Guidebook helps directors meet that responsibility by explaining how they can exercise their oversight and decision-making responsibilities and by identifying the boardroom practices and procedures that support and promote effective director involvement.

Importantly, directors exercise their decision-making powers only by acting collectively, either as a board or as a board committee. Judgment, however, is exercised individually, and informed judgment requires individual preparation and participation, as well as group deliberation. Effective board oversight results from both group deliberation and from the recognition by an individual that a particular matter warrants further inquiry or action.

Corporations are creatures of the state in which they are incorporated. For corporate directors and the corporation itself, that means that the statutes and state court decisions of the state of incorporation will govern many corporate decisions and processes. The same is true of judicial decisions. Public corporations, however, are also subject to federal securities laws and regulations and the listing standards of the major securities markets. The Guidebook addresses the federal securities law regime and the listing standards that mandate specific governance processes. The Guidebook does not, however, address industry-specific federal or state regimes, such as, for example, regulations applicable to financial institutions or utilities.

Importantly, most directors are not lawyers, and, as a result, where appropriate, they should seek legal advice to ensure they satisfy legal requirements and properly support the board’s deliberative decision-making processes. Although not all corporations have an internal general counsel, for convenience, the Guidebook uses the term “general counsel” to refer to both internal and external lawyers who fulfill that role.

SECTION 2: JOINING A BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Joining a board and serving as a director can and should be a challenging, exciting, and rewarding experience. Board service entails significant responsibilities and requires a significant personal investment of time and attention. Directors must fulfill fiduciary duties of care and loyalty. Because directors put their reputations at stake, the decision whether to join a board should not be made casually.

An individual considering an invitation to join a board should carefully study the corporation, its business, its history, its board, and its senior management. The candidate should understand the reasons for the invitation and the board’s expectations. For example, would the candidate be expected to serve in a particular role on the board or any of its committees—perhaps as a member of the nominating and governance committee or as a designated “financial expert” on the audit committee?

The discussion in this Guidebook focuses on public company directors. Most directors of private corporations will likely have some ownership interest in or connection to the corporation, its founder, or its owners. If asked to join the board of a private company or a closely controlled company, an individual should explore the expected role of an outsider on the board and understand the corporation’s shareholder base (including any factions among the shareholders), its business, its reputation, and its legal profile. In addition, the candidate should understand the directors’ relationships with the shareholders; determine whether independent legal judgment is really desired and whether advice will be available if requested (and, if so, from whom); inquire whether an initial public offering of the corporation is contemplated; and consider taking some of the steps described in the following list, such as reviewing the corporation’s financial information and becoming familiar with its director and officer insurance coverage.

When asked to join the board of a public company, an individual should first assess the following:

  • whether the opportunity to serve on the board is sufficiently compelling to engage the individual’s serious interest and attention in light of competing commitments;
  • whether the individual has (i) sufficient time and flexibility to perform diligently the required duties for a director of that company, including if a corporate crisis or major transaction should arise; (ii) scheduling conflicts that would unduly interfere with the board’s normal meeting schedule; (iii) requisite skills and experience to participate meaningfully as a director of that company; and (iv) any present, foreseeable, or perceived conflicts of interest with the corporation, its business, or its senior management (e.g., material relationships with competitors, potential acquisition targets, potential acquirers, or close personal or business ties to the CEO, other directors, or other senior members of the management team);
  • whether the individual has or can develop a sufficient depth of understanding of the corporation’s business, business model, and competitive environment to be an effective director; and
  • whether the individual believes that senior management and the board have integrity and conduct themselves in an honest and ethical manner.

A candidate still interested in the opportunity and who believes that she or he has the ability to be an effective director and add value to the corporation should take the following steps:

  • meet with the nominating/corporate governance committee chair, board chair, lead director and/or other board representatives who extended the invitation, and with the CEO and other senior members of management, to discuss the corporation’s strategy, principal issues, board organization and procedures, and committee memberships contemplated for the individual;
  • assess the attitude of the CEO and senior management toward shareholder accountability and board activity to determine whether a proactive board and independent director judgment are truly desired;
  • review the corporation’s recent public disclosure documents, such as press releases, investor presentations, and SEC filings to learn about the corporation, including the nature of its business, its financial condition, risk factors, and stability of its current business activities and future prospects;
  • determine whether there are company- or industry-specific factors requiring special understanding or attention—for example, a financially challenged or distressed corporation may require specialized experience or an unusual time commitment, or a company facing serious competition or cyclic challenges may benefit from particular expertise; and
  • gather information about the corporation’s reputation in the investment community and in the business world generally, by reviewing press and analyst reports and conducting internet and other searches.

If, following preliminary diligence, the individual understands the corporation’s strategy, business activities, risks, culture, and prospects, and has a continuing and serious interest in the directorship opportunity, she or he should take these additional steps:

  • learn the structure and processes the board uses to provide effective oversight, including (i) the corporation’s corporate governance principles or guidelines and committee charters; (ii) the routine operation of the board and its committees, including its access to and interface with the CEO, CFO, and other senior management officers; (iii) the methods employed for monitoring and evaluating board and committee performance; (iv) the tone and culture of executive sessions of independent directors; (v) the “tone at the top” for integrity and diligence; and (vi) the procedures for appointments, evaluation, and succession planning related to senior executive officers, including the CEO;
  • review the audit committee’s membership and procedures and meet with the audit committee chair to discuss any recent or current critical financial or accounting issues (including rating agency concerns, if any), the clarity and transparency of public disclosures respecting the corporation’s financial affairs, and the effectiveness of the corporation’s programs to address risk management and legal compliance issues;
  • review recent examples of the “meeting book” provided to directors in advance of meetings and other information regularly provided to the directors;
  • identify the corporation’s regular internal and external legal and financial advisors and learn their role and participation in and availability to the corporation’s and the board’s activities;
  • understand, based on appropriate professional advice, the corporation’s director exculpation, indemnification, and litigation expense advancement provisions (in organizational documents and contracts) and the amount and scope of coverage provided by the corporation’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance, the quality of the corporation’s insurance carrier(s), and whether the corporation has provided the outside directors with separate insurance;
  • request a briefing on significant claims or litigation against the corporation, especially any that involve the activities of the board of directors or involve any entity with which the prospective director is already affiliated; and
  • understand director compensation arrangements and determine whether they are commensurate with the effort required and the risk undertaken.

The corporation may require a confidentiality commitment from the candidate covering the disclosure of any non-public information regarding the corporation’s business and affairs. The corporation typically reimburses reasonable out-of-pocket expenses, such as travel expenses, incurred in the due diligence process.

When serving on a board, directors often value most the opportunity to collaborate on tough issues with other experienced business people who bring a wide variety of approaches, styles, and experience to boardroom deliberations. Directors must be able to work toward building consensus on issues. To facilitate this collaboration and decision-making process, directors must be able to formulate and articulate their views and engage in constructive dialogue in an atmosphere of candor, mutual respect, and confidentiality. Accordingly, in addition to the diligence steps outlined above, a candidate should attempt to assess the board’s collegiality and culture of constructive skepticism, to the extent feasible from an outsider’s perspective.

SECTION 3: RESPONSIBILITIES, RIGHTS, AND DUTIES OF A CORPORATE DIRECTOR

Directors have a responsibility to act in the best interests of the corporation and its shareholders. To do so, they must focus on maximizing the value of the corporation for the benefit of its shareholders. Directors fulfill this responsibility through two primary board functions: decision-making and oversight. The board’s decision-making function generally involves considering and, if warranted, approving corporate policy and strategic goals and taking specific actions such as evaluating and selecting top management, approving major expenditures and transactions, and acquiring and disposing of material assets. The board’s oversight function involves monitoring the corporation’s business and affairs including, for example, financial performance, management performance, compliance with legal obligations and corporate policies, and evaluating appropriate risk management structures. Both functions require that directors develop an understanding of the corporation’s business and the environment in which it operates, including the risks and opportunities it faces, and management’s capacity to run the business while managing risks. In addition, directors need to ensure that they have sufficient information to engage in informed decision-making and oversight.

Although the board is responsible for managing and overseeing corporate affairs, it typically delegates responsibility for day-to-day operations to a team of professional managers. Management has responsibility for such tasks. Directors must oversee the corporation’s activities effectively and make informed decisions without usurping the role of management.

Directors have, individually and collectively, various responsibilities and rights, described more fully in the next section. Directors should keep in mind that, aside from specific tasks that the board delegates to board committees, the board acts as a collective body. Further, even for delegated tasks, the board must continue to provide oversight. Directors must, however, exercise judgment on an individual basis, and informed judgment depends upon each director’s individual evaluation, preparation, and participation, as well as on group deliberation and interaction.

Federal laws and regulations, the listing standards of national securities markets, as well as judicial interpretations of state laws, have all increased the compliance and disclosure obligations for the board and management of public companies. These obligations do not, however, change the fundamental principles governing director action.

A. BOARD RESPONSIBILITIES

State corporate statutes define the relationship between the board and management of the corporation. In general, state laws provide that all corporate powers shall be exercised by or under the authority of the corporation’s board of directors, and its business and affairs shall be managed by or under the direction of, and subject to the oversight of, the board. Thus, typically, the board delegates management to officers and is then responsible for overseeing the corporation while management conducts the corporation’s daily affairs.

State corporate statutes emphasize the board’s responsibility to make major decisions on behalf of the corporation and to oversee the management of the corporation. Although these statutes do not specifically define board responsibilities, the following tasks are generally undertaken by the board and its committees:

  • monitoring the corporation’s performance in light of its operating, financial, and other significant corporate plans, strategies, and objectives, and approving major changes in plans and strategies;
  • selecting the CEO, setting goals for the CEO and other senior executives, reviewing their performance, evaluating and establishing their compensation, and making changes when appropriate;
  • developing, approving, and implementing succession plans for the CEO and top senior executives;
  • understanding the corporation’s risk profile and reviewing and overseeing the corporation’s management of risks;
  • understanding the corporation’s financial statements and other financial disclosures and monitoring the adequacy of its financial and other internal controls, as well as its disclosure controls and procedures;
  • evaluating and approving major transactions such as mergers, acquisitions, significant expenditures, and the disposition of major assets; and • establishing and monitoring effective systems for receiving and reporting information about the corporation’s compliance with its legal and ethical obligations.

As the foregoing reveals, the board’s principal responsibilities are to select the top management for the corporation, plan for succession, and provide general direction and guidance with respect to the corporation’s strategy and management’s conduct of the business. In so doing, the board should give significant consideration to the corporation’s financial and business objectives, as well as its risk profile.

In recent years, the average tenure of a CEO has fallen, making succession planning important, both for unexpected emergencies and with the long term in mind. Boards must develop, approve, and implement succession plans for the CEO and top senior executives. Some corporations establish separate succession planning committees, and in others, succession planning is a matter for the compensation or nominating committee or the full board. There is no “one size fits all” model for succession planning, but the board should take an active role in assessing on an ongoing basis whether the current senior management team is appropriate for the needs of the organization, as well as in implementing and periodically reviewing management development and succession plans. Through this process, boards gain the knowledge required to develop judgment about the corporation’s potential future leaders.

The board safeguards the corporation’s integrity and reputation. The CEO and senior management must take the leadership role to promote integrity, honesty, and ethical conduct throughout the organization. The board’s role is to assess the CEO’s commitment and efforts in this area, support and encourage appropriate values (including through policies and incentives), and provide oversight of the programs and procedures that management implements to support behaviors and identify issues that may arise (including reporting mechanisms). This board role includes directing the CEO and other members of the senior management team to establish the proper “tone at the top” by setting clear expectations for the corporation’s ethical behavior and conduct of its business in compliance with law.

A number of state corporation statutes expressly allow the board to consider the interests of employees, suppliers, and customers, as well as the communities in which the corporation operates and the environment. Of course, the board remains accountable primarily to shareholders for the performance of the corporation. Thus, non-shareholder constituency considerations are best understood not as independent corporate objectives but as factors to be considered in pursuing the best interests of the corporation. Indeed, being responsive to stakeholder interests and concerns can contribute positively to corporate valuation, its workplace culture, and reputation for integrity and ethical behavior.

Increasingly, boards—and, as directed, board committees—engage in periodic communications with shareholders. Board efforts to enhance shareholder communication and dialogue require sensitivity to director confidentiality requirements, as well as federal regulations on “selective” disclosure. In light of such obligations, individual directors should understand and abide by the board’s policies on confidentiality and selective disclosure and avoid responding to shareholder inquiries or communicating with any shareholders. Instead, shareholder communication and engagement should be undertaken on a coordinated and not an ad hoc basis.

B. INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITIES

To be effective, a director must understand the corporation’s business, operations, and competitive environment. This knowledge is fundamental to the director’s ability to form an objective judgment about corporate and senior management performance and strategic direction, and to challenge, support, and reward management as warranted. Accordingly, a director’s understanding of the corporation and its industry should include:

  • the corporation’s business plan;
  • the key drivers underlying the corporation’s profitability and cash flow— how the corporation makes money both as a whole and also in its significant business segments;
  • the corporation’s operational and financial plans, strategies, and objectives and how they further the goal of enhancing shareholder value;
  • the corporation’s economic, financial, regulatory, and competitive risks, as well as risks to the corporation’s physical assets, intellectual property, personnel, and reputation;
  • the corporation’s financial condition and the results of its operations and those of its significant business segments for recent periods; and
  • the corporation’s performance compared with that of its competitors.

In addition, a director should be satisfied that effective systems exist for timely reporting to, and consideration by, the board or relevant board committees of the following:

  • corporate objectives and strategic plans;
  • current business and financial performance of the corporation and its significant business segments, as compared to board-approved objectives and plans;
  • material risk and liability contingencies, including industry risk, current and threatened litigation, and regulatory matters; and
  • systems of company controls designed to manage risk and to provide reasonable assurance of compliance with law and corporate policies.

Directors should do their homework so that they are prepared to participate actively. In addition to attending board and committee meetings, they should review board and committee agendas and related materials sufficiently in advance of meetings to enable them to participate actively in the deliberative process. Directors should expect to receive drafts of minutes of board and committee meetings in a reasonably prompt time frame, so that they can assure that minutes accurately reflect their recollections of what occurred at meetings and that identified active items are being pursued. Directors should also keep informed about the activities of board committees on which they do not serve.

More generally, directors should have an attitude of constructive skepticism. Directors should not be reticent or passive. To be a director means to direct—to participate on an informed basis, ask questions, challenge management as appropriate, apply considered business judgment to matters brought before the board, and when necessary, bring other matters to the full board’s attention.

Each director works for the benefit of the corporation—even if nominated or designated by a subset of the shareholder body (e.g., holders of preferred stock who may have special rights to elect a director), elected in a proxy contest, or appointed by the board to fill a vacancy. Directors may consider the interests of particular shareholders when performing their decision-making and oversight duties, but all directors must act in the best interests of the corporation and all of its shareholders.

C. RIGHTS

Because of important business decision and oversight responsibilities, all directors have both legal and customary rights of access to the information and resources needed to do the job. Among the most important are the rights:

  • to inspect books and records;
  • to request additional information reasonably necessary to exercise informed oversight and make careful decisions;
  • to inspect facilities as reasonably appropriate to gain an understanding of corporate operations;
  • to receive timely notice of all meetings in which a director is entitled to participate;
  • to receive copies of key documents and of all board and committee meeting minutes; and
  • to receive regular oral or written reports of the activities of all board committees.

In addition, within reasonable time and manner constraints, directors generally have the right of access to key executives and other employees of the corporation and to the corporation’s legal counsel and other advisors to obtain information relevant to the performance of their duties. Directors may (and should) request that any issue of concern be put on the board (or appropriate committee) agenda.

The right to information is accompanied by the duty to keep corporate information confidential and not to misuse information for personal benefit or for the benefit of others. For example, individual directors do not have the right to share confidential information with shareholders who nominate or elect them—unless they have express authority from the board (and subject to selective disclosure and insider trading prohibitions).

The board and its committees should expect the general counsel, if there is one, to be available as a resource to advise them. Correspondingly, the general counsel must recognize that the client is the corporation, as represented by the board of directors, and not the CEO or any other officer or group of managers. The board and board committees should have access to the corporation’s regular outside counsel, if one exists, and the authority to retain their own legal counsel and professional advisors, independent of those who usually advise the corporation. Indeed, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and the Dodd-Frank Act both grant specific committees the right to engage counsel and advisors. The chapters on individual committees address these issues.

D. LEGAL OBLIGATIONS

The baseline legal standard for director conduct is that each director must discharge director duties in good faith and in a manner that the director reasonably believes to be in the best interests of the corporation. This standard encompasses a “duty of care” and a “duty of loyalty.” To satisfy the duty of care, a director must act with the care that a person in a like position would reasonably believe appropriate under similar circumstances. The duty of loyalty focuses on avoidance (or appropriate handling) of conflicts of interests, and requires fair dealing by directors involved in transactions that result or could result in personal or financial conflicts with the corporation. The duty of loyalty also requires directors to act in good faith. A lack of good faith would include (i) acting intentionally with a purpose other than that of advancing the best interests of the corporation, (ii) acting with the intent to violate applicable law, or (iii) failing to act in the face of a known duty to act in a manner that demonstrates conscious disregard of, or extreme inattention to, the director’s duties.

1. Duty of Care

A director’s duty of care primarily relates to the responsibility to become and remain reasonably informed in making decisions and overseeing the corporation’s business. As noted above, directors satisfy their duty of care when they act with the care that a person in a like position would reasonably believe appropriate under similar circumstances. This “reasonable belief” incorporates a director’s personal belief, but it also must be based upon a rational analysis of the situation as understandable to others. The phrase “like position” means that a director’s actions must incorporate the basic attributes of common sense, practical wisdom, and informed judgment generally associated with the position of corporate director. The phrase “under similar circumstances” recognizes that the nature and extent of the preparation for and deliberations leading up to decision-making, and the level of oversight, vary depending on the corporation’s circumstances and the nature of the decision to be made.

In particular, satisfying the duty of care requires that directors have all material information reasonably available. Directors generally meet this standard by attending meetings, reading materials and otherwise preparing in advance of meetings, asking questions of management or advisors, requesting legal or other expert advice when desirable for a board decision, and bringing the director’s own knowledge and experience to bear. To meet the duty of care, directors should consider the following:

a. Time commitment and regular attendance

Directors should commit the required time to prepare for, attend regularly, and participate in board and committee meetings. By state law, directors may not participate or vote by proxy; personal participation is required. Directors who are physically present at a meeting have the opportunity to engage in spontaneous interactions that occur before, during, and after the meeting, and are more aware of the group’s dynamics. Personal participation may also take place by telephone or other means of communication by which all directors can hear each other.

b. Need to be informed and prepared

Directors must take appropriate steps to be informed. Without sufficient information, directors cannot participate meaningfully or fulfill their duties effectively. In most cases, the best source of information about the corporation is management. Directors can ask management to be present at board or committee meetings. To be informed and prepared directors should:

  • ensure that management provides directors with sufficient information about the corporation’s business and affairs;
  • request additional information when appropriate; and
  • ask questions to ensure that they understand the information provided.

Directors should establish expectations with respect to management provision of sufficient information in a timely manner. If management is unresponsive or otherwise fails to satisfy such expectations, the board should consider taking action including, in appropriate circumstances, replacing management. When contemplating specific actions, directors should receive the relevant information far enough in advance of the board or committee meeting to be able to study and reflect on the issues. Important, time-sensitive materials that become available between meetings should be promptly distributed to directors. Directors should review carefully the materials supplied. If a director believes that information is insufficient or inaccurate, or is not made available in a timely manner, the director should request that action be delayed until appropriate information is available and can be studied. If expert advice would be needed for a decision, the director should request that the board seek such advice.

c. Right to rely on others

In discharging board or committee duties, directors may rely in good faith on reports, opinions, information, and statements (including financial statements and other financial data) from:

  • corporate officers or employees whom the director reasonably believes to be reliable and competent in the matters presented;
  • legal counsel, public accountants, or other persons as to matters that the director reasonably believes to be within their professional or expert competence or as to which the person otherwise merits confidence; and
  • committees of the board on which the director does not serve.

Such reliance is permissible unless the director has knowledge that would make the reliance unwarranted. Delegation to a committee does not relieve a director of oversight responsibility. Instead, a director should keep informed about committee and board activities.

Directors also implicitly rely on each other’s statements, good faith, and judgment in making decisions for the corporation’s benefit. Reliance is particularly likely when some directors have substantial experience or expertise in an area germane to the corporation’s business—for example, by having specialized knowledge about a particular industry. Directors are expected to use their knowledge, experience, and special expertise for the benefit of all directors and the corporation generally.

Obtaining input from competent advisors is a hallmark of a careful decision-making process. For this reason, directors who rely in good faith on advisors, professionals, and other persons with particular expertise or competence generally enjoy broad protections from liability. Nevertheless, reliance is appropriate only if directors reasonably believe that the advice is within the person’s area of competence and if they selected that person with reasonable care. Directors have the final responsibility for their actions.

d. Inquiry

Directors should inquire into potential problems or issues when alerted by circumstances or events suggesting that board attention is appropriate. For example, inquiry is warranted when information appears materially inaccurate or inadequate, when there is reason to question the competence, loyalty, or candor of management or of an advisor, or when common sense calls for it under the circumstances. When directors have information indicating that the corporation is or may be experiencing significant problems in a particular area of business or may be engaging in potentially unlawful or unethical conduct, they should promptly make further inquiry and follow up until they are reasonably satisfied that management is dealing with the situation appropriately. Even when there are no “red flags,” directors should satisfy themselves periodically that the corporation maintains information systems and procedures that are appropriately designed to identify and manage compliance and business risks and are reasonably effective in maintaining compliance with laws and corporate policies and procedures.

e. Candor among directors

Candid discussion among directors and between directors and management is critical to effective board decision-making. Generally, directors must inform other directors and management about information material to corporate decisions of which they are aware. Directors occasionally also have legal or other duties of confidentiality owed to another corporation or entity. In such a situation, a director should seek legal advice regarding the director’s obligations, including reporting confidentiality obligations to the other directors and not participating in consideration of the matter.

2. Duty of Loyalty

The duty of loyalty requires directors to act in good faith and in the best interests of the corporation—and not in their own interests or in the interests of another person (e.g., a family member or potential competitor) or organization with which they are associated. There are many situations in which loyalty to the corporation is an issue. These situations fall into two basic categories. The first involves situations where directors’ personal or financial interests conflict with the corporation’s, and the second involves disloyalty to the corporation for reasons other than personal or financial conflicts of interest.

a. Acting in good faith

The fundamental requirement of loyalty is that directors must act with the good faith belief that their actions are in the best interests of the corporation. Directors fail to act in good faith when they are disloyal either because their actions are motivated by bad faith or because they intentionally or knowingly disregarded their duties or responsibilities. Directors may fail to act in good faith in a variety of ways, including the following:

  • intentionally acting with a purpose other than advancing the corporation’s best interests;
  • failing to act when there is a known duty to act;
  • acting with the intent to violate, or with intentional disregard of, an applicable law;
  • failing to cause the corporation to establish internal controls, risk management, or monitoring and compliance systems; or
  • failing to respond to red flags.

b. Conflicts of interest

Directors should not use their position for personal profit or gain or for any other personal or non-corporate advantage. They should seek to avoid conflicts of interest and should take special care to disclose potential conflicts and handle appropriately any conflicts that may arise. Directors should be alert and sensitive to any interest they may have that might conflict with the best interests of the corporation, and they should disclose such interests to the designated board representative or committee and the general counsel.

When directors have a direct or indirect financial or personal interest in a matter before the board for decision—including a contract or transaction to which the corporation is to be a party, or which involves the use of corporate assets, or which may involve competition with the corporation—they are considered “interested” in the matter. Interested directors should disclose the interest to the board members who are to act on the matter and disclose the relevant facts concerning it. Directors should refrain from engaging in any transaction with the corporation unless directors who do not share the conflict (“disinterested directors”) or disinterested shareholders approve the transaction after full disclosure of the conflict or the underlying action is demonstrably fair (and can be proved so in court if challenged).

Sometimes a conflict arises from a corporation’s plan to do business with an entity with which a director has a preexisting relationship. Upon learning of such a conflict, the director should fully disclose the relationship and other pertinent information. If the confidentiality obligations a director owes to a third party impair or proscribe full disclosure, a director may not be able to discharge the duties to the corporation and may need to recuse himself or herself from all participation concerning the matter, or even to resign.

In most situations, after disclosing the interest, describing the relevant facts, and responding to any questions, the interested director should leave the meeting while the disinterested directors complete their deliberations. This enables the disinterested directors to discuss the matter without being (or creating the appearance of being) influenced by the presence of the interested director. A director should generally abstain from voting on matters in which she or he has a conflict of interest. Disclosures of conflicts of interest and the results of the disinterested directors’ consideration of the matter should be documented in minutes or reports. In some cases, a special committee of disinterested directors to review and pass on the transaction may be appropriate.

Conflicting interest transactions are sometimes unavoidable and are not inherently improper. Disinterested directors or shareholders, with full disclosure of material information about the transaction, may authorize these transactions. State corporation statutes usually provide specific procedures for authorizing or ratifying interested director transactions. Those procedures safeguard both the corporation and any interested director, and protect the enforceability of any action taken. Otherwise, if the transaction is challenged, the interested director must establish the entire fairness of the transaction to the corporation, judged according to circumstances at the time of the commitment.

A transaction between a director, or the director’s immediate family, and the corporation is a “related person” transaction under the federal securities laws and may require disclosure in the corporation’s annual report, proxy statement, or other public filings. Even if the transaction does not require public disclosure, the corporation may be required to disclose in general terms whether the board considered the transaction in determining whether the director is an “independent” director under market listing standards. In addition, corporations may have their own policies in these areas. Waiving such a policy for a director may trigger a disclosure obligation. Directors should be familiar with these disclosure requirements and related corporate policies. Disinterested directors should consider the ramifications of any disclosures when voting on a matter involving a director conflict.

c. Fairness to the corporation

Disinterested directors reviewing the fairness of a transaction involving conflict of interest or self-dealing elements should seek to determine (i) whether the terms of the proposed transaction are at least as favorable to the corporation and its shareholders as might be available from unrelated persons or entities; (ii) whether the proposed transaction is reasonably likely to further the corporation’s business activities; and (iii) whether the process by which the decision is approved or ratified is fair. If the transaction could adversely affect shareholders, the directors should be especially concerned that those shareholders receive fair treatment. This concern increases when one or more directors or a dominant shareholder or shareholder group has a divergent or conflicting interest.

d. Independent advice

Independent advice regarding the merits of a conflict of interest or related person transaction is generally helpful. This advice may be contained (i) in oral or written fairness opinions, appraisals, or valuations by investment bankers or appraisers; (ii) in legal advice or opinions on various issues; or (iii) in analyses, reports, or recommendations by other relevant experts.

e. Corporate opportunity

The duty of loyalty is also implicated when an opportunity related to the business of the corporation, including its subsidiaries and affiliates, becomes available to a director. Directors must typically make such opportunities available to the corporation before they may pursue them. Whether directors must first offer an opportunity to the corporation will depend on factors such as whether the opportunity is similar to the corporation’s existing or contemplated business, the circumstances under which the director learned of the opportunity, and whether the corporation has an interest or expectancy in the opportunity.

If a director has reason to believe that a contemplated transaction might be a corporate opportunity, the director should bring it to the attention of the board and disclose the material information that the director knows about the opportunity. If the board, acting through its disinterested directors, disclaims interest in the opportunity on behalf of the corporation, then the director is free to pursue it.

3. Business Judgment Rule

Judicial review of challenged decisions will normally be governed by the “business judgment rule.” The business judgment rule is not a description of a duty or a standard for determining whether a breach of duty has occurred. It is a standard of judicial review used to analyze director conduct to determine whether a board decision can be challenged or a director will be personally liable.

The business judgment rule presumes that in making a business decision, independent and disinterested directors acted on an informed basis, in good faith, and in the honest belief that the action taken was in the best interests of the corporation. The rule applies to suits by shareholders acting for themselves or derivatively on behalf of the corporation. The court will determine only whether the directors making the decision were independent and disinterested in the matter, informed themselves before taking the action, and acted in the good-faith belief that the decision was in the best interests of the corporation. If so, the court will not second-guess the decision and the directors will be protected from personal liability to the corporation and its shareholders—even if the board’s decision turns out to be unwise or the results of the decision are unsuccessful. Importantly, the business judgment rule protects only decisions whether to take or not to take action. It does not, however, protect the failure to take action or conduct implicating breaches of the duty of loyalty.

4. Duty of Disclosure

Directors should never mislead or misinform shareholders. In addition, directors have an obligation to furnish shareholders with all relevant material information when presenting shareholders with a voting or investment decision. Directors also have a duty to inform fellow directors and management about information known to the director that is relevant to corporate decisions.

5. Confidentiality

A director must keep confidential all matters involving the corporation that have not been disclosed to the public. Directors must be aware of the corporation’s confidentiality, insider trading, and disclosure policies and comply with them. Although a public company director may receive inquiries from major shareholders, media, analysts, or friends to comment on sensitive issues, individual directors should avoid responding to such inquiries, particularly when confidential or market-sensitive information is involved. Instead, they should refer requests for information to the CEO or other designated spokesperson.

A director who improperly discloses non-public information to persons outside the corporation can, for example, harm the corporation’s competitive position or damage investor relations and, if the information is material, incur personal liability as a tipper of inside information or cause the corporation to violate federal securities laws. Equally important, unauthorized director disclosure of non-public information can damage the bond of trust between and among directors and management, discourage candid discussions, and jeopardize boardroom effectiveness and director collaboration.

E. SALE TRANSACTIONS AND ELECTION CONTESTS

The board of directors establishes a corporation’s long-term business strategy and the time frame for achieving corporate goals. Directors may consider the relative merits of various alternatives for the corporation over the short, medium, or long term.

The sale of the corporation is one of the most important matters boards consider. An outright sale of the company for cash ends the shareholders’ ownership of the business. A sale of the corporation for stock changes the form and substance of the shareholders’ investment in the business. Directors should consider not only the potential value of the transaction to shareholders (compared with other alternatives reasonably available to the corporation over a reasonable time frame), but also the risks inherent in the transaction, including the risk that the transaction will not close. If the transaction is publicly announced but is delayed or not completed, the corporation risks losing valuable employees and disrupting relationships with key customers and suppliers. Although every sale transaction presents this risk, directors should consider the relative likelihood of events that might result in delay or failure to close, such as regulatory issues, as well as the possible mitigation of these risks.

Before deciding to sell the corporation, the directors must seek the best reasonably available price and terms and may need to put protective measures in place to help achieve their goals. There is no single blueprint a board should follow to obtain the best price and terms. In most cases, the board should engage experienced advisors familiar with customary terms, market conditions, and the legal and financial issues involved.

A potential sale of the corporation may present conflicts of interest for directors and officers who stand to benefit from change-of-control provisions or who have pre-existing relationships with one or more potential acquirers or will become part of the acquiring group. In this situation, the board can continue to act with the interested directors absenting themselves from the discussion. If an interested party is in a position to control the decision, a court may review the transaction to determine whether it is fair to the corporation and its disinterested shareholders. Where potential conflicts of interest are present, it is prudent to have independent and disinterested directors—who are empowered to engage independent, qualified advisors—handle negotiations with the interested party. The corporation will also have enhanced disclosure obligations under federal and state law in connection with a potential sale of the corporation, including any golden parachutes or compensation provisions with certain senior executive officers.

Similarly, as addressed in Section 10, directors generally have enhanced disclosure and legal obligations in connection with election contests. Because these situations have the potential to raise various strategic and financial issues, as well as complicated legal issues, directors should obtain advice from experienced counsel and qualified financial advisors.

F. FINANCIAL DISTRESS SITUATIONS

The directors of a corporation facing potential default on obligations or bankruptcy must make decisions not encountered by the directors of financially healthy companies. Although directors’ general responsibilities continue to apply, circumstances of severe financial distress can alter corporate goals and enhance creditors’ rights vis-à-vis the corporation. If a corporation is in financial distress, the corporation should consider decisions regarding dividends and other distributions, recapitalizations, reorganizations, and other major corporate actions only with the benefit of legal advice from experienced counsel.

Insolvency is a legally significant status of financial distress. A corporation may be considered insolvent where the fair value of the corporation’s liabilities exceeds the fair value of its assets. Insolvency also may exist if the corporation is not able to pay its debts as they fall due in the ordinary course of business. Directors should seek the advice of management if they are uncertain whether the corporation is solvent and, when appropriate, hire experienced counsel and other advisors to provide advice on the matter.

Insolvency generally gives rise to additional legal protections to creditors. The laws of most states and the U.S. Bankruptcy Code prohibit transactions that may prejudice creditors’ ability to obtain payment from the corporation. A corporation may be liable under these laws if it is in financial distress and transfers assets of value without receiving reasonably equivalent value in return. Similarly, various state laws and the U.S. Bankruptcy Code prohibit corporations from preferring some creditors over others. Directors who approve corporate action violating such laws, thereby resulting in harm to the corporation, in turn, may be subject to claims of personal liability for alleged breaches of legal duties.

The laws of many states also provide that directors of financially distressed corporations may be personally liable to the corporation or its creditors for causing the corporation to pay dividends or make other distributions to shareholders. Notably, the current or imminent insolvency of a corporation implicates the directors’ duties in a subtle but important manner. Rather than managing the corporation to advance shareholder interests, the directors of an insolvent corporation, and in some states, directors of a corporation in the “zone of insolvency,” must seek to maximize the value of the corporation so that the corporation can pay off as many of its legal obligations as possible. The reasoning behind this is straightforward: the corporation’s first duty is to meet its legal obligations. When a corporation cannot do that, shareholders’ interests become a secondary consideration.

SECTION 4: RISK MANAGEMENT, COMPLIANCE, AND OVERSIGHT

Risk management is a particularly salient issue for directors today and a significant part of the directors’ duty of oversight of the business and affairs of the corporation. Effective oversight of risk management requires directors to assess the corporation’s programs designed to address risks with respect to both strategic and compliance aspects. The board’s role is forward-looking, involving overseeing and assessing programs and ensuring that management is implementing programs that effectively manage risk.

Directors should understand and assess the risks confronting the corporation. The board, or an appropriate committee, should require management to provide and should receive periodic reports describing and assessing the corporation’s programs for identifying financial, industry, and other business risks and for managing such risks to protect corporate assets and reputation. In addition, the board must ensure that its risk management overview addresses not just legal and compliance issues, but also devotes time to strategy, product innovations, cyclical risks, and the like. Finally, a full understanding of the risk-management controls and infrastructure requires assessing all aspects, including the prevention, mitigation, and remediation of risks.

Boards should determine their corporations’ risk/reward appetite and risk tolerance in various business areas and oversee those risks effectively. Informed risktaking is key to achieving the right risk/reward balance. Corporations can and do pursue strategies involving risk—and most worthwhile entrepreneurial activity entails risk. As a result, the board’s responsibility with respect to risk is threefold. The board must understand the material risks facing the corporation, including competitive, product, and industry risks. It must also understand the corporation’s appetite for risk and ensure that appropriate systems and processes are in place to identify, monitor, and where appropriate, mitigate risk. Finally, it must consider, and sometimes manage, any risks related to governance and compensation that management is unable to manage due to inherent conflicts.

There is no “ideal” risk management program for all corporations. Instead, a board must ensure the corporation’s programs address the risks facing their companies in an appropriate manner. The range of risk-management programs is quite broad. Risk-management programs may address product liability, quality assurance, information technology security, insurance, legal compliance, plant security, confidentiality, intellectual property, and crisis management. Boards must address core business risks, strategic and competitive risks, and, for example, those associated with product development. Regardless of the industry or risk-management area, the board should have an understanding of the programs more generally, rather than being involved in the day-to-day risk management. To achieve this balance, some corporations designate a chief risk officer and/or create a high-level management committee on risk, either of which reports regularly to the board. Financial services corporations, however, often have board committees focused exclusively on risk. In any case, directors should ensure that they have appropriate information to identify, understand, monitor, and evaluate the material risks associated with the corporation and its activities.

Risks typically fall into three general categories: legal, operational, and reputational. Legal risks arise because corporations must comply with laws and regulations, which they sometimes fail to do. Operational risks arise from, for example, strategic failures, inadequate internal controls, corporate governance failures, human or technical error, product innovations or the lack thereof, financial issues, mergers and acquisitions, and external events, such as damage to physical assets from natural or other disasters. Reputational risks arise any time a risk, whether legal or operational, actually occurs. These areas, of course, are interrelated. For example, a failure of a corporation’s internal controls can result in a misstatement of revenues, leading in turn to a restatement, followed by litigation. Thus, an operational risk can lead to a legal risk and, then, to a reputational risk. The remainder of this section develops specific areas of risk management in more detail.

A. COMPLIANCE WITH LAW

The board is responsible for overseeing management’s activities in assuring the corporation’s compliance with legal requirements in the jurisdictions in which the corporation does business. A well-conceived and properly implemented compliance program can significantly reduce the incidence of violations of laws and corporate policy. It can also reduce or eliminate lawsuits, penalties, and criminal prosecution. Although the federal sentencing guidelines greatly increase the penalties for corporations guilty of criminal violations, they also provide for significant fine reductions for corporations with effective programs in place to prevent and detect such violations. Directors should periodically satisfy themselves that an appropriate process is in place to detect violations and to encourage not only attention to general legal compliance issues and claims against the corporation, but also the timely reporting of significant legal or other compliance matters to the board or an appropriate board committee.

Boards should ensure that their companies have formal written policies designed to promote compliance with law and corporate policy. They should review policies periodically for effectiveness, including evaluating the range, depth, and frequency of training and other programs for employees. Further, if the corporation operates in an industry subject to laws and regulations that demand special compliance procedures and monitoring, the review should be more frequent and intensive. Many public companies assign compliance oversight to the audit committee, others to a governance or risk committee. These committees meet regularly with the company’s appropriate business operations leaders and general counsel or outside counsel to be briefed on compliance and claims. With the increased burdens placed on public company audit committees, some boards have elected to form a separate compliance or legal affairs committee. Directors should consider whether delegating oversight for multiple compliance issues to a single board committee is sufficient for the corporation’s legal and regulatory compliance profile.

The board should ensure that employees of the corporation are informed and periodically reminded of corporate policies, including those pertaining to compliance with (i) codes of business conduct and ethics; (ii) anti-discrimination and employment laws; (iii) environmental and health and safety laws; (iv) anti-bribery laws; (v) antitrust and competition laws; (vi) securities laws, particularly those addressing insider trading; and (vii) laws and regulations of other countries as applicable. The major securities markets require their listed companies to adopt codes of business conduct and ethics applicable to all employees, officers, and directors. The corporation should have appropriate controls throughout the organization for monitoring compliance with such laws and codes. Controls may include whistleblower and hotline policies. The corporation also must establish procedures for addressing violations.

In addition, all compliance personnel should have direct access to the general counsel or other compliance officer to ensure sensitive compliance situations are promptly addressed. In addition, direct reporting access to the board or a board committee can result in “credit” under the U.S. federal sentencing guidelines. Boards should also ensure the compliance program has adequate resources and authority to perform its function.

B. COMPANY DISCLOSURES

The board bears ultimate responsibility for the quality and integrity of company disclosures. Disclosure documents (e.g., annual reports, quarterly reports, current reports, proxy statements, prospectuses, and earnings releases) must fairly present material information about the corporation and its business, financial condition, results, prospects, and risks. Management is responsible for drafting and preparing the corporation’s disclosures. Many public companies establish management disclosure committees with responsibility for the company’s SEC filings and other public financial disclosures. In other companies, the audit committee handles all financial disclosures. The board should, however, be satisfied that the corporation’s procedures for identifying matters requiring disclosure and preparing disclosure documents are reasonably designed to produce accurate and complete public disclosures in an appropriate and timely manner. In addition to the documents requiring their signatures, directors should be familiar with the corporation’s significant filings and be satisfied that disclosures convey all material information about the business in a proper and timely manner.

C. POLITICAL ACTIVITY

Corporate officers and employees frequently participate in the governmental process on behalf of the corporation by seeking to influence legislative activities, shape regulations, or encourage or prevent government action. Corporations can support or oppose election candidates and engage in political spending. Such actions are often highly visible and can affect the reputation of the corporation and attract shareholder attention. Accordingly, the board should monitor such activities and ensure that they are in accord with regulatory requirements, relevant company policies, and the company’s risk profile.

D. CRISIS MANAGEMENT

Finally, boards should periodically review whether the corporation has an appropriate crisis management plan in place. It may be appropriate to develop different kinds of crisis management programs and teams to respond to different types of potential emergencies. Board-level monitoring of such programs provides an objective review of management’s plans for response, lends credibility to the response, and assures board members are appropriately informed. Such programs include those for natural disasters, significant adverse corporate developments, civil unrest, or terrorist activities. Good crisis management programs address such needs as dissemination of information internally and to the public, provision of back-up systems and records, and adherence to employee safety and business operation procedures during the emergency. A good crisis management plan will also address CEO succession. (See Section 9.F for a more detailed discussion of succession issues.) Members of a crisis management team typically include outside counsel and other advisors.

E. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Compensation can present significant risk management issues and is addressed in Section 8.

F. OTHER RISKS

Boards also oversee other corporate risks. Financial risks can occur in many contexts and require oversight. Asset impairment and acquisition integration situations also present risks for which the board should provide oversight. In addition, employee safety, health, and environmental protection, product safety, and human rights are not only matters of legal compliance; they are matters of legitimate public concern with important implications for the long-term success of the corporation. These issues increasingly drive consumer behavior, business partner decisions, employee morale, and business reputation. Compliance with environmental and human rights standards, whether government-mandated or self-imposed, is particularly important. Violations can present public safety and reputation concerns, have a material financial effect, and trigger state or federal civil or criminal investigations and liability. For example, global climate change concerns and the advantages of being a “green company” may affect business reputation, culture, morale, and financial performance. The board should periodically engage senior management in discussions of the risks associated with these areas.

SECTION 5: BOARD STRUCTURE, PROCESS, AND OPERATIONS

Board structure, process, and operations significantly affect the board’s ability to exercise its powers and discharge its obligations effectively. Properly functioning structures, processes, and operations encourage and reinforce the board’s ability to direct the corporation’s business and affairs on an informed and objective basis. No model fits every corporation. Instead, each board needs to tailor its approach to the unique needs and circumstances of the company. Primary tasks include selecting the chief executive officer, monitoring the performance of the CEO and his or her team, and providing management with advice and counsel.

Boards face a significant challenge in governing effectively given the part-time nature of board service. Most directors have competing demands on their time and attention, and most boards meet on average less often than once a month. Compounding this fact is that the board is comprised of a majority of independent directors who, by definition, have very limited relationships with the corporation outside of their board service. As a result, in addition to time constraints, independent directors have limited information sources about the company other than what management provides. Yet they must form objective viewpoints about the issues facing the company and the quality of the management team to perform fiduciary and other obligations. Careful attention to board structure, processes, and operations helps to overcome time limitations and information asymmetry and otherwise assists the board in establishing a culture and capacity for candor, objectivity, and efficiency.

A. BOARD COMPOSITION

1. Board Size

Each board should determine the appropriate size to accommodate the corporation’s needs, objectives, and circumstances. Factors that influence board size include the corporation’s need for particular types of expertise on the board, the ability to meet applicable independence or other regulatory standards, the need to populate committees with appropriate expertise as required by regulatory or other board-determined standards, and the need for relationships with significant shareholders or other constituencies. Boards should balance these needs with the fact that a board that is too large can impede effectiveness.

Board size varies substantially among public corporations, with some corporations, like those in the financial services industry, typically having larger boards. Except perhaps for the very largest and most complex corporations, smaller boards (seven to eleven members) generally function more effectively than larger ones, because directors have greater opportunities to participate actively in board deliberations and otherwise contribute. Individuals serving on larger boards may feel that their active engagement is less critical to the functioning of the group. Larger boards can overcome this perception and encourage individual director participation by relying more heavily on board committees in which individual directors actively participate.

2. Qualifications

The board has significant impact on board composition through its powers to nominate and re-nominate directors for election and to fill board vacancies between shareholder meetings. Boards should be prepared to explain why each director is appropriate to the overall board composition and should revisit the “fit” of each director on an annual basis. Boards should make these decisions with an understanding of the company’s strategic direction and the board’s needs. Indeed, boards should identify the personal qualities required of individual directors (such as integrity, candor, capacity for objective judgment) and identify the overall mix of expertise, experience, independence, and diversity of backgrounds it seeks. The board is more than the sum of its parts, and no one director will have all of the qualifications that the board seeks. The goal is to create a body with the right mix of skill sets, experiences, and diverse viewpoints to contribute to corporate success. The individuals should understand their fiduciary obligations to the company and its shareholders and be capable of expressing objective viewpoints, debating issues, exploring and resolving disagreements, and then—in most instances—forming and supporting a consensus view.

3. Time Commitment

Directors must devote substantial time and attention to their responsibilities, and the time required will vary considerably (depending on the size and complexity of the enterprise and the issues being addressed at a particular time). It is not uncommon for a director’s total time commitment to involve 250 hours or more a year, including meeting preparation, travel, meeting attendance, informal consultation with other board members and management, and review of materials to keep up with corporate developments. In addition, directors of the audit and compensation committees have especially significant demands on their time. Certain situations, including change-of-control transactions, financial distress, compliance failures, financial restatements, and management succession crises, also require substantially more time.

Directors considering new or continued board service should consider carefully the time required to meet their responsibilities. Directors should not over-commit themselves, and the nominating/corporate governance committee should consider a board candidate’s ability to devote the necessary time before nominating or re-nominating the candidate. Many boards of public companies establish limits on the number of other boards on which directors may serve and also require that directors inform the board before accepting additional board service or other significant commitments.

B. BOARD OBJECTIVITY AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE

Directors must form their own objective judgments about what actions are in the best interests of the company and its shareholders. This obligation extends to assessments of management performance and the strategies and transactions proposed by management. Being an effective guide and sounding board for management also requires objective judgment. Objectivity or “independence of mind” requires constructive skepticism concerning management proposals and reports and the ability and willingness to challenge management constructively and test management’s assumptions.

The major securities markets require listed companies (other than controlled companies) to have a majority of “independent” directors. They also require that key oversight committees—audit, compensation, and nominating/corporate governance or any committee to which these committees’ duties are delegated—be comprised solely of “independent” directors. In addition, audit committee members must meet the separate definition of audit committee independence set forth in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, which is, in some respects, more stringent than the major securities markets’ definitions of director independence. The Dodd-Frank Act imposes similar heightened independence standards on compensation committee members.

Generally, the major securities markets provide that a director is independent only if the board makes an affirmative determination that the director is free of any material family, charitable, business, or professional relationship (other than stock ownership and the directorship) with the corporation or its management that is reasonably likely to affect objectivity. When making annual independence determinations, the board should consider all relevant facts and circumstances, and review the materiality of a director’s relationships from both the director’s standpoint and the standpoint of the individuals or organizations with which the director has an affiliation. Proxy statement requirements call for disclosure of the names of the independent directors, as well as the principles underlying the independence determination and any transactions, relationships, or arrangements that the board considered in the independence determination but were not otherwise disclosed.

The major securities markets identify certain relationships as inconsistent with a finding of independence:

  • service by the director as an officer or employee of the corporation or any of its affiliated enterprises (three year look-back);
  • receipt by the director of compensation from the company above a threshold amount other than director and committee fees and certain forms of deferred compensation for prior service (three year look-back);
  • current business or professional relationships of the director with the corporation or one of its affiliated enterprises above a threshold amount;
  • service by an executive officer of the corporation on the compensation committee of a corporation that currently employs the director as an executive officer (three year look-back);
  • service by the director as a partner in or an employee of the corporation’s external auditor (three year look-back applies to partners and employees who worked on the company’s audit); or
  • involvement by a director’s immediate family member in one of the foregoing relationships (subject to certain modifications).

Director independence under listing standards does not qualify a director as “disinterested” with respect to any particular board decision. In reviewing director actions in conflict of interest situations or in a special committee context, courts will evaluate the range of business, social, and personal relationships among the directors participating in the decision or transaction and the corporation and its senior managers or other relevant parties.

C. BOARD LEADERSHIP

In many U.S. public companies, the CEO of the corporation also serves as chair of the board. A growing number of public companies have chosen to separate the two functions with the chair position held by an independent director who provides leadership to the board, often serving as a liaison between the board and the CEO, and sometimes serving as a mentor to the CEO. Where the CEO or another non-independent director serves as board chair, the independent directors often formally designate an independent director to act as a presiding or lead director. The chair of the nominating/corporate governance committee or a senior director often acts in that capacity. No one size fits all. Thus, boards need to decide what works best for their company.

The presiding or lead director typically works with the CEO to prepare the board agenda and determine the types of information to be distributed to the board and its committees, presides at executive sessions of the non-management and independent directors, and serves as the board’s liaison to the CEO between meetings. The existence of a lead director should not inhibit the ability of individual directors to communicate directly with the CEO. The presiding or lead director may also meet with shareholders or shareholder groups and should promptly inform the full board of such communications. The New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) requires listed companies to identify publicly, by name or position, the director or directors who preside at meetings of non-management directors and to inform shareholders and other interested parties how to communicate with non-management directors. Boards of public companies must disclose their board leadership structure and the rationale for that structure and its relationship to risk oversight.

D. AGENDA, INFORMATION, AND ADVISORS

Directors should play an active role in setting the board’s agenda, ensuring the quality and timely provision of information and access to information, and establishing relationships with key managers and advisors, including, for example, internal auditors, the CFO, and internal and external counsel.

1. Agenda

The board’s agenda dictates the matters that come before the board and the focus of board attention. Traditionally, management played a significant role in determining the matters to be presented to and acted on by the board, due to its greater knowledge of the day-to-day operations of the company. For the board to be effective and objective, however, it must control its own agenda. Thus, the trend is toward increasing independent director involvement in determining the board agenda. If there is a non-executive chair of the board or a presiding or lead director, that director and the CEO will often collaborate on the agenda and plans for the meeting. All directors should have the opportunity and feel free to request that an item be included on the agenda. Further, the board should satisfy itself of the overall annual agenda of matters requiring recurring and focused attention, such as the achievement (as well as periodic reexamination and updating) of operational and financial plans, the evaluation of the CEO and other executive management performance, the evaluation of board and committee performance, and the adequacy and appropriateness of corporate systems and controls addressing legal compliance, risk management, corporate policy, financial controls, and financial reporting and other disclosures.

2. Information

The quality of the information available to directors significantly affects their effectiveness. Because management is the primary source of information about the corporation, directors should insist that management provide them with information that is (i) timely and relevant, (ii) concise and accurate, (iii) well organized, (iv) supported by any background or historical data necessary to place the information in context, and (v) designed to inform directors of material aspects of the corporation’s business, performance, and prospects. Directors should receive agenda-related information sufficiently in advance of board or committee meetings to allow careful study and thoughtful reflection and to accommodate requests for additional information.

Many boards also access or receive analysts’ reports about the corporation for outside perspective and analysis, as well as benchmarking data. This information allows boards to make comparisons to other corporations in the same industry group or with similar characteristics. Increasingly, directors communicate directly with senior-level employees and managers to learn more about the corporation’s business. Some boards schedule site visits for non-management directors so they can directly observe business operations and speak with employees at the operating level of the business.

3. Legal Advisors

Boards generally look to the corporation’s general counsel as the primary resource for legal analysis and governance advice. The general counsel’s client is the corporation, as represented by the board of directors, not the CEO or any other officer or group of managers. For this reason, many boards and key board committees meet regularly in a private session with the general counsel. In addition, the board and each of its committees should have access to the corporation’s regular outside counsel, if there is one, and should have the authority to retain legal counsel and professional advisors, independent of those who usually advise the corporation. Moreover, the Dodd-Frank Act will require compensation committees to consider conflict of interest factors before engaging legal advisors. A specific circumstance (e.g., allegations of management wrongdoing or negotiating executive pay packages) may prompt the board or, more likely, a board committee to seek independent advice. A board committee may also choose to have regular outside counsel advise the committee generally in meeting its duties and responsibilities.

As part of their annual self-evaluations, the board and each of its committees should consider whether each is receiving appropriate advice as to legal and compliance requirements and timely updates on legal exposure. In addition, each should consider whether it has a good understanding of when to seek legal advice from lawyers other than the general counsel and the outside lawyers regularly engaged by the corporation.

4. Non-legal Advisors

In addition to employees, officers, and legal advisors, boards often consult other outside advisors. The need for and degree of consultation varies across companies and industries. For example, boards involved in discussions about a merger or acquisition often engage investment bankers for advice. Although covered in more detail in Section 8, compensation consultants may provide information and expertise in the compensation-setting process. Boards of companies in industries with significant environmental, health, and safety issues may also choose to engage outside consultants to review, for example, environmental safety practices and procedures.

E. EXECUTIVE SESSIONS

The major securities markets require periodic meetings of non-management and independent directors in executive session (i.e., without management present) and many public companies hold an executive session every board meeting. These sessions provide a forum for non-management and independent directors to raise issues and ideas they may otherwise be reluctant to raise in the full boardroom, to share candid views about management’s performance, to discuss whether board operations are satisfactory, and to raise potentially sensitive issues regarding specific members of management. These sessions are usually coordinated with meetings of the board and, if regularly scheduled, become routine and accepted by management.

If the CEO is also the board chair, most boards designate a director to convene and preside at these sessions. This is a role for a presiding or lead director. Executive sessions may have agendas that are set in advance, but it is also common for the agenda to be open-ended, allowing non-management and independent directors to discuss anything that is on their minds related to the company and its management. Following each session, either the presiding director or the group typically briefs the CEO on what was discussed and on whether any actions are now required.

An executive session should occur during the course of a properly convened board meeting. Directors in an executive session cannot take formal action on behalf of the board when a quorum is not present or if one or more directors have been excluded from the session without consenting to action in their absence. For this reason, and to facilitate open and candid discussions regarding sensitive issues, detailed minutes of executive sessions are not typically kept. It is important, however, to maintain minutes covering attendance and the topics discussed, as well as any recommended actions.

Non-management and independent directors should feel free to meet in executive sessions whenever they feel called to do so and to consider management-sensitive issues, such as controversies involving senior management, change-of-control transactions, or major changes in management. Special advisors, such as special counsel, financial advisors, or others may be appropriate in such cases.

F. NUMBER OF MEETINGS AND SCHEDULING OF MEETINGS

The board should determine its meeting schedule based on an understanding of the tasks to be accomplished over the course of a year and should strive to develop a meeting schedule to optimize the board’s time accordingly. The number of meetings a board finds necessary or useful varies with the size, complexity, and culture of the enterprise. Some boards prefer more frequent, shorter meetings, whereas others prefer fewer, lengthier meetings. Some boards schedule one extended planning or strategic meeting each year and shorter meetings during the rest of the year. Boards should hold regularly scheduled meetings at least quarterly, but many schedule six to eight regular meetings a year and hold additional special meetings as needed.

Time at board and committee meetings requires careful scheduling because the length of time budgeted for a meeting limits the topics and depth of the discussion at that meeting. Moreover, meetings should balance management presentations with discussion among directors and with management. Appropriate reports and analyses furnished in advance facilitate discussion at the meeting.

G. MINUTES, NOTE TAKING, AND BOARD MATERIALS

All meetings of the board of directors and board committees—whether regular or special meetings or executive sessions—should be memorialized in minutes prepared promptly and circulated for comment and approval. The corporate secretary or another person skilled in preparing minutes should prepare the draft. When the board or committee approves the minutes, the corporation must retain them as a corporate record. Minutes are important legal documents. For example, auditors, courts, regulatory bodies, and shareholders may review them. Therefore, minutes require directors’ attention and care.

As appropriate, minutes should contain the following:

(i)the place, date, and time of the meeting;
(ii)the attendees (noting who attended in person or by conference call);
(iii)the chair of the meeting;
(iv)the topics discussed;
(v)the matters voted on and the outcome (or a statement of decisions reached by consensus);
(vi)the directors or other attendees, if any, who abstained from voting or were absent from certain discussions at the meeting;
(vii)the material terms approved by the board or board committee;
(viii)the materials (incorporated by reference) provided to the directors before and at the meeting;
(ix)the people who provided information and advice at the meeting;
(x)the facts surrounding any discussions held or information exchanged between or among some directors before the meeting relating to matters considered at the meeting;
(xi)the secretary or acting secretary for the meeting; and
(xii)the time of adjournment.

Although there are differing opinions among corporate advisors about the appropriate level of detail to be included, minutes should be sufficiently detailed to support the availability of the applicable protections provided by substantive law. Thus, minutes should summarize important discussions and actions, without generally purporting to provide a verbatim record or attributing specific words or points of view to particular directors. Minutes that do not reflect that an adequate deliberative process occurred can support an inference that directors failed to consider pertinent information fully and in good faith. Typically, the minutes should reflect appropriately the amount of time devoted to an issue, either by specifically stating the time or by writing the minutes so that the length of the minutes devoted to a particular issue corresponds to the actual time devoted to the issue. The key is to avoid an incorrect inference that less time was devoted to a subject than was in fact the case.

If named as defendants or called as witnesses in litigation, directors will need to explain their actions well after the fact. Detailed minutes provide a contemporaneous record of their deliberative process and can help prevent criticism about the adequacy of that process. Consequently, the minutes should reflect the reality that the directors engaged in a deliberative process, acted in what they reasonably believed to be the corporation’s best interests, and considered the possible alternatives.

Note taking implicates similar issues. Directors are not obligated to take notes. Those who do take notes to help them participate should consider whether to retain them. Notes are not subject to a careful process of drafting, review, and approval, and may contain statements or notations that may be misinterpreted, taken out of context, or in fact, be incorrect, particularly if produced in litigation. For example, notes often capture only part of a discussion or fail to distinguish between words spoken and the note taker’s thoughts. Similarly, notes and drafts of the secretary of the meeting should normally not be retained after approval of the official minutes.

Furthermore, directors should confirm that the corporation maintains files containing the information provided to the board, such as board books and Power-Point presentations. This information can help demonstrate the board’s informed business judgments and assist directors in recollecting past events. The corporation should develop, with board approval, a consistent policy for the retention of such information so that, together with quality minutes, there is a reliable record of the board’s deliberations.

Finally, the corporation’s counsel should monitor the consistency of the corporation’s approach to minutes and recordkeeping. With multiple committees and minute takers, inconsistencies in format and approval could arise and create issues in litigation or regulatory proceedings.

H. BOARD EVALUATIONS

The major securities markets require directors to evaluate, at least annually, the effectiveness of the board and each of its committees. Board and board committee self-evaluations are most effective when planned in advance, with participants having a clear idea of the purpose of the self-evaluation and the issues to be addressed. The typical goal is to consider ways in which the board and its committees can improve their processes. Many boards find director interviews to be a helpful basis for collecting input from individual directors for board and committee discussions. In addition, some boards use written questionnaires to gather information. Questions on these forms must be drafted and used with care. External facilitators may be helpful in collecting information and presenting it in a manner that assures confidential treatment of individual director views. Some boards also use facilitators to lead discussions, providing experience with other companies and an independent perspective. It may be useful to maintain in the minutes a record of the process followed and any specific decisions of the board or committee that resulted, but it is not necessary to retain written materials.

The nominating/corporate governance committee generally conducts or supervises individual director evaluations and is discussed separately in Section 9 of the Guidebook.

I. COMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE THE BOARDROOM

Directors often have individual communications relating to the corporation with management or with other directors. One-on-one communications can efficiently tap a particular director’s expertise or point of view. Indeed, these communications are inevitable.

Excessive communications outside the board and committee rooms, however, particularly between management and a select group of directors, can lead to uneven knowledge among directors about important corporate issues. Such communications may also impair the collective, inclusive, and candid exchange of views at board or committee meetings and interfere with the board’s collegial and independent relationship with management. Moreover, because official action by directors can occur only at a duly called meeting or by unanimous written consent, individual “polling” of directors is not sufficient to authorize action requiring board approval. Instead, the full board or the appropriate committee should discuss issues fully and appropriately at board meetings.

J. DECISION-MAKING

Directors make decisions on a wide variety of matters, sometimes giving direction to management and at other times approving major transactions. Some matters—such as changes in charter documents, authorization of dividends, election of officers, approval of mergers, financings, or corporate liquidations— generally require board action (as well as shareholder action, in some cases) as a matter of law. Directors can take formal action only at duly held meetings of the board or board committee or by unanimous written consent. Unanimous written consents are advisable only for routine matters.

Before taking or approving major actions, directors should receive relevant information to support an informed decision, including summaries and supporting materials. Information is critical to the directors’ ability to assess the precise actions proposed. Directors should satisfy themselves with the level of detail they receive and the scope of the resolutions they approve.

Not all board or committee decisions are formalized by the adoption of resolutions. Some may simply result from a consensus or a “sense of the board” to provide guidance to management. Meeting minutes should adequately describe and memorialize these decisions, and, thereby, avoid any misunderstanding among directors and management.

Business constraints or a crisis can prompt important corporate decisions. A well-developed crisis plan and familiarity with the corporation can enhance decision-making in this context.

K. DISAGREEMENTS AND RESIGNATION

Boards of directors usually make decisions by consensus. Acting in the best interests of the corporation, however, does not require unanimous agreement at all times. If, after a thorough discussion, a director disagrees with any significant action the board is taking, the director should consider abstaining or voting against the proposal. The director should also consider requesting that the abstention or dissent be recorded in the meeting’s minutes. Except in unusual circumstances, taking such a position should not cause a director to consider resigning. Resignations should be considered if a director believes that management is not dealing with the directors, the shareholders, or the public in good faith or that the information being disclosed by the corporation is inadequate, incomplete, or incorrect and the director is unable to convince the board to take action. Directors may also consider resigning when they feel their point of view is being disregarded entirely. Public corporations are required to disclose director resignations in an SEC filing, and this disclosure, like others, should be done in consultation with legal advisors.

SECTION 6: COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD

Committees perform much of the work of the board of directors. No universal mandate exists for a particular committee structure, except for certain actions and duties. In particular, federal law and the major securities markets’ listing standards require the audit, compensation, and nominating/corporate governance committees to be composed of independent directors. The boards of some public companies function almost entirely at the board level and delegate to committees only to the extent required. At others, the board acts as a group only on the highest level strategy and policy matters and matters legally required to be addressed by the full board, with most board action and oversight delegated to committees. Each board should tailor its processes and committee structure to the company’s specific circumstances, including size, the complexity of its operations and risk management issues, the regulatory schemes applicable to its operations, and the competitive environment in which it operates.

Reliance on independent board committees to counterbalance potential conflicts of interest and provide unbiased perspective is intended to improve corporate governance and transparency. Independent directors have become increasingly important in the wake of corporate scandals and market instability. In addition, regulators may require or encourage boards of companies in heavily regulated industries to establish committees to address particular issues. Boards may also delegate to a committee matters that require specialized knowledge or experience or a significant additional time commitment. Unlike the standing committees to which specific responsibilities must be delegated by law or major securities market rules, other board committees may be either permanent committees or specialized committees, which can have a limited duration.

The allocation of specific responsibilities between the full board and its committees, as well as among different committees, varies from company to company. For example, some boards direct their audit committees to handle the primary review and oversight of risk management matters. Other boards assign risk oversight to a specific risk-management committee. Still others retain responsibility for oversight of risk management as a duty of the full board, but delegate certain specialized aspects to the audit, compensation, and governance committees. Some boards create committees devoted to safety or the environment.

Boards may also create special committees to respond to specific circumstances. For example, an allegation of management wrongdoing may prompt a board to form a special committee. Another board, however, might assign the investigation to its audit committee, particularly if the allegations relate to financial, accounting, or internal control issues. In either case, the committee may decide to engage an outside investigation team, particularly if management wrongdoing is implicated.

As this discussion makes clear, statements in this Guidebook that particular committees consider certain matters are generalizations. Each board must consider its circumstances and tailor its board structure and allocation of responsibilities accordingly (mindful, of course, of applicable SEC and major securities market listing requirements).

Directors serving on board committees are subject to the same duties of due care and loyalty and entitled to the same protections of the business judgment rule as they are when acting as members of the full board. Delegation of a given responsibility to a committee does not relieve the full board of ultimate responsibility for oversight of the company. As in other areas of delegation, however, directors may rely upon the efforts of those to whom they delegate if it is reasonable to do so. In accord with their obligation to provide oversight, however, boards should ensure that committees establish appropriate procedures, including keeping minutes and records and providing a regular flow of reports and information to the board to ensure that all directors are kept abreast of each committee’s activities and significant decisions.

A. STANDING COMMITTEES

Some committees are intended to remain in place indefinitely, such as the audit committee, discussed in detail in Section 7, the compensation committee, discussed in detail in Section 8, and the nominating and corporate governance committee, discussed in detail in Section 9. A board may also decide to establish standing committees to oversee ongoing matters, such as risk management or management of complex regulatory schemes. A key factor to consider in creating a standing committee is whether it is more efficient and effective for a smaller group of directors to develop a detailed understanding of the relevant topic and use that expertise to review and monitor the issues within the committee’s purview.

Historically, many public company boards appointed standing “executive committees” comprised of directors who were usually officers or who were otherwise available to meet on short notice to address matters between regular meetings of the board. With advances in modern telecommunications, extensive use of executive committees has waned. Indeed, they are often perceived as subordinating the roles of other directors.

B. SPECIAL AND OTHER COMMITTEES

From time to time, a board may need to create a committee to undertake a specific project or responsibility. In such instances, defining the scope of delegated authority and responsibility of the committee is important. The board should consider and set down in a detailed resolution or committee charter the committee’s authority and responsibility. For example, a board may decide to form a special committee of disinterested directors to consider transactions involving conflicts of interest between the corporation and its officers. The members of an ad hoc committee need not necessarily meet applicable legal or securities market independence definitions. They should, however, be disinterested in the subject matter and otherwise able to exercise independent judgment. The committee should also establish thorough procedures for its deliberations. A properly constituted and operating special committee will help to reduce the risk of a successful challenge to the board’s actions and the potential for director liability.

Public company boards may also form an ad hoc committee of independent, disinterested directors to conduct investigations involving potential litigation or wrongdoing. In these cases, the board usually authorizes the committee to engage independent legal counsel and other advisors to help the committee investigate the facts and determine appropriate responses. In each case, the exact scope of authority and functions of the committee will depend upon the unique circumstances of the committee’s charge, including the credibility of the allegations, the nature of the alleged wrongdoing, and the familiarity of the committee members with the issues. Depending on the scope of authority delegated to the committee, the committee should complete the investigation and then take appropriate action on behalf of the board or recommend an appropriate course of action to the full board of directors.

If allowed under state law, a board may occasionally feel compelled to create a single-person committee. For example, a board may need to react quickly to market conditions and delegate to a one-member committee the authority to price a securities offering. Although single-person committees can be effective in limited contexts, they are not ideal. Multiple directors provide different perspectives on complex issues.

C. COMMITTEE PROCEDURES AND ACTIVITIES

Committee composition, procedures, and activities vary from corporation to corporation. The following bullets provide some general guidelines for each area.

  • Committee establishment—The board should give due consideration to defining the scope of the committee’s responsibilities and authority, including:
    • defining the specific issues the committee should address;
    • determining the committee’s scope of authority (e.g., is the committee empowered to act on behalf of the board or is the committee to recommend action to the board);
    • ensuring appropriate independence, including the authority to engage independent legal counsel and other advisors at the company’s expense;
    • establishing standards for committee operations, including frequency and scheduling of meetings, for example to avoid scheduling conflicts with full board or other committee meetings;
    • ensuring regular reporting to the board;
    • determining whether a committee should be a standing committee or a special committee; and
    • detailing the committee’s responsibilities and authority in a written board resolution or in a separate charter approved by the board.
  • Committee composition—The board should select committee members using criteria appropriate to the committee’s purpose and in compliance with any applicable legal and stock exchange requirements. Under most state statutes each member of a board committee must be a duly elected or appointed member of the board of directors. Committee membership criteria may include:
    • experience relevant to committee responsibilities;
    • subject matter expertise that will assist the committee in its work;
    • committee members’ ability to meet requisite time commitments;
    • disinterest in the committee’s subject matter; and
    • independence from management, as appropriate.
  • Reporting to the board—Board committees should regularly inform the board of their activities. Generally, standing committees should provide reports at regularly scheduled full board meetings and circulate to all directors committee agendas, minutes, and written reports, subject to considerations such as the need to protect sensitive information, contractual confidentiality requirements, privacy rights, and governmental security clearance requirements.
  • Legal limits of authority—Boards and committees must take care to observe applicable limits on their authority. For example, most state corporation statutes require that the board, rather than a committee of the board, approve proposed amendments to the company’s articles or certificate of incorporation and similarly require that bylaws (other than those adopted by shareholders) be adopted by the board, rather than by a committee of the board.
  • Scope of delegation and responsibility—The scope of responsibility of each committee should be tailored to the matters to be addressed. The authority, function, and responsibilities of each committee should be clearly defined. In the past, this was typically done in bylaws or board resolutions. Today, federal statutes and regulations and stock exchange rules require specific duties, responsibilities, and powers to be assigned to specific committees, such as the audit and compensation committees. In addition, the scope of authority and the duties of committees responsible for audit, compensation, and nominating/corporate governance matters must be specified in written charters.
  • Periodic review by the board—The board or an appropriate committee, such as the nominating and corporate governance committee, should periodically review the responsibilities assigned to each committee and consider whether the assignments of duties and responsibilities continue to be appropriate and consistent with the company’s needs and objectives.

SECTION 7: AUDIT COMMITTEE

The audit committee is critical to the corporate governance structure, and its existence and some of its functions are legally mandated. It has general oversight responsibility for the company’s financial reporting process and internal controls. It also has the exclusive responsibility for retaining and overseeing the performance and independence of the corporation’s external auditor. When the external auditor audits the company’s internal controls over financial reporting under Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, it will evaluate the committee’s performance. The audit committee also increasingly serves as a forum in which the internal and external auditors, as well as the corporation’s legal counsel and its compliance and ethics personnel, can candidly report and discuss issues relating to accounting, auditing, financial reporting, risk management, legal, compliance, and ethical matters.

A. MEMBERSHIP

Public company audit committees must consist solely of directors who satisfy the independence requirements of both the company’s securities market’s listing standards and the federal securities laws. Generally, audit committee members may not receive any compensation from the corporation, such as consulting, advisory, or similar fees, other than their director and board committee fees.

The major securities markets require that the audit committee have at least three members. Typically audit committees consist of three to five independent directors. The major securities markets also require that all committee members be financially literate, and at least one audit committee member must have accounting or financial management experience.

In addition, under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, a public company must disclose in its annual report to the SEC or in its annual meeting proxy statement whether any member of its audit committee qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert,” a term defined by SEC regulation and focused on accounting and auditing knowledge and experience. If the committee does not have such an expert, the corporation must disclose why. If the board determines that a committee member qualifies as a “financial expert,” the corporation must disclose the name of that member and state whether that expert is independent. Because of this disclosure requirement, most public companies seek to have at least one member of the audit committee qualify as an audit committee financial expert. The requirements for that designation are quite stringent. Thus, directors to be designated as audit committee financial experts should be personally satisfied that they meet those requirements.

Common sense, diligence, and an attitude of constructive skepticism are critical qualifications for an audit committee member. Audit committee members should also have a sufficient understanding of financial reporting and internal control principles to provide oversight for both. New audit committee members should become familiar with key financial issues and accounting practices in the industry or industries in which their corporation operates. All committee members should be current in their knowledge of these financial issues and accounting practices. Continuing education and professional advice, either offered by the corporation or by third party service providers, can be helpful for ensuring members are up to date on best practices and developments.

B. PRINCIPAL FUNCTIONS

Federal law, SEC regulations, and securities market listing standards establish many of the audit committee’s duties and responsibilities. Audit committees assume other functions as a matter of good practice. Current regulatory requirements for public companies mandate a formal, written charter for the audit committee, specifying the duties and responsibilities. The committee must review the charter annually and publish it on the company’s website, or disclose the availability to shareholders, at least once every three years in the corporation’s proxy statement.

Audit committee members should understand the tasks in the charter and develop a schedule for performing the tasks. Audit committees generally rely on the corporation’s accounting, finance, treasury, internal audit, and legal staffs, as well as the corporation’s external auditor, for information. The committee also has the authority to employ its own accountants, attorneys, or other advisors, and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires the corporation to pay for these advisors. In light of their significant responsibilities, audit committees of public companies often consult with legal counsel to ensure they meet their responsibilities. Identifying the types of information they should receive and review, developing operational procedures and a schedule of tasks, and fulfilling disclosure, accounting, and internal control obligations, are key to audit committee effectiveness. Effective members, of course, also engage in “constructive skepticism.”

The following list sets forth the duties for public company audit committees as required by SEC rules and securities markets listing standards. Listing standards vary, so committees should check specific standards.

Audit committees of listed companies are required to:

  • select and engage the corporation’s external auditor, evaluate the auditor’s independence, qualifications, and performance, and determine, for each fiscal year, whether to continue that relationship;
  • review and approve annually the external auditor’s fee arrangements and the proposed terms of its engagement, including the scope and plan of the audit;
  • approve, before each engagement, any additional audit-related or non-audit services to be provided by the audit firm, based on the committee’s judgment as to whether the firm is an appropriate choice to provide such additional services and whether the engagement might impair the firm’s independence;
  • establish procedures to receive and respond to any complaints or concerns regarding the corporation’s accounting, internal controls, or auditing matters, including procedures for the confidential and anonymous submis-sion by employees of any such complaints or concerns;
  • serve as a channel of communication between the external auditor and the board and between the head of internal audit, if any, and the board;
  • discuss the corporation’s quarterly and annual earnings press releases and financial information and earnings guidance to analysts, the financial press, and rating agencies;
  • review the corporation’s annual and quarterly financial statements and management certifications, with both management and the external auditor, and discuss with each of them any major issues regarding accounting principles and financial statement presentation and the quality of management’s accounting judgments in preparing the financial statements;
  • provide oversight of the internal audit function (NYSE-listed companies);
  • review the Management’s Discussion and Analysis section in each periodic report before filing it with the SEC, and discuss with management and the external auditor any questions or issues that arise in connection with that review;
  • review the effect of regulatory and accounting initiatives, as well as offbalance sheet structures, on the financial statements;
  • oversee the company’s compliance with legal and regulatory requirements;
  • set clear hiring policies for employees or former employees of the independent auditors;
  • discuss polices with respect to risk assessment and risk management;
  • determine whether to recommend to the board that the audited annual financial statements be included in the corporation’s annual report on SEC Form 10-K;
  • review and approve the audit committee’s annual report to shareholders required to be included in a public company’s annual meeting proxy statement;
  • receive and consider required communications from the external auditor as a result of its timely review of the quarterly financial statements;
  • consider, in consultation with the external auditor and the senior internal auditing executive, if any, the adequacy and effectiveness of the corporation’s internal controls, which, among other things, must be designed to provide reasonable assurance that the corporation’s books and records are accurate, that its assets are safeguarded, and that the publicly reported financial statements prepared by management are presented fairly and in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles;
  • review with the external auditor any audit problems or difficulties, and management’s response;
  • review management’s annual assessment of the effectiveness of the corporation’s internal controls over financial reporting and the external auditor’s audit of internal controls over financial reporting;
  • report regularly to the board of directors; and
  • conduct an annual self-evaluation.

Other duties and responsibilities that many audit committees undertake as matters of good corporate practice include:

  • approve (in coordination with the corporation’s nominating or governance committee) any related person transactions between the corporation and its officers or directors, or their family members or enterprises they control;
  • establish a direct or “dotted-line” reporting relationship between the internal auditor and the audit committee, with appropriate input in the hiring, compensation, performance review, and the reassignment or firing of the head of internal audit, as well as approving internal audit plans and the budget for the internal audit group;
  • consider the appropriate reporting relationship between the chief compliance officer (if other than the chief legal officer) and the audit committee;
  • review SEC staff comments on filings;
  • review the external auditor’s management letter and management’s responses to that letter (which generally includes comments on any control deficiencies observed during the audit and other recommendations arising from the audit);
  • review primary components of earnings releases prior to public disclosure;
  • meet periodically with representatives of the corporation’s disclosure committee, if any; and
  • if another committee does not do so, meet privately with the corporation’s legal counsel or other key advisors to review pending litigation, possible loss contingencies, and other legal concerns, including procedures and policies for addressing legal and compliance issues and reduction of legal risk. (For public companies, this is generally done quarterly in connection with the review of the corporation’s Form 10-Q.)

C. ENGAGING THE AUDITORS AND PREAPPROVING THEIR SERVICES

One of the key roles of the audit committee is engaging and supervising the company’s external auditor. The audit committee reviews and approves the terms of engagement and should know about and understand the scope of the audit. The audit committee must pre-approve all audit and non-audit services the external auditor performs during the year, as well as any audit-related services performed by any other auditing firm. The pre-approval process ensures that the audit committee will consider the effect of any audit and non-audit work on the auditor’s independence. In addition, the external auditor must provide an annual letter about its independence to the audit committee of a public company. The committee must discuss this letter with its auditor and consider what effect, if any, non-audit services that the external auditor provides will have on the auditor’s independence.

Many audit committees develop policies and procedures to pre-approve specific and detailed types of audit and non-audit services before the need for an engagement arises. Notably, the audit committee must pre-approve all tax services and internal control-related services, engagement by engagement. Some committees delegate this pre-approval authority to the chair (or a subcommittee) of the audit committee to assure that necessary services proceed efficiently, even between audit committee meetings. Any individual or entity that has this authority must report all decisions to the full committee. The audit committee also reviews the hiring of any former personnel of the auditor to assure that it meets regulatory restrictions and will not affect the auditor’s independence.

D. OVERSEEING THE INDEPENDENT AUDIT

The audit committee is responsible for the appointment, compensation, evaluation, and retention of the external auditor. The audit committee should evaluate annually the effectiveness of the external auditor, including verifying the auditor’s independence, the auditor’s knowledge of the financial issues and accounting standards of the industry or industries in which the corporation operates, and the auditor’s effectiveness in providing timely and quality auditing services.

The audit committee should meet with the external auditor during the planning phase of the annual audit to review the plan for the staffing, scope, and cost of the audit and to discuss any areas that may require emphasis or special procedures during the audit. After the audit, the committee should review with the external auditor any problems or difficulties encountered, any significant issues requiring discussion or debate with management during or after the audit, and any letter from the external auditor to management summarizing audit observations together with management’s response to that letter. The audit committee should review the findings of the external auditor with respect to any special audit procedures and determine, with advisors’ assistance as appropriate, whether revisions to particular corporate policies or procedures are required.

The audit committee should understand significant accounting judgments and estimates that materially affect the corporation’s financial statements. Corporations sometimes have a choice among available generally accepted accounting principles or practices. Therefore, the committee should inquire about and understand the effect of alternative choices on reported results. The audit committee should review, at least annually, with the external auditor and with the chief financial officer (CFO) or chief accounting officer (CAO), major issues regarding, and any changes in, choices of accounting principles. Some audit committees find it useful to ask the external auditor to inform the committee what choices the auditor would have made if it, rather than management, had been responsible for preparing the financial statements. The committee also must review with the auditor the quality of management’s accounting judgments.

The audit committee should discuss, often with the participation of the internal auditor, any significant deficiencies or material weaknesses the auditor identified during the course of its annual audit of internal controls. If the auditor identifies any such significant deficiencies or material weaknesses in the company’s internal controls over financial reporting, the audit committee should oversee management’s timely remediation of those deficiencies. If the audit committee fails to do so, the auditor may conclude that the audit committee constitutes a material weakness in the company’s internal controls.

The above-discussed processes and reviews allow the audit committee to determine whether to recommend to the board inclusion of the audited financial statements in the corporation’s annual report on SEC Form 10-K. The company’s quarterly SEC 10-Q reports may not require a similar process, but many audit committees do review these reports before they are filed.

E. INTERACTION WITH INTERNAL AUDIT

The New York Stock Exchange requires its listed companies to have an internal audit function. The internal auditors typically are employees of the corporation, but some corporations outsource some or all of this function to a firm that is not affiliated with its external auditor.

The audit committee should routinely meet, in private, with the senior internal auditing executive to discuss the external audit function and relationship between the internal and external audit programs, to consider any special problems or issues that may have occurred since the last meeting, and to review the implementation of any recommended corrective actions. The committee should approve the internal audit charter, as well as the annual internal audit plan, before the fiscal year begins. The audit committee should ensure that the internal audit function has sufficient staff resources and budget to fulfill its internal audit plan for the coming year.

If the corporation does not have an internal audit function, the committee should consider with management and the external auditor whether to establish one and, if not, how to obtain the benefits and protections of such a function. If the company has outsourced the internal audit function, the committee should meet regularly with appropriate representatives of that service provider, including meeting in executive session.

F. MEETINGS WITH AUDITORS

Although the CFO or CAO normally attends meetings with external and internal auditors, the audit committee should also meet with the external and internal auditors in executive session, without management present. The NYSE requires its listed companies’ audit committees to meet periodically with the external auditor and the head of the internal audit staff, if one exists, separately, in executive session without the participation of other management. These sessions typically cover the following issues, whether (i) the auditors are uncomfortable with any matters regarding the corporation and its financial affairs and records, (ii) the auditors have had any significant disagreements with management, (iii) the auditors have had the full cooperation of management throughout the audit process, (iv) the corporation has reasonably effective accounting systems and controls in place, and (v) the auditor recommends strengthening any material systems or controls or financial staffing. Many audit committees find it useful to have the external auditor describe the two or three issues that involved the most discussion with management during the course of the auditor’s work. The committee may also meet with management to discuss the quality of services provided by the external and internal auditors.

The audit committee should discuss with the external auditor and management its role in reviewing quarterly financial reports. They should also discuss the external auditor’s procedure for raising significant deficiencies or material weaknesses with the committee or its chair.

As part of the auditor’s annual audit of the corporation’s internal control over financial reporting, the external auditor must assess whether the audit committee understands and exercises its oversight responsibility over financial reporting and internal controls. As part of this assessment, the external auditor will consider its interaction with the audit committee, including knowledge about the corporation’s accounting policies and internal controls and ability to monitor any control remediation efforts by management. If the auditor concludes that the audit committee’s oversight is ineffective, the auditor must report that conclusion, in writing, to the full board.

G. MEETING WITH COMPLIANCE OFFICERS

Unless there is another board committee responsible for compliance, the audit committee should meet as necessary and appropriate, and at least once annually, with the officers responsible for implementing the corporation’s codes of business conduct and compliance policies. Officers with compliance responsibilities typically include the general counsel, chief internal audit officer, and chief compliance officer. These officers should meet with the audit committee outside the presence of other executive officers or directors who are not independent. The responsible officers should also report to the committee periodically. The scope and content of such reports should give the committee timely information about the number and type of concerns reported and investigated, any material violations of law or corporate policies, the sanctions imposed, and any other information to enable the committee to monitor the effectiveness of the overall compliance program. In addition, the general counsel should meet regularly with the audit committee, or another committee of independent directors, to communicate concerns regarding legal compliance matters, including potential or ongoing material violations of law by the corporation and breaches of fiduciary duties, violation of corporate policies, or ethical violations by senior managers.

H. ESTABLISHING PROCEDURES TO HANDLE COMPLAINTS

The audit committee of a public company must establish procedures, preferably anonymous and confidential, for employees to report concerns or complaints about accounting, internal controls, and auditing matters, as well as violations of the corporation’s code of ethics. For global companies, the procedures must comply with the privacy regimes of multiple countries. Audit committee members are not usually in the best position to conduct fact-finding or even to receive complaints or concerns in the first instance. Instead, the committee should create, with management’s assistance, procedures adequate to ensure that information reaches the committee in a form conducive to identifying “red flags” and to ensuring timely and efficient committee review and resolution of any issues. For example, the audit committee may decide to rely on an ethics or compliance officer to gather, review, and process information, or it may decide to outsource this task to a third-party service provider.

In addition, lawyers for public companies (both internal and outside counsel) may be required to report to a committee of independent directors, or to the board, credible evidence that a material violation of securities laws, breach of fiduciary duty, or similar violation by the issuer or any of its officers, directors, employees, or agents has occurred, is occurring, or is about to occur. Public companies may determine that the audit committee is the appropriate committee to receive such reports. If so, the audit committee should have a process for acting on reports, including an understanding about arranging for legal advice from outside counsel when appropriate.

I. MEETINGS AND COMPENSATION

The audit committee should discuss and determine the number of meetings it needs to hold annually in order to deal effectively with its responsibilities. The major securities markets’ listing standards require audit committees to review quarterly and annual reports filed with the SEC, and as a result, the audit committee should meet at least four times a year. It is common for public company audit committees to have an in-person or telephonic meeting with the company’s CEO, CFO, other senior financial managers, and external auditor in advance of each quarterly or annual earnings release. As a result, almost all audit committees schedule at least four, and some as many as five to eight, meetings per year.

It is important that the schedule for board and other committee meetings and activities not unduly limit the time for audit committee deliberations. Membership on the audit committee requires a significant commitment of time. Committee meetings are often several hours in length, and some extend for an entire day. As a result, some boards provide the audit committee members with a higher level of compensation, often through meeting fees. Others have determined that differential compensation among board committee members can create the risk of divisions within the board and may make selection of members and rotation of committee assignments more difficult. Nonetheless it is important that audit committee members be compensated adequately for the time and effort they devote to the corporation to fulfill their fiduciary and technical responsibilities as committee members.

SECTION 8: COMPENSATION COMMITTEE

Executive compensation plays a central role in attracting, retaining, and motivating the management talent critical to the corporation’s success. The compensation committee is responsible for approving executive compensation and, in many cases, for overseeing the planning for management succession. The integrity and transparency of the committee’s decision-making process are of paramount concern to shareholders and regulators alike. Real abuses and perceived excesses in executive compensation policies, plans, and programs at some notable public companies led to many of the federal corporate governance reforms related to compensation. For example, investors’ desire for greater transparency in executive compensation in general, and compensation committee decision-making in particular, resulted in the SEC’s complete overhaul of the proxy disclosure requirements for executive compensation in 2006 and 2009, as well as specific requirements in the Dodd-Frank Act in 2010.

The legislative and regulatory, as well as public, scrutiny of the role of executive compensation in connection with (and as a contributing factor to) the recent global financial downturn suggests that shareholder and regulatory interest in executive compensation is not likely to wane. Regulators are now working on rules implementing the executive compensation and corporate governance provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act, which include mandatory say-on-pay votes for all public companies, as well as additional executive compensation disclosures relating to the relationship between the CEO’s total pay and the company’s median employee’s total pay, and the relationship between executive compensation and the company’s financial performance.

These recent executive compensation and corporate governance reforms reflect Congress’s heightened focus on the role of the compensation committee as the primary corporate decision maker for compensation matters. In performing this function, the compensation committee should consider the following questions:

  • How should compensation packages for the CEO and other senior executives be determined, including (i) who should do the negotiating; (ii) what are the relevant companies, and/or peer companies, with which to compare the corporation’s compensation packages; and (iii) what is the appropriate role, if any, for compensation consultants and other advisors in setting compensation levels and elements?
  • Is management’s compensation reasonably related to personal and corporate performance, and does it appropriately motivate management to build value for shareholders?
  • Over time, are the compensation programs and policies attracting and retaining quality management for the corporation?
  • Do a corporation’s public disclosures about executive compensation give shareholders an accurate picture of senior executive compensation and the reasoning behind executive compensation decisions?
  • Under what circumstances should the corporation recover previously awarded compensation, and how should the corporation’s compensation “clawback” policy function, given legislative and regulatory requirements, including (i) which officers and employees will be subject to the policy, (ii) what types and amounts of compensation are subject to potential recovery, and (iii) how should the policy be implemented to ensure enforceability?
  • Are severance, change-of-control, and post-employment benefits properly related to corporate interests and reasonable in amount?

The compensation committee should apply independent judgment to determine the compensation arrangements and levels that are in the best interests of the corporation. When functioning effectively, the compensation committee provides credibility and substance to the concept of independent oversight of executive compensation.

A. MEMBERSHIP

The compensation committee should, and generally must, consist solely of independent directors. The Dodd-Frank Act will require the major securities markets to revise their listing standards to require that compensation committee members satisfy heightened independence standards. In addition, under the federal tax laws, decisions of most public companies to pay certain highly compensated executives more than $1 million annually must be made by directors who meet the Internal Revenue Service’s definition of “outside director” in order for the compensation to qualify for a full federal tax deduction. Moreover, SEC rules exempt executive officer option grants from profit recapture only if “non-employee directors,” as defined in those rules, make the grant decisions. Each of these terms is similar to, but not the same as, the “independent director” definitions in stock exchange listing standards. Consequently, the eligibility of prospective compensation committee members should be reviewed against each standard. Interlocking compensation committee memberships are strongly discouraged, trigger additional proxy statement disclosures, and may disqualify a director from “independent” status under listing standards. For example, if an executive officer of a corporation serves on the compensation committee of another company, and an executive officer of that other company serves on the first corporation’s compensation committee, they are considered to be “interlocking.”

Apart from legal considerations, the compensation committee’s independence from management gives greater credibility to the compensation committee’s key responsibility: to establish and approve compensation for executive officers on behalf of the corporation. Further, even when a director meets the independence requirements of the applicable listing standards, close personal or business ties between the director and the CEO may mean, or at least create the appearance, that the director is not an appropriate member of the compensation committee. As with board membership generally, diverse backgrounds, expertise, and experiences can provide useful perspectives in compensation committee deliberations.

B. PRINCIPAL FUNCTIONS

The principal functions of the compensation committee are to:

  • oversee the corporation’s overall compensation structure, philosophy, policies, and programs and assess whether they establish appropriate incentives for senior executives;
  • review and approve corporate goals and objectives relevant to the CEO and senior executive compensation and annually evaluate executive performance in light of those goals and objectives;
  • establish the compensation and benefits of the CEO and executive officers;
  • assess how compensation policies and programs contribute to or affect the company’s risk profile and structure them to create incentives for management to make risk-appropriate decisions;
  • evaluate and approve employment agreements with executive officers;
  • establish and periodically review policies for the administration of executive compensation programs (including all equity-based plans and perquisites);
  • make recommendations to the board with respect to incentive compensation plans and equity-based plans generally;
  • review and be satisfied with the corporation’s Compensation Discussion and Analysis disclosure and discuss with management any issues or questions arising from that review;
  • review and approve the annual report of the compensation committee for inclusion in the annual meeting proxy statement; and
  • conduct an annual self-evaluation.

1. Decision-Making Process

The compensation committee independence requirement is designed to promote objective judgment on the sensitive matter of management’s compensation, and in particular, the compensation of the CEO. At a minimum, the compensation committee should create a thorough process to reach an informed decision that is something more than rubber-stamping somebody else’s recommendations. How much more, of course, depends on the compensation committee’s judgment, as well as the facts and circumstances of the situation.

A compensation committee should consider the most effective process for reaching an independent and informed decision about the appropriateness of the amount and composition of management’s compensation packages. The compensation committee may benefit from engaging and collaborating with competent, experienced, and independent compensation consultants, who can assist in collecting comparative data and advise on the best compensation packages for the corporation. Indeed, the Dodd-Frank Act authorizes compensation committees to retain and oversee independent advisors. Regardless of whether the committee engages outside consultants or counsel for assistance, the committee is ultimately responsible for approving the terms, amounts, and forms of compensation.

Utilizing the resources of advisors, particularly those engaged by the compensation committee and independent of the company and senior management, can give credibility and substance to the independent oversight of executive compensation. The type of advisors and the extent of their use can vary depending on each executive’s position within the company and on a variety of other facts and circumstances. For example, an outside CEO brought in to lead the company may warrant a different process than the lifelong insider of many years. In addition, if an executive engages his or her own lawyer to negotiate the terms of the employment agreement, the compensation committee should consider how best to protect the corporation’s interest in the process—for example, engaging its own or company counsel to help negotiate the agreement.

Management’s participation in the compensation committee’s decision-making process is a particularly sensitive area. Although a company’s CEO will often meet with the compensation committee, she or he should not be present during most of its deliberations and should never be present during deliberations regarding his or her own compensation. The same is true of the corporation’s general counsel and senior compensation or human resources executives. Both the reality and the appearance of independent oversight are important; therefore, it is wise to have compensation committee discussions on executive compensation matters occur without members of management present. The committee should consider the CEO’s compensation in a private session, without the CEO or the CEO’s subordinate officers.

With respect to compensation policies and decisions for non-employee members of the corporation’s board of directors, the best practice is for the entire board to make or approve the policies and decisions, rather than just the compensation committee.

2. Structure and Components of Executive Compensation

The basic principle that a significant portion of an executive’s compensation should be tied to the corporation’s strategic objectives and financial performance, with an appropriate balance between short- and long-term incentives, should guide the compensation committee. The structure and components of an executive compensation package vary among industries and companies. Benchmarking against peer companies is sometimes used as a tool to help determine executive compensation, but the committee should avoid simply matching or exceeding the compensation structure of peer companies. In addition, peer companies should be selected carefully, with company size, financial condition, industry characteristics, competitive factors, location, and corporate culture as relevant factors. Many companies have compensation consultants prepare summaries focused on the regions in which the companies compete for talent, the industries within which they principally work, and their market capitalization. Some companies may also use more than one peer group for executives, if the markets for which the companies compete for executive talent differ for one or more positions.

Compensation committees have a wide variety of tools for equity incentives, such as restricted stock, restricted stock units, stock appreciation rights, stock options, and other types of equity compensation. Although historically stock options were commonly used because there was no charge to earnings associated with the grant of “at the market” stock options, current accounting rules now require companies to recognize a non-cash expense in connection with all stock options, thereby eliminating the accounting benefit of granting options as compared to other forms of equity compensation. In addition, overhang strains and the economic downturn in late 2008 left many previously granted options under water and considerably weakened the existing incentives. Consequently, some compensation committees have begun to grant other forms of equity compensation, such as restricted stock or restricted stock units, or awards that vest to a greater extent in later years or vest only when recipients meet specified performance goals. In choosing the form and vesting schedule and conditions of an award, compensation committees should carefully consider whether the award provides the intended incentive, for example, by taking into account other awards already held, including the exercise prices and vesting of such awards, the accounting expense of the award, the tax effect of the award both for the company and the individual, and the administrative complexity of the award.

Compensation committees also often require retention or holding periods for stock, whether granted or obtained on option exercise. This can help to align executive pay more effectively with long-term performance. Many companies also establish stock ownership targets to further align the executives’ interests with those of shareholders. Some companies prohibit activities that attempt to hedge against a decrease in the value of the company’s equity securities. The Dodd-Frank Act requires that companies disclose whether employees or directors may engage in hedging transactions.

The compensation committee should also review the benefits and perquisites provided to senior executives, particularly when approving employment contracts. “Perks” have received considerable attention due to perceived excesses in their use, such as personal use of a corporate aircraft, tax gross-ups, and use of company resources post-employment. As a result, the SEC requires enhanced disclosure of perks. Another important area of scrutiny is retirement, termination, and change-in-control benefits. There is widespread shareholder concern that these benefits are not sufficiently related to job performance, and compensation committees should be aware that these benefits could be viewed as excessive even when fully disclosed in the annual Compensation Discussion and Analysis. For example, some institutional investor groups now recommend that constituents withhold votes from, or even vote against, members of the compensation committee or board of directors that approve a new or materially modified employment agreement that includes a tax gross-up.

In addition, committee members should understand the interplay of all compensation arrangements—fixed, incentive, benefits, perquisites, deferred compensation, retirement, severance, and change in control—so that unintended or disproportionate benefits do not accrue to the senior executive. To facilitate this understanding, at many public corporations senior management or independent compensation consultants annually provide committee members with a clear and comprehensive presentation detailing all elements and amounts of compensation paid to each senior executive, as well as the value of potential retirement, severance, and change in control benefits to which the executive could become entitled (sometimes referred to as a “tally sheet”). The SEC’s 2006 compensation disclosure rules increased the need for an accurate computation of these amounts. These rules require public corporations to disclose details about the dollar value of all elements of executive compensation, as well as estimates of benefits that could become payable to senior executives either upon a termination of employment or upon a change in control of the corporation.

The compensation committee also has a role in risk oversight for company compensation policies and practices. Under the 2009 SEC executive compensation rules, companies must analyze their compensation policies and practices and disclose whether those policies and practices encourage excessive risk taking and are reasonably likely to have a material adverse effect on the company. In most companies, management, in some cases working with compensation consultants, prepares this analysis and makes the initial determination regarding the companies’ policies and practices by tallying all of the elements of compensation, determining the risks posed by each element, and then analyzing any mitigating factors. The compensation committee, however, retains an oversight role, and management should detail its procedures for committee approval and provide the committee with a summary of its analysis and determination. In some cases, the compensation committee may want to take a more active role in risk oversight for compensation policies and practices by reviewing and approving management’s comprehensive analysis or even conducting its own analysis with input from its compensation consultants.

The proper design of a compensation program is just the starting point. The program requires at least annual performance evaluations of the participating executives against pre-established performance targets (which may include comparison against the performance of peer corporations), as well as ongoing review of the program’s effectiveness. The compensation committee should keep the board informed of the results of these periodic reviews.

3. Documentation of Approval of Executive Compensation

The compensation committee should review with senior management the corporation’s procedures for accurately and timely documenting the grants or issuances of equity awards, both in the compensation committee’s minutes (or other written action) and in the documentation evidencing the awards. Detailed compensation committee minutes or resolutions that adequately discuss the compensation committee’s rationale, deliberation, and consideration regarding the grants or issuances of equity awards and any other form of executive compensation, are considered best practices and can assist the corporation in the preparation of its annual Compensation Discussion and Analysis. As a general matter, a corporation should have adequate written procedures relating to the grants or issuances of equity awards, including the timing and pricing of such grants or issuances, to help protect the corporation, its executives, and the compensation committee against claims of manipulation or abuse in the timing or pricing of such grants or issuances of equity awards. Best practices also include granting equity awards at pre-scheduled meetings that fall outside of company blackout periods for employee trading of company securities and avoiding the use of actions by written consent and delegation to officers.

4. Legal Restrictions on Executive Compensation

The compensation committee should become familiar with and receive legal advice as to legal restrictions on compensation to officers and directors, whether under a shareholder approved plan or otherwise. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act prohibits most personal loans and extensions or arrangements of credit from a public company to its directors and executive officers. In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act requires that companies adopt a “clawback” provision, applicable in the event of a restatement of financial statements, providing for recovery of excess amounts of any bonus or other incentive- or equity-based compensation received during the three-year period preceding the restatement. The clawback provision must cover all current and former executives.

Regardless of the requirements of the federal securities and other laws, in circumstances in which there has been a restatement indicating that the bases on which incentive-based compensation has been paid are no longer correct, the compensation committee or other independent directors should consider whether to recover any compensation on the basis of unjust enrichment. In addition, if the restatement resulted from employee misconduct, the compensation committee or other independent directors should consider whether to take action to discipline or dismiss, as well as to recover compensation paid to, any employee involved in the misconduct.

To assist with the recovery of such compensation, and in light of mandatory clawback provisions, the compensation committee should consider incorporating clawback provisions into the terms of incentive compensation programs or arrangements. For example, the provisions could, in certain circumstances, contractually obligate the employee to return any such compensation to the corporation. In particular, and in light of recent legislation, the compensation committee should determine the circumstances under which the corporation would be entitled to clawback, including determining the eligible employees and types and amounts of compensation to be subject to the policy, as well as determining how to implement the policy, accounting for enforceability factors. The compensation committee should consider the potential effect of compensation provisions on its ability to attract and retain executives and on investor and shareholder concerns regarding the corporation’s executive compensation programs and arrangements.

C. DISCLOSURE OF COMPENSATION DECISIONS

Public company managers must prepare a section of the annual meeting proxy statement called Compensation Discussion and Analysis, which is a detailed discussion of the key elements of the corporation’s executive compensation policies and decisions. This disclosure discusses the principles underlying executive compensation decisions and should include a discussion regarding the rationale behind the adoption of such principles and explain executive compensation decisions in light of the principles. The Dodd-Frank Act requires a non-binding shareholder vote, at least once every three years, to approve compensation of named executive officers. This vote will take place at annual or other shareholder meetings for which the SEC requires disclosure. In addition to this say-on-pay vote, the legislation also requires a non-binding vote every six years to determine the frequency of say-on-pay votes.

The Compensation Discussion and Analysis must include a discussion of the following:

  • the objectives of the corporation’s compensation programs;
  • the results the compensation program is designed to reward;
  • the elements of compensation;
  • the reasons the corporation chose to pay each element;
  • the manner in which the corporation determines the amount (and the formula, if any) for each element of pay; and
  • the way each compensation element and the corporation’s decisions regarding that element fit into the corporation’s overall compensation objectives and affect decisions regarding other compensation elements.

The compensation committee should scrutinize closely the corporation’s policies and procedures relating to the disclosure of executive officer compensation. Consultation with external compensation specialists may be necessary to assist the committee in formulating the Compensation Discussion and Analysis. Because the committee makes many decisions for senior executives outside the presence of management, the committee should assist management in its preparation of the Compensation Discussion and Analysis (for example, by providing detailed minutes that reflect and highlight the various factors it weighed and considered) and then review and be satisfied with the disclosure’s accuracy. The compensation committee must also state, in a separate report in the proxy statement, that its members have reviewed and discussed the Compensation Discussion and Analysis with management and, based on this review and discussion, recommended that it be included in the proxy statement.

The compensation committee should also work with management and review management’s analysis and assessment of whether compensation policies and practices create risks that are reasonably likely to have a material adverse effect on the company. The compensation committee should seek appropriate assurances from management and legal counsel that all disclosures required by law and by the applicable national stock exchange listing standards are being made, and that rules related to shareholder approval of equity compensation plans and the reporting of grants of and trades in the corporation’s securities are being observed. The compensation committee, along with counsel, should discuss and consider how to document adequately the process leading to the compensation disclosures in a manner that supports the disclosures made.

In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act requires companies, depending on their status, to make specific disclosures, including:

  • indicating whether the committee retained a consultant and its consideration of the factors for doing so (listed companies, but controlled companies exempt);
  • indicating whether the committee’s work has raised any conflicts of interest, and if so, how they were resolved (listed companies, but controlled companies exempt);
  • demonstrating the relationship between executive compensation and financial performance (public companies);
  • stating the ratio between the CEO’s compensation and the median compensation of all other employees (public companies); and
  • indicating whether, as discussed above, certain hedging transactions are permitted (public companies).

The SEC will promulgate further regulations in this area, including specific regulations for financial institutions, and the national securities markets are required to issue related listing rules.

D. INDEPENDENT ADVICE FOR THE COMPENSATION COMMITTEE

The Dodd-Frank Act requires that committees have the power to hire (without management influence in the selection process) compensation specialists, consulting firms, or other experts to assist in the evaluation of executive officers and the development of a compensation program so that it need not rely solely upon management-selected corporate personnel or outside specialists for advice and guidance.

Given increased public scrutiny and the most recent executive compensation and corporate governance reforms, including those in the Dodd-Frank Act, relating to the need for compensation committees to obtain advice from independent advisors, the committee should consider the following types of factors prior to engaging an advisor: (i) the other services performed by the advisor for the corporation, (ii) the amount of fees paid to the advisor for such services, and (iii) the existing personal and business relationships between the advisor and the corporation, including with management. At all times following the engagement, the compensation committee should be made aware of any new relationships that develop between the advisor and the corporation or management.

The compensation committee’s need for independent advice is particularly critical when the compensation committee exercises its obligations with respect to reviewing and approving employment, retention, change-in-control and/or severance agreements with executives. As a result, for example, the Dodd-Frank Act requires the compensation committee to have full authority, stated in its charter, to approve its advisors’ fees and other terms of engagement and should make clear that the advisors work for the compensation committee, not management. Compensation consultant fees and other services by the consultant must be publicly disclosed in certain circumstances. The advisor should have direct access to the compensation committee, without the presence of management, to help preserve the advisor’s independence. Outside advisors should also have direct access to senior executives in order to obtain information necessary to provide the compensation committee with independent advice.

E. OTHER RESPONSIBILITIES

Other responsibilities that the compensation committee may undertake include reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of employee pension, profit sharing, 401(k), and other benefit plans and programs, taking into account the importance of retaining, motivating, and incentivizing the employees of the corporation, as well as the overall cost to the corporation of such programs. Compensation committees should carefully consider whether they are or should be fiduciaries with respect to the corporation’s pension, 401(k), or other employee benefit plans that are subject to regulation under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA). Under ERISA, plan fiduciaries are subject to heightened scrutiny and responsibility with respect to the investment of plan assets. The compensation committee has a duty to be informed about the corporation’s compensation and benefit structure; however, most compensation committees do not act as fiduciaries for ERISA-covered benefit plans. Directors and high-level executives typically are privy to non-public information regarding the corporation’s performance and finances. As a result, they can be in the difficult position of having to choose between their duties as officers or directors under state and federal laws to keep such information confidential, and their duties as plan fiduciaries possibly to disclose or act upon such information for the benefit of plan participants. Often, rather than having directors or senior officers designated as plan fiduciaries, corporation employees (but not the most senior executives) will serve as the fiduciaries of the corporation’s ERISA-covered benefit plans. Increasingly, however, corporations are engaging independent fiduciaries to make some or all of the investment decisions for their ERISA-covered benefit plans. This separation can help insulate the corporation from potential conflicts of interest related to such investment decisions, particularly with respect to any decisions to invest plan assets in the stock of the corporation.

SECTION 9: NOMINATING AND GOVERNANCE COMMITTEE

An effective nominating and corporate governance function is critical to board performance. This committee’s stature and importance has increased with the growth in company size, investor focus on board composition and performance, and the financial crisis. It also has transformed into a corporate governance committee or a nominating and governance committee.

Major securities markets’ listing standards prescribe some elements of the nominating and corporate governance function. Generally, the committee is responsible for recruiting and maintaining board members with the appropriate skills and independence for quality decision-making. It also implements and oversees the operation of corporate governance principles for both board process and the corporation’s business.

A. MEMBERSHIP

The nominating and governance committee should be composed solely of independent directors. The NYSE requires that each of its listed companies has a committee composed entirely of independent directors, with a written charter that addresses the committee’s process to identify individuals qualified to become directors, to select, or to recommend that the board select, director nominees, and to develop and recommend to the board a set of corporate governance principles for the corporation. NASDAQ rules do not mandate a nominating or corporate governance committee but do require that either a committee of independent directors (subject to limited exceptions) or a majority of independent board members select or recommend director nominees. As a practical matter, because SEC rules require public disclosure of reasons for a corporation’s lack of a nominating committee, virtually all NASDAQ companies maintain such a committee.

B. CRITERIA FOR BOARD MEMBERSHIP

A nominating and governance committee should establish, or recommend to the board, criteria for identifying appropriate director candidates. These criteria are usually in governance principles or a separate policy. The committee should lead the recruitment and selection process. The attributes of an effective corporate director include strength of character, an inquiring and independent mind, practical wisdom, and mature judgment. In addition to these personal qualities, the committee may want to emphasize individual qualifications such as diversity, technical skills, career specialization, specific industry experience, or expertise in matters such as compensation or governance. The effective nominating committee seeks director attributes to complement and expand the attributes of the existing board members. Of course, the committee must address certain requirements, such as identifying a director who qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert” for accounting and financial reporting purposes, or explain why it does not have such an expert. Public companies are also emphasizing diversity considerations in their desired board profile, recognizing that diversity can contribute significant value by providing additional perspectives to board deliberations. The articles or certificate of incorporation, bylaws, or board policies may include other qualifications for directors, such as age or length of service limitations or relevant experience.

There is no one-size-fits-all approach to director searches. The desired outcome is a board that can build consensus and effectively exercise collaborative judgment. Some boards also look for specific skills and experiences to build on what they currently possess, lack, or need to strengthen. This type of focus can help direct the search toward candidates who can provide needed additional talent and experience to the corporation.

Most corporate governance commentators recommend that a board of a public company have a substantial majority of independent directors, and the major securities markets require at least a majority of independent directors. When considering director independence, the committee should also bear in mind broader judicial standards of disinterestedness applicable for judicial review of conflict of interest or other issues. As a result, the committee should evaluate the full range of business and personal relationships between director candidates and the corporation and its senior managers.

Although independent directors are essential to a well functioning board, the board must be able to receive candid input from senior management. In addition to input from the CEO, who is typically on the board, the committee should consider how best to have access to senior management to ensure that input. Some nominating and governance committees determine that senior officers, in addition to the CEO, should serve as directors, whereas others decide that attendance at board or committee meetings by senior officers in a non-director capacity is sufficient to facilitate the board’s ready access to information regarding the business and operations of the corporation. Although it is not typical to have senior executives, beyond the CEO, on the board, in an appropriate case, their presence can serve to enhance succession planning and facilitate a peer relationship and firsthand contact.

C. EVALUATING BOARD INCUMBENTS

The nominating and governance committee is also responsible for evaluating incumbent directors. The committee should thoughtfully consider each director’s contribution and the needs of the board before deciding whether to recommend renomination. This is a good practice and can help address the common criticism that election or appointment to the board is tantamount to tenure. It is also responsive to SEC disclosure rules requiring disclosure of director qualifications justifying service. The committee should consider attendance, preparation, participation, and other relevant factors. Tools to assist in the evaluation process may include confidential discussions led by the board chair, lead director, or corporate governance committee chair, self-evaluations, and peer evaluations. Outside consultants can also be effective in the evaluation process.

Boards handle the sensitive issue of board succession, including underperforming directors, in a variety of ways. Many boards attempt to deal with the issue indirectly through the adoption of mandatory retirement policies, but these policies can create an expectation that board service continues until retirement. In fact, a well-functioning nominating committee should be able to decline to nominate incumbents for reelection as individual situations dictate.

D. NOMINATING DIRECTORS

The nominating and governance committee approves and selects, or recommends that the board select, director nominees, including both incumbent directors and new candidates. The committee also recommends candidates to the board to fill interim director vacancies.

The committee should encourage all directors, including management directors, to suggest candidates for the board. The committee should also seek out candidates and can employ search consultants to assist in identifying appropriate candidates. The committee’s charter should give the committee the authority to retain a search firm to identify director candidates, including the authority to approve the search firm’s fees and other retention terms. The committee should control the process, including making decisions with respect to nominees and recommending to the full board a slate of nominees. Moreover, the committee should be the conduit for communication regarding shareholder recommendations for director nominees. The board’s comprehensive plan for shareholder communications may encourage the committee to seek suggestions for director candidates from its institutional investors and other shareholders. Both the non-executive chair, if there is one, or a lead or presiding director and the nominating/corporate governance committee chair should be prominently involved in the recruiting process in order to ensure that the committee is making nominating decisions and not the CEO or other insiders.

Public company proxy statements must disclose the nominating and governance committee’s procedures and policies for considering director candidates, as well as the particular experience, attributes, skills, and qualifications the committee focused on in selecting or recommending each director candidate. Indeed, the proxy statement affords a board the opportunity to explain why it believes a nomination is warranted. Furthermore, public companies must disclose whether, and if so, how, the nominating and governance committee considers diversity in identifying director nominees. If the nominating/corporate governance committee has a diversity policy, the company must disclose how the policy is applied and how the committee assesses the policy’s effectiveness. The purpose of these disclosure requirements is to increase shareholder understanding of the nominating process. Accordingly, the committee should review its procedures and policies to ensure that they are consistent with the committee’s circumstances and operations and that they are sufficiently formalized to provide that understanding and to satisfy the scrutiny of public disclosure.

E. RECOMMENDING COMMITTEE MEMBERS AND CHAIRS

In addition to nominating directors, the nominating and governance committee will often make recommendations to the board regarding the responsibilities and organization of all board committees. The committee should also recommend qualifications for membership on committees. The committee may also make annual recommendations of specific individuals for membership on standing committees. Although some boards have a policy of periodic rotation of committee memberships among the directors to develop expertise and allocate equitably the time commitment, rotation may be more difficult for the audit committee than for others. The committee should also address the process for board decision-making regarding the appointment of and changes in the chair and members of each board committee.

F. CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER AND OTHER MANAGEMENT SUCCESSION

One of the most important functions of the board is selecting and assessing the CEO and planning for CEO and other executive officer management succession. Ongoing planning for what happens in the event of a vacancy in leadership is a critical board responsibility. The nominating and governance committee should be prepared and qualified to lead this process.

The choice of a new CEO is fundamental to the direction of the company. The CEO is primarily responsible for implementing the corporation’s strategic vision with input and guidance from the board. The CEO is also responsible for the short- and long-term performance of the corporation. The CEO will establish in large part the “tone at the top” for legal compliance and ethical standards. Finally, the CEO is generally responsible for the selection and direction of other members of senior management. Consequently, the board must select and continually assess the CEO with care and due consideration for the challenges facing the corporation. The board must monitor the CEO’s performance and determine when there is a need for a change in senior management in light of executive performance and the corporation’s challenges.

The nominating and governance committee often has the responsibility to recommend to the board a selection process or a successor to the CEO in the event of retirement or termination of service. The committee may also review and approve proposed changes in other senior management positions, with the understanding that the CEO should have considerable discretion in selecting, retaining, and reviewing members of the management team. In order to perform these functions, the committee, or another board committee, should, at least annually, review the performance of the CEO and members of senior management.

Succession planning is a continuous board activity that is closely related to management development. The board should be aware of, and regularly reassess, how long the current CEO is likely to continue, what developments may cause a change in that expectation (including a shift in strategy, a change in performance, or an emergency or crisis). The board should also consider what might cause the CEO or other senior executive officers to consider leaving the company. Although all of these factors are relevant, succession planning is in fact a continuous process and one that, by definition, rarely results in a hard and fast plan for a specific outcome. As a result, two key components of succession planning are assessing and developing other management talent and considering what steps the CEO and other senior executive officers can take to further develop their own leadership capabilities and those of their direct reports.

Decisions about succession planning and management development should be closely related to corporate strategy, because the leadership group must have both a clear understanding of the corporate strategy and the ability to implement it. In addition, the committee should ensure the succession plan includes emergency procedures for management succession in the event of the unexpected death, disability, or departure of the CEO. The plan should also incorporate a review, with the CEO, of management’s plans for the replacement of members of the senior management team, as well as the CEO’s assessment of the ability of team members to lead, whether on an interim or longer basis, should the CEO be incapacitated.

G. OTHER COMMITTEE AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FUNCTIONS

As mentioned previously, the nominating and governance committee has increasingly assumed responsibility for ensuring that the corporation has adopted, maintained, and regularly updated principles and policies of corporate governance. In addition to addressing director nomination or renomination, committee membership, and management evaluation and succession, the committee typically addresses the following tasks and issues:

  • developing, recommending to the board, and monitoring a statement of corporate governance principles or guidelines (required of listed companies by NYSE);
  • developing proposals for amendments to bylaws and other governance documents;
  • developing policies to respond to shareholder proposals;
  • evaluating the effectiveness of individual directors, the board, and board committees (also required by NYSE);
  • evaluating director standards of independence and monitoring director compliance with those standards;
  • providing for director orientation and education programs;
  • reviewing the board’s leadership structure;
  • reviewing the board committee structure, including each committee’s recommendation regarding its charter and size and the possible addition of other committees, such as finance, public policy, or risk management committees;
  • reviewing and making recommendations with respect to the corporation’s director policies, such as compensation, retirement, indemnification, and insurance;
  • examining board meeting policies, such as meeting schedule and location, meeting agenda, presence and participation of non-director senior executives, and materials distributed in advance of meetings; and
  • establishing and overseeing procedures for shareholder communications with directors.

H. BOARD LEADERSHIP

As discussed in Section 5 above, many companies that do not have an independent non-executive board chair often designate an independent director as a presiding or lead director or another designation indicating a leadership role among independent directors. This director can be a helpful counterweight to a strong CEO and can ensure that there is an appropriate flow of information to all board members. The nominating and governance committee should consider the appropriateness of such a designation, and if it concludes that it should propose a candidate, it should do so, along with a description of responsibilities. In many cases, the chair of the nominating and governance committee may be the appropriate person for this leadership role. Federal securities laws and regulations require companies to disclose their board leadership structure and the rationale for it.

I. DIRECTOR COMPENSATION

Either the nominating and governance committee or the compensation committee should periodically evaluate the form and amount of director compensation and make a recommendation to the board about it. The committee can seek the advice of outside compensation consultants to assist it. Directors have an unavoidable conflict of interest in fixing their own compensation, and they cannot eliminate the conflict by having management or a compensation consultant suggest the programs. Directors nevertheless have the responsibility to determine their own compensation, so they must ensure they have considered the information necessary to reach a fair decision, including data on peer companies and an analysis of any factors relating to their particular circumstance, such as the complexity of the company and the expected time commitment.

Director compensation programs should align the directors’ interests with the long-term interests of the corporation. Director compensation may take a number of different forms, including annual stock or cash retainers, attendance fees for board and committee meetings, deferred compensation plans, stock options, and restricted stock grants. Additional compensation for additional service, such as for serving as chair of a committee, serving on an ad hoc special committee, or serving on a particularly active committee, is also common. There is, however, a trend away from fees for individual meetings. The corporation’s executives generally do not receive additional compensation for board service.

SEC proxy disclosure rules require detailed disclosure of all elements of director compensation, including perquisites and charitable donation programs. Any non-monetary items, such as stock options or restricted stock grants, require estimates. Any consulting or other agreements with directors and any payments to directors for consulting or other services beyond the regular directors’ fees can impair independence and require disclosure in the annual proxy statement.

The board should be sensitive to and avoid compensation policies or corporate perquisites that might impair the independence of its non-management directors. To maintain directors’ focus on proper long-range corporate objectives, most corporations now pay some component of compensation in the form of restricted stock grants and, although there is a shift away from them toward other equity, stock options. The rationale is that these forms of equity compensation strengthen the directors’ interest in the overall success of the corporation and better align their personal interests with those of shareholders. Options alone do not involve acceptance of any economic risk by a director. Therefore, some companies require directors to purchase a minimum amount of stock in the open market or to accept at least a designated portion of their compensation in stock grants rather than cash. In addition, some companies have policies requiring directors to hold, for a minimum period, shares resulting from the exercise of stock options (less sales necessary to fund option exercise and pay commissions and taxes). Although directors’ retirement arrangements, insurance policies, and educational or charitable gift programs were once widespread, the increasing perception is that they are not related to corporate performance. As a result, their role in compensation has been reduced or discontinued.

SECTION 10: RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND SHAREHOLDERS

A. NATURE OF THE BOARD/SHAREHOLDER RELATIONSHIP

Shareholders have become more engaged in recent years in the exercise of their rights, particularly their right to elect directors and to participate in annual and special shareholder meetings. Institutions, rather than individuals, are the primary shareholders of large and midsize public corporations, and many of these institutions owe fiduciary duties to their own investors or beneficiaries, which may include exercising their voting rights. Some of these institutions seek to influence the boards of public corporations on key governance decisions, viewing governance advocacy as a tool to improve portfolio performance. Hedge funds have also engaged in shareholder activism to promote a strategy or outcome consistent with their economic interests. The removal of regulatory barriers to communication and coordination among shareholders and the ease of communication in the internet age have aided shareholders who seek to engage in advocacy, persuasion, and other forms of activism. Moreover, institutions often rely on proxy advisory firms in whole or in part, and this has increased the influence of these firms in voting decisions.

Although the shareholder base of a public corporation is typically a fluid mix of unaffiliated investors with varying interests, the board has the duty to act in the best interests of all shareholders, no matter who nominated the director or the director’s affiliation. Shareholders are concerned about a wide variety of corporate governance issues, including the qualifications and composition of the board, executive compensation, financial reporting, the structure of the director election process (e.g., majority voting, proxy access, and the like) and related charter and bylaw provisions (e.g., staggered board and special meeting provisions), other defensive measures (e.g., rights plans), and board leadership (including the question of whether to split the positions of board chair and CEO). Shareholders may submit proposals to the company with regard to one or more of these issues, seeking to change current corporate governance policies. The proposals may be either binding (like bylaw amendments consistent with shareholder rights) or nonbinding. Although shareholders may not have uniform views about any particular governance issue, such proposals, even if advisory, sometimes garner significant shareholder support despite management opposition.

Shareholder advisory firms have policies on a variety of corporate governance issues and publish ratings of a corporation’s governance based on the perceived compliance with the advisory firm’s policies. These policies often change over time, requiring a continued focus on current governance trends. The advisory firms also recommend votes against directors, or in favor of a “withhold” vote, if the corporation’s policies are inconsistent with the advisory group’s established positions on a particular matter. Indeed, shareholder advisory firms often support shareholder proposals, and in the event the advisory proposals pass, but are not implemented by the corporation, the firms have recommended a vote against the directors in future elections.

Boards may want to address many of the governance issues of concern to shareholders on their own initiative before being pressured to do so. In assessing governance trends and shareholder proposals, boards must exercise their business judgment, adopt governance changes or improvements appropriate for their company given its circumstances, and resist governance changes that are inappropriate for the company.

Boards may also want to develop communication policies or protocols to promote dialogue with or facilitate receipt of input from shareholders. For example, shareholder groups may request an audience with the lead director, the independent directors, or an independent board committee to discuss various corporate governance issues and concerns. Boards need to consider appropriate policies to respond to such requests. Some boards meet with certain key shareholders from time to time to listen to their views and concerns. These efforts should augment but not replace efforts to ensure that shareholders are informed of the company’s efforts toward achieving long-term goals and strategic objectives. The annual meeting also serves as an occasion for information gathering and outreach to shareholders, and some boards encourage directors to engage shareholders in that environment. In moments of crisis, the board may also need to communicate directly to shareholders.

In any communications or meetings with shareholders, boards must consider confidentiality requirements and Regulation FD compliance, as well as the corporation’s disclosure posture on various issues. Moreover, the board must keep in mind that the executive officers of the company carry out the day-to-day management. The CEO or other designated officer should generally be the spokesperson for the corporation on topics relating to the corporation’s business, to assure that the corporation conveys a consistent message. Finally, directors must remember that the board acts only as an entity, and any communication policy should consider how to ensure that the board’s views are conveyed with one consistent voice.

B. ELECTION PROCESS

As noted above, once elected by the shareholders (or otherwise appointed to the board), directors have a duty to act in the best interests of the corporation to the exclusion of their own interests. Directors are accountable to the corporation’s shareholders who, if dissatisfied with the directors’ performance, can, depending on state law and the articles or certificate of incorporation and bylaws, vote against reelection (or withhold votes as a protest) or, in cases where the articles and bylaws allow, remove directors from office even before their terms are over.

Directors generally serve for a one-year term or, if a corporation’s articles or certificate of incorporation provide for a classified or “staggered” board, for longer. Typically, directors on a classified board serve for staggered three-year terms. The principal benefit of a classified board is to ensure continuity of leadership. In recent years, shareholder activists have criticized classified boards. Classified boards can operate as a takeover defense, because, for example, under some state statutes directors on a classified board can be removed only for “cause” unless otherwise provided in the articles or certificate of incorporation. As a result, it may be difficult for shareholders to unseat directors in the period between elections. As with most aspects of corporate governance, there is no single answer as to the appropriateness of a classified board.

Traditionally, directors have been elected by a plurality vote, which means that the candidates with the highest number of votes in their favor are elected, up to the maximum number of directorships up for election. This standard ensures a successful election. Plurality voting is gradually losing ground as the predominant standard for uncontested director elections as many boards, including a significant percentage of the Fortune 100, have adopted a majority voting standard. There are numerous possible formulations of majority voting but, in general, under a majority voting standard a candidate must garner more votes cast in favor than against. Many companies have adopted majority voting, either in their articles or certificate of incorporation or bylaws or as a board policy (which retains plurality voting as the underlying standard for election, but requires candidates who fail to receive a majority of the votes cast to tender their resignation to the board). Plurality voting continues to apply to contested elections.

Boards implementing a form of majority voting need to consider the possible consequences of a majority against/withheld vote, including mechanisms to ensure that the board continues to be able to function effectively in the face of that vote. Most corporations adopting majority voting seek to retain some flexibility for the board through application of holdover rules and policies to allow the independent directors of the board to determine whether to allow the director to continue to serve. Of course, the board must act in the best interests of the corporation and its shareholders in making this decision.

The vast majority of elections for corporate directors are not contested. Incumbent directors (in many cases on recommendation by a nominating committee of the board) choose and nominate a slate and recommend that the shareholders vote for it. Although shareholders have the right to nominate their own candidates, the solicitation of proxies from other shareholders is typically necessary in order for such candidates to have any chance of being elected. This solicitation must comply with the SEC’s proxy solicitation rules, including the filing and dissemination of separate proxy materials. The process can be relatively expensive and time-consuming. Further, the outcome of a proxy contest is uncertain, and there are no guarantees that replacement directors will perform any better than the incumbents. Therefore, election contests, even the running of one or two directors (a so-called short slate), are not lightly—or very often—undertaken.

In recent years, shareholders have relied increasingly on “withhold the vote” or “vote against” campaigns to signal disapproval of board candidates or of board policies, instead of seeking to run and elect alternative nominees. These negative campaigns can be powerful catalysts for change. Although the results do not affect the legal outcome of the election in a plurality vote system when there are no competing candidates, there have been some prominent instances in which a large percentage of “withheld” or “against” votes from one or more candidates were followed by a change in the board composition, including the resignation of the affected candidates. Recent changes in law may facilitate contested director elections using only the corporation’s proxy materials, in effect making the corporation’s proxy a “universal proxy.” One purpose of these changes is to address the issues of expense and complexity that make a full proxy contest relatively rare, as noted above. The changes also seek to make it easier for shareholders to promote the election of one or more directors in opposition to the corporation’s director nominees. Thus, for example, Delaware law permits a corporation to adopt a bylaw to facilitate a shareholder’s access to the proxy statement, and subject to conditions specified in the bylaw, require the corporation to include in its proxy materials one or more nominees submitted by shareholders. The bylaws may limit this right to a minimum level of record or beneficial stock ownership and may also include other conditions such as the number or proportion of directors nominated by a shareholder or whether the shareholder has previously sought to require inclusion of its nominees. Delaware law also permits bylaws to reimburse shareholders’ proxy expenses subject to established conditions. The Corporate Laws Committee has adopted similar changes to the Model Business Corporation Act. Finally, pursuant to the Dodd-Frank Act, the SEC has adopted proxy access rules, which, if they become effective, will provide a single federal standard on proxy access to which the state law provisions of Delaware and other states will become complementary.

SECTION 11: DUTIES UNDER THE FEDERAL SECURITIES LAWS

Federal and state laws regulate the disclosure practices and securities transactions of public companies and their directors, officers, and employees. The federal securities laws are administered by the SEC and affect many daily activities of public companies. Violation of these laws may result in significant civil and criminal penalties, imposed not only on the corporation, but also potentially on individual directors and officers. Directors need to be particularly attentive to their own, as well as the corporation’s, compliance with these laws. Review of programs and policies designed to maintain compliance with the federal securities laws, absent assignment of responsibilities to a legal compliance committee, is often delegated to the audit committee.

A corporation must maintain effective systems of internal controls and procedures for collecting, reviewing, and disclosing financial and other material information about the corporation. Quarterly review and certification of the effectiveness of systems and procedures that support SEC filings are required of the CEO and the CFO of public companies. Annual evaluation of internal controls over financial reporting by management and attestation of internal controls over financial reporting by the external auditor are also required for many companies. The board, generally through its audit committee, should receive and examine reports concerning each of these reviews.

A. SEC REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Public companies must file both periodic and current reports with the SEC. Periodic reports include an annual report on Form 10-K and quarterly reports on Form 10-Q. Current reports on Form 8-K are required for disclosure of quarterly earnings releases, material contracts, changes in the board and management, shareholder meeting voting results, and a broad spectrum of other specified events. A Form 8-K may also be used for voluntary disclosure of information. The SEC’s proxy rules require that the annual meeting proxy statement be accompanied or preceded by an annual report to shareholders. Many of these reports must include specified financial and other information.

The corporation’s annual report on Form 10-K contains the last fiscal year’s audited financial statements, as well as risk factors, management’s discussion and analysis of the corporation’s results of operation and financial condition, and important trends and uncertainties. The Form 10-K is the most detailed of the reports filed with the SEC, and it must be signed by a majority of the corporation’s directors. Separate and apart from the audit committee’s involvement, all directors should review and be satisfied with the corporate processes used to prepare the Form 10-K and understand the significant disclosures in that report. Therefore, the full board should have an opportunity to read, comment on, and ask questions about the Form 10-K before it is filed.

Directors are not expected to verify independently the accuracy of underlying facts contained in earnings releases or reports filed with the SEC, but they should be satisfied that the disclosures are not contrary to the facts as they know them. In addition, the audit committee and the board should be satisfied that there are disclosure controls and procedures in place reasonably designed to achieve the timeliness, accuracy, and completeness of annual and quarterly reports, as well as all other reports and public releases. In addition, the CEO and CFO of public companies are required to review and, based on their knowledge, certify the material accuracy and completeness of quarterly and annual reports. Quarterly assessments of disclosure controls and procedures and annual assessments of internal control over financial reporting are also required. Audit committee members of public companies should be familiar with these certifications and assessments and the procedures undertaken to support them, and the audit committee should always be attentive to reports of control deficiencies, especially material weaknesses, and be satisfied with management’s classification of items as significant deficiencies rather than as material weaknesses.

B. PROXY STATEMENTS

Public companies soliciting proxies for shareholder votes on the election of directors or other matters must furnish each shareholder with a proxy statement. In most cases, the company files only the final proxy statement, as distributed. In other cases, if actions other than election of directors or other routine business are to be taken, the company must file a preliminary proxy statement with the SEC, which will often review and clear it. Directors should be attentive to the procedures followed in preparing the corporation’s proxy statements. It is good practice for every director to review a reasonably close-to-final draft of the proxy statement before it is distributed or filed with the SEC, particularly sections dealing with matters about which the director has personal knowledge or containing a report of a committee on which the director serves. Similar disclosure requirements can apply when corporate action is being taken without soliciting proxies.

The proxy statement for the annual shareholder meeting must include information about the company’s directors, officers, and principal shareholders, as well as about certain of its governance policies. With respect to directors in particular, the proxy statement must include disclosure about each director’s and director nominee’s experience, qualifications, attributes, or skills that led the board to conclude that the person should serve as a director of the company as of the time the proxy statement is filed with the SEC. It must also include extensive information about the company’s compensation of its officers and directors, both in tabular and narrative form, including a detailed discussion of the company’s compensation objectives, policies, and practices, as well as information about related person transactions.

C. FAIR DISCLOSURE

The SEC’s Regulation FD (for “fair disclosure”) provides that material information about a public company may not be disclosed on a selective basis by the corporation or its agents to marketplace participants, such as analysts, brokers, investment advisors, and shareholders who may act on the information and have not agreed to keep the information confidential. Rather, the corporation must take steps to disseminate such information in a manner that makes it broadly available to all market participants simultaneously. As a result, directors should be careful not to disclose non-public information about the corporation and its business. Violations of Regulation FD have resulted in SEC enforcement actions and fines against public companies and corporate officers. Regulation FD has caused public companies to adopt more restrictive policies regarding the persons authorized to speak on behalf of the company with securities analysts and others. It has also prompted many companies to make more information public.

D. REGISTRATION STATEMENTS

Directors should take diligent steps to assure the accuracy of their corporation’s registration statements filed with the SEC in connection with any offering (including in a merger or acquisition) of the corporation’s securities to the public. Regardless of whether a director actually signs the registration statement, the director is liable for any material inaccuracy or omission in the registration statement, including information incorporated by reference from other filed documents, unless the director establishes that, after due diligence, the director was not aware of the inaccuracy or omission.

The director’s primary defense to registration statement liability is due diligence. To establish this defense, the director must show that, after reasonable investigation, the director had reasonable grounds to believe and did believe that the registration statement did not contain any materially false or misleading statements or any material omissions that made the registration statement misleading. Actions required by the director to satisfy the due diligence standard will vary with the circumstances. During the registration process, directors should satisfy themselves that the corporation has developed and used appropriate corporate disclosure controls and procedures reasonably designed to ensure the registration statement’s accuracy and completeness. Although all registration statements should be prepared with appropriate care, certain registered offerings may have a higher potential for liability, such as an initial public offering, a follow-on equity offering, a large acquisition using the corporation’s equity, or a financing or reorganization of a public company that has experienced problems. Accordingly, a board meeting or meetings with counsel, accountants, and management present at which there is discussion and analysis of the disclosures in the registration statement should precede the filing of registration statements for such offerings.

For many companies, the disclosures in the company’s Form 10-K and other reports filed previously with the SEC are incorporated into the registration statement. Therefore, the procedures used to review these reports are important when there is a registered securities offering. Each director also should personally review the registration statement for accuracy, with particular attention to those statements and disclosures in the registration statement that are within the director’s knowledge and competence. Directors may also want to consider consulting with the corporation’s legal counsel to understand any material changes made to disclosure documents in response to SEC comments and to confirm that the process followed is intended to fulfill the due diligence requirements.

E. INSIDER TRADING

The federal securities laws prohibit corporate insiders, including directors, and the corporation itself from purchasing or selling securities, either in the open market or in private transactions, when they possess non-public, material information about the corporation. The corporation or an insider in possession of such information may not take actions involving the securities until the information is publicly disseminated. Policies should be adopted to address securities transactions, including transactions in 401(k) plans and gifts of securities. The federal securities laws also prohibit insiders from revealing material, non-public information concerning the corporation, or giving a recommendation to buy or sell based upon such information, to others who trade based upon such information. Under the SEC’s Rule 10b5-1, directors and other insiders can mitigate the risk of insider trading liability by adopting plans in advance for scheduled sales and purchases of the corporation’s securities. As a general rule, the federal securities laws also prohibit the recipient of a tip from acting on material, non-public information obtained from a corporate source.

Information is material if there is a substantial likelihood that a reasonable investor would consider it important in deciding whether to buy, sell, or hold a security. Some believe that information may be considered material if, upon disclosure, it would likely affect the stock price. If there is any doubt whether undisclosed information is material, legal guidance should be sought or, as a practical alternative, the information should be treated as material.

Violation of any of these insider trading laws triggers strict sanctions. The violator is liable for any profit made or loss avoided. In addition, a court can assess a penalty against the trader, the tipper, or the tippee of treble damages—that is, three times the profits made or losses avoided. Criminal sanctions are also possible. The SEC has an aggressive program of discovering and proceeding against insider trading violations. It can award informants who report a violation a percentage of the amount of the penalty recovered. The SEC also can prohibit any individual from serving as an officer or director of any public company if the individual has violated the antifraud or insider trading laws and demonstrates unfitness to serve as an officer or director. In addition to potential violations of federal law, the misuse of confidential corporate information can result in violations of directors’ duties under state law, leading to civil lawsuits brought by shareholders.

Many public companies have procedures requiring senior executives and directors to contact corporate counsel, the corporate secretary, or another designated person before trading in the corporation’s securities so that any proposed transaction can be reviewed in the light of the current state of public information. Many public companies have policies prohibiting insiders and their affiliates from trading in the corporation’s securities during specified “blackout” periods. The board of directors (directly or through its audit or legal compliance committee) should periodically review corporate information disclosure and insider trading policies and procedures in view of Regulation FD (discussed above) and insider trading prohibitions.

F. REPORTING SHARE OWNERSHIP AND TRANSACTIONS; SHORT-SWING PROFITS

Directors, executive officers, and large shareholders of public companies must report to the SEC all their holdings of and transactions in the corporation’s equity securities and must disgorge to the corporation any profits realized from buying and selling (or selling and buying) such securities within any six-month period. Any person who becomes an insider (e.g., a director, executive officer, or more than 10 percent shareholder) is required to file a report of beneficial ownership and must do so whenever there is a change in beneficial ownership. These reports must be filed on a timely basis. All delinquent filings must be disclosed in the corporation’s annual meeting proxy statement (with the delinquent individuals identified by name), and they can trigger monetary fines. An insider is generally deemed to be the owner of securities that are owned by a spouse or child living with the insider, and may also be deemed to be the owner of securities held in a trust of which the insider is a trustee, settlor, or beneficiary, or of securities owned by a corporation or other entity controlled by the insider.

Profit disgorgement is required if an insider purchases and sells the corporation’s securities within a six-month period and vice versa (i.e., sells within six months before buying). Any “profit”—measured as the difference between the prices of any two “matchable” transactions during the six-month period (i.e., the highest priced sale and the lowest priced purchase)—must be paid to the corporation. The requirement is intentionally arbitrary and, subject to tightly defined regulatory exemptions, applies to all transactions within any six-month period regardless of whether the insider had inside information or, in fact, made a profit on an overall basis. This provision is aggressively enforced by a plaintiffs’ bar that monitors SEC filings.

Some transactions, such as the grant and exercise of stock options and the acquisition of securities under employee benefit plans, may be exempt from the purchase and sale triggers of the short-swing profit rules if procedural requirements established by SEC rules have been satisfied. Absent an exemption, the receipt of an option, the acquisition of securities through a benefit plan, or the acquisition of a derivative security related to the value of the corporation’s common stock normally will be considered to be a purchase of the underlying security and could be matchable against a sale. Unexpected liability may result from the application of the short-swing profit rules. For example, other indirect changes in ownership, such as reclassifications, intra-company transactions, pledges, and mergers, may be considered a purchase or sale transaction for purposes of the short-swing profit rules.

A retiring director may be subject to profit recovery based on transactions occurring during the six months after the director departs. If a director purchases shares of the corporation, resigns, and sells shares within six months after the purchase, liability may be imposed for any short-swing profit even though the individual is no longer a director at the time of the sale.

Directors, officers, and more than 10 percent shareholders also are prohibited from selling the corporation’s shares short; as a means to enforce this restriction, they are required to deliver shares against a sale within twenty days.

This regulatory regime is highly technical. Legal counsel should be consulted before committing to a transaction in the corporation’s securities or in options or other derivatives geared to its securities.

G. SALES BY CONTROLLING PERSONS

Unless an exemption is available, the federal securities laws generally require registration with the SEC of the corporation’s securities before those securities can be offered or sold to the public by “controlling persons.” (Determining who is a controlling person is a complex question of law and fact for which legal guidance is advisable; directors are often considered to be “controlling persons.”) The most common exemption is provided by the SEC’s Rule 144, which permits the sale of limited amounts of securities without registration if certain conditions are satisfied. Securities acquired by a controlling person in the open market or in a registered offering are subject to the conditions in this rule, which include special filing and disclosure requirements, if they are to be sold to the public.

H. COMPLIANCE PROGRAMS

Many public companies have established specific policies and procedures dealing with public communications, share ownership reporting, and insider trading. These programs are designed to ensure that the corporation makes complete, accurate, and timely disclosure of material information, complies with the registration requirements, and satisfies other securities law obligations. These programs also help directors and other insiders to comply with insider trading and other applicable laws and the corporation to meet its obligations under Regulation FD to avoid improper selective disclosure of material information. The audit committee (or the legal compliance committee, if there is one) generally should monitor the establishment and operation of such compliance programs.

I.  DIRECTORS OF FOREIGN CORPORATIONS WITH SECURITIES TRADED IN THE UNITED STATES

A large number of non-U.S. corporations file reports with the SEC because their securities are traded on U.S. securities markets or they have a large number of U.S. holders. Traditionally, the federal securities laws have required these “foreign private issuers” to file annual reports and other material information distributed to their shareholders with the SEC but have not otherwise sought to regulate their corporate governance and other internal practices.

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act’s reporting and corporate governance requirements generally apply to non-U.S. corporations that have securities registered with the SEC. The SEC, in adopting rules under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, has considered the concerns of foreign private issuers and made some rules inapplicable to them or included special provisions addressing their concerns. Directors of foreign private issuers should be aware of the general categories of substantive corporate governance requirements that may apply to their corporations.

SECTION 12: LIABILITIES, INDEMNIFICATION, AND INSURANCE

Directors may incur personal liability for breaches of their duty of care or their duty of loyalty or for failure to satisfy other legal or regulatory requirements, such as the federal securities laws. Corporations may provide for certain limitations on these liabilities, and may also provide directors (and officers) with indemnification rights and insurance. Such provisions allow directors to focus on the creation of value without undue personal risk. Directors should review periodically a corporation’s indemnification and insurance as applicable to both directors and officers, in order to ensure that proper consideration has been given to those important issues.

A. SOURCES OF LIABILITY

1. Corporate Law Liability

Corporate law generally provides that directors are fiduciaries and therefore have both a duty of care and a duty of loyalty. Directors may in theory be liable for violating either of those duties, but nearly every public, and most private, corporations formed in U.S. jurisdictions have, through their charters, precluded monetary liability for directors who breach only the duty of care. Directors should consider whether corporations on whose boards they serve have eliminated such liability.

Directors in most jurisdictions may, however, have monetary liability for breaching the duty of loyalty. Directors can incur liability where they have a conflicting personal interest or are dominated or controlled by a person or entity with such a conflict. Directors should be alert to such conflicts, particularly in corporations with controlling shareholders and in change-in-control transactions where courts are especially sensitive to the duty of loyalty. There are a number of techniques to address these concerns, including disclosure of potential conflicts, recusal of conflicted directors, use of independent committees, and shareholder votes. In addition to liability involving a conflict of interest, directors may also incur liability for breach of the duty of loyalty where their inattention to their duties rises to a level constituting “bad faith” or “conscious disregard for their duties.” Good recordkeeping of board procedure and deliberations is important to protecting directors from liability when, in retrospect, business decisions with poor outcomes are alleged to have resulted from conflicts or inattention.

In addition to liability for breach of duties, directors can also be personally liable for authorizing dividends or other distributions, such as stock repurchases, when a corporation is insolvent. This is an area requiring particular caution, because directors may be liable for simple negligence, a lower standard than that typically applicable to liability for breaching fiduciary duties. Accordingly, wherever there is any question as to a corporation’s solvency, directors should obtain appropriate advice before making distributions to shareholders.

2. Federal Securities Law Liability

As discussed above, directors can be personally liable under the federal securities laws—in some cases even when they act in good faith. In certain circumstances, negligence, by itself, is sufficient to establish liability. In other situations, liability may be imposed, subject only to due diligence or other defenses, without a finding of fault or intent to deceive.

3. Liability Under Other Laws

Directors also can be subject to personal liability under other state and federal statutes, such as environmental laws. Good faith and careful monitoring of management programs directed toward corporate legal compliance (including through periodic briefings on how well the programs are functioning and changes in them) should provide substantial safeguards against any such personal liability.

B. PROTECTIONS

Several mechanisms help protect directors from personal liability: charter provisions limiting liability, rights to indemnification, advancement of related expenses, and insurance.

1. Limitation of Liability

Most state corporation statutes permit a corporation’s charter to include a provision eliminating or limiting the liability of directors to the corporation and its shareholders for monetary damages for breaches of certain duties. The provisions will most frequently eliminate exposure to claims requesting monetary damages for breaches of the duty of care. They do not, however, cover claims for injunctive relief or liabilities to third parties, and they may not be effective to protect a director from liabilities resulting from federal law violations. Generally, these provisions do not protect directors from monetary liability for illegal dividends or stock repurchases, for bad faith actions, for breach of the duty of loyalty, for intentional violations of law or actions where the director received an improper benefit.

2. Indemnification

Most state corporation statutes specify the circumstances in which the corporation is permitted to indemnify directors against liability and to pay related reasonable expenses incurred in defending claims arising in connection with their service as directors.

In general, directors must meet a certain standard of conduct before being indemnified. The standard for permissible indemnification in many state statutes is that the individual director must have acted in good faith and with a reasonable belief that the director’s conduct was in (or not opposed to) the best interests of the corporation. In the case of criminal proceedings, the director must also have had no reasonable cause to believe the conduct was unlawful. Such statutes give corporations the power to indemnify directors in actions by third parties, including class actions, for expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines, and amounts paid in settlement of the actions. In some instances, however, indemnification is not permitted, regardless of the director’s standard of conduct. For example, many jurisdictions prohibit indemnification for actual liability in derivative actions.

3. Advancement

In addition to permitting indemnification, state corporation statutes authorize corporations to advance legal fees. For the most part, the limitations on actual indemnification do not apply to advances of legal expenses. Instead, corporate statutes generally permit a corporation to pay a director’s legal expenses during the pendency of almost any lawsuit. A director benefiting from such an advance, however, must promise to repay the advance if it is ultimately determined that the director is not entitled to indemnification. The cost of defending a claim can be substantial, making advancement of expenses important.

4. Mandatory Indemnification and Advancement

State law generally provides corporations with broad discretion to make indemnification and advancement payments, but it provides directors with only limited rights to receive those payments on a mandatory basis. For example, many state statutes provide that indemnification for legal expenses is mandatory when the director has been successful in defending a suit. In order to induce directors to serve, most corporations provide for mandatory indemnification and advancement under certain additional circumstances through provisions in their charters or bylaws or through separate agreements with directors. In many instances, these provisions provide that directors are to be indemnified and advanced expenses to the fullest extent permitted by law. In other cases, the indemnification rights are more limited. Directors should understand the extent of their mandatory rights and any limits on those rights.

5. Insurance

Most corporations purchase directors’ and officers’ liability insurance covering (i) the corporation for any payment of indemnification and advances for expenses and (ii) directors and officers, if the corporation is unwilling to pay indemnification or advancement obligations (perhaps because of a change in control) or is unable to pay such obligations (perhaps because of insolvency or because the claim is one where indemnification or advancement is not permitted). The relevant statutes of most jurisdictions permit the corporation to pay premiums for this insurance. Because of uncertainty regarding the ability of directors and officers to access policies that also cover the corporation, corporations should consider policies that cover only non-management directors. Such policies often include terms more favorable to the insured than policies that cover both the corporation and its directors.

Certain areas of activity such as environmental, employee benefit, or antitrust matters are often excluded from coverage under a typical directors’ and officers’ policy. Coverage may also exclude conditions in existence at the time of the application for insurance. Directors’ and officers’ insurance generally does not cover fraud, criminal penalties, and fines and sometimes excludes punitive damages.

Insurance coverage is not available in every case. Most policies are written on a “claims made” (as compared to an “occurrence”) basis, covering only defined claims lodged against directors during a specified period. In addition, the terms of coverage under differing policies are very complex and can vary greatly from insurer to insurer. Moreover, insurance markets change rapidly, and insurers may assert numerous reservations or defenses when claims are made. Therefore, directors are well advised to engage experts, who can also provide knowledgeable insight respecting current market conditions.

In short, it is important for directors to understand the types of directors’ and officers’ insurance a company has, in addition to the amount of coverage. Directors should ascertain the level of expertise of the person within the corporation responsible for negotiating the coverage or, in the alternative, determine whether an outside expert, familiar with current market conditions and policy and claim issues, is assisting in the process. Directors should also take care (as is true in the case of any insurance policy) in completing policy applications and questionnaires and inquire about the insurance provider’s reputation for handling insurance claims and its financial strength. This consideration can be more important than premium pricing. Disputes with the insurance carrier as to whether coverage is available when litigation materializes are an unwanted distraction. Directors’ and officers’ insurance is a complex area, and directors should seek assurance that the corporation’s coverage does in fact afford the best protection obtainable in the current marketplace.

APPENDIX

ONLINE CORPORATE GOVERNANCE RESOURCES

Websites and Blogs

Boardroom INSIDER

http://www.boardroominsider.com

Compensation Standards

http://www.compensationstandards.com

The Conference Board Governance Center Blog

http://tcbblogs.org/governance/

Corporate Board Member

http://www.boardmember.com

TheCorporateCounsel.net

(includes Broc & Dave’s blog and the Proxy Season blog)

http://www.thecorporatecounsel.net

Corporate Governance

http://www.corpgov.net

The Corporate Library

http://thecorporatelibrary.com

The D & O Diary

http://www.dandodiary.com

DealLawyers.com

http://www.deallawyers.com

Delaware Corporate and Commercial Litigation Blog

http://www.delawarelitigation.com

Deloitte & Touche LLP’s Center for Corporate Governance

http://www.corpgov.deloitte.com/site/us/

Directorship

http://www.directorship.com

Financial Accounting Standards Board

http://www.fasb.org

Financial Executives International

http://www.financialexecutives.org

Financial Industry Regulatory Authority

http://www.finra.org

Footnoted

http://www.footnoted.com/

The Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance and Financial Regulation

http://blogs.law.harvard.edu/corpgov/

NASDAQ Stock Market, Inc.

http://www.nasdaq.com

New York Stock Exchange (including NYSE-Sponsored Commission on Corporate Governance Report, dated September 23, 2010)

http://www.nyse.com

Public Company Accounting Oversight Board

http://www.pcaobus.org

Race to the Bottom

http://www.theracetothebottom.org/

RiskMetrics Group/Institutional Shareholder Services

(includes governance exchange available to directors, the Risk and Governance Blog and Risk and Governance Weekly)

http://www.riskmetrics.com

Romeo & Dye’s Section16.net

http://www.section16.net

SEC Actions

http://www.secactions.com

Securities Information

http://www.secinfo.com

Securities Lawyer’s Deskbook

http://www.law.uc.edu/CCL/xyz/sldtoc.html

Securities Law Prof Blog

http://lawprofessors.typepad.com/securities/

Securities Mosaic Blogwatch

http://www.knowledgemosaic.com/sm/frames/FrameOpen.asp?ContentASP=/websitelinks/blogwatch.asp

The 10b-5 Daily

http://www.the10b-5daily.com

U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission

http://www.sec.gov

Academic and Research Centers and Institutes

Arthur and Toni Rembe Rock Center for Corporate Governance, Stanford Law School

The center creates a cross–disciplinary environment where economists, lawyers, financial experts, political scientists, engineers, and practitioners can meet and work together to advance the practice and study of corporate governance.

http://www.law.stanford.edu/program/centers/rcfcg/

Carol and Lawrence Zicklin Center for Business Ethics Research, The Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania

A center for business ethics teaching and research at The Wharton School. The center’s website lists its publications, upcoming conferences, and links to online business ethics, corporate governance, and compliance resources.

http://www.zicklincenter.net/index.html

Center for Leadership and Change Management, The Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania

The center conducts research and determines practical application in the area of leadership and change, fosters an understanding of how to develop organizational leadership, and supports global leadership initiatives. Its website has links to corporate governance publications and online resources.

http://leadership.wharton.upenn.edu/governance/index.shtml

Corporate Law Center, University of Cincinnati College of Law

The University of Cincinnati College of Law’s center focuses on issues of importance to corporate lawyers and administers the Securities Lawyer’s Deskbook. The center also conducts an annual corporate law symposium.

http://www.law.uc.edu/institutes-centers/corporate-law-center

Corporate Governance Institute, San Diego State University

Hosted at San Diego State University, the institute focuses on identifying “responsible practices” in all aspects of corporate governance.

http://www-rohan.sdsu.edu/dept/corpgov/

Ethics Resource Center

The center is a nonprofit research organization dedicated to advancing high ethical standards and practices in public and private institutions. It provides many services to businesses including assistance in establishing an effective ethics and compliance program.

http://www.ethics.org/

Institute for Business and Professional Ethics, DePaul University

An institute at DePaul University that promotes ethical decision-making in business. The institute’s website provides information on upcoming events and links to other resources on the web.

http://commerce.depaul.edu/ethics/

Kennesaw State University Corporate Governance Center

The website of the center contains an extensive list of periodicals and websites related to corporate governance, and the center provides various board advisory services.

http://coles.kennesaw.edu/centers/corporate-governance/

John L. Weinberg Center for Corporate Governance, University of Delaware

The center proposes progressive changes in corporate structure and management through education and interaction. It conducts conferences, workshops, research, publication, and other activities to create a forum for business leaders, members of corporate boards, the legal community, academics, practitioners, and students interested in corporate governance issues.

http://www.lerner.udel.edu/centers/ccg

Lindenauer Center for Corporate Governance, Amos Tuck School of Business Administration at Dartmouth

The center’s activities focus on the study of how governance should adapt to increasing global competition.

http://mba.tuck.dartmouth.edu/ccg/

Millstein Center for Corporate Governance and Performance, Yale University

This center at the Yale School of Management provides active support for research in corporate governance and disseminates its work to the world’s academic, policy-making, and professional communities.

http://millstein.som.yale.edu/

National Center for Employee Ownership

A nonprofit membership and research organization that provides information on employee stock ownership plans and equity compensation plans.

http://www.nceo.org/

The Pension Research Council of the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania

The Pension Research Council is an organization devoted to generating and enhancing the debate on policy issues affecting pensions and other employee benefits.

http://www.pensionresearchcouncil.org/

ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS

American Bar Association, Section of Business Law

A membership section of the American Bar Association furthering the development and improvement of business law, educating members in business law and related professional responsibilities, and helping members to serve their clients competently, efficiently, and professionally. The Section of Business Law includes the following:

Committee on Corporate Governance

Corporate Laws Committee

Committee on Federal Regulation of Securities

Presidential Task Force on Corporate Responsibility

http://www.abanet.org/buslaw/home.shtml

American Management Association

A non-profit, membership organization established to assist individuals and organizations in improving organizational effectiveness.

http://www.amanet.org/

Association of Corporate Counsel

A membership organization of in-house counsel whose members represent attorneys employed by more than 10,000 legal departments of corporations, associations, and other private-sector organizations in seventy countries.

http://www.acc.com/

BoardSource

A nonprofit organization devoted to assisting the board members and executive staff of nonprofit corporations in the performance of their duties.

http://www.boardsource.org/

Business Roundtable

An organization of more than 150 CEOs of America’s largest companies that calls for a focus on “substance over form,” rejecting a call by some institutional investors for such fixed policies as mandatory retirement ages for directors, outside directors that are completely independent of management, and separation of the roles of CEO and board chair.

http://businessroundtable.org/

CFA Institute

An international association of investment professionals dedicated to increasing knowledge and professionalism in the field.

https://www.cfainstitute.org

The Conference Board

A business membership and research organization whose membership includes over 2,900 companies in 65 countries. The Conference Board conducts a wide range of conferences and produces a variety of publications. The organization has a governance center, the website of which includes a blog providing timely analysis of corporate governance issues and resources for boards.

http://www.conference-board.org/

Ethics & Compliance Officer Association

An association for individuals responsible for corporate ethics, compliance, and business conduct programs.

http://www.theecoa.org

National Association of Corporate Directors

A membership organization for board members and advisors. The NACD publishes a variety of reports on corporate governance, as well as a monthly newsletter.

http://www.nacdonline.org/

National Association of Public Pension Attorneys

A provider of educational opportunities and informational resources for attorneys representing public pension funds.

http://www.nappa.org/

National Association of Stock Plan Professionals

An association with 6,000 members whose purposes is to meet the needs of stock plan professionals whose responsibilities relate to stock plan design and administration, including compensation and human resources professionals, stock plan administrators, securities and tax attorneys, accountants, compensation consultants, corporate secretaries, transfer agents, stock brokers, and software vendors.

http://www.naspp.com

National Investor Relations Institute

An association of over 4,000 corporate officers and investor relations consultants from 2,000 public companies. The institute produces a monthly newsletter and quarterly magazine, as well as conducts a variety of seminars and conferences every year.

http://www.niri.org/

Society of Corporate Secretaries and Governance Professionals

An association of corporate secretaries whose membership represents over 2,500 private, public, and not-for-profit corporations in the United States.

http://www.governanceprofessionals.org/

SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

Business for Social Responsibility

A membership organization designed “to develop sustainable business strategies and solutions” in the areas of the environment, human rights, economic development, and governance and accountability.

http://www.bsr.org/

Caux Round Table

An international group of business leaders that promotes moral capitalism using sustainable and socially responsible business practices. The CRT’s Principles of Business is available online in twelve different languages.

http://www.cauxroundtable.org/

Dow Jones Sustainability Indexes

Six indexes that track the financial performance of the leading sustainabilitydriven companies, with the global index covering the top 10 percent of the biggest 2,500 companies in the world.

http://www.sustainability-index.com/

Interfaith Center for Corporate Responsibility

The center has 275 faith-based institutional investor members, including national denominations, religious communities, pension funds, foundations, hospital corporations, asset management companies, colleges, and unions, and seeks to integrate social values into corporate and investor actions. The website lists and has links to shareholder proposals submitted for annual meetings.

http://www.iccr.org/

SocialFunds.com

News, information, research, investment analysis, and financial services for socially responsible investors.

http://www.socialfunds.com/

Social Investment Forum

The Social Investment Forum is a membership organization for professionals, firms, institutions, and organizations that advances socially responsible and sustainable investing.

http://www.socialinvest.org/

INSTITUTIONAL INVESTORS

AFL-CIO

A voluntary federation of fifty-six national and international labor unions, with over 11.5 million members.

http://www.aflcio.org

American Federation of State, County and Municipal Employees

Union with 1.6 million members in various public service jobs.

http://www.afscme.org/

Ipreo: Bigdough.com

Bigdough.com contains a searchable database of global institutional money managers and their stock holdings.

http://www.bigdough.com/

California Public Employees’ Retirement System (CalPERS)

The California Public Employees’ Retirement System is the nation’s largest public pension fund. The website includes links to the websites of approximately forty other public pension systems.

http://www.calpers.ca.gov/

Council of Institutional Investors

This is a nonprofit association organization of over 140 large public, union, and corporate pension funds. The council advises its institutional shareholder members about corporate governance, shareowner rights, and other investment issues to help them protect pension plan assets and seeks to be a prominent voice for institutional shareholder interests.

http://www.cii.org/

Investment Company Institute

The Investment Company Institute is a national association of investment companies, and its membership includes over 7,000 mutual funds. The institute encourages adherence to high ethical standards; advances the interests of funds, their shareholders, directors, and investment advisors; and promotes public understanding of mutual funds and other investment companies.

http://www.ici.org/

Teachers Insurance and Annuity Association—College Retirement Equities Fund (TIAA-CREF)

TIAA-CREF is the nation’s largest retirement system, with over 2 million members from academic, medical, cultural, and research institutions. It provides its members with financial products and services and monitors corporate governance policies to protect its members’ retirement assets.

https://www.tiaa-cref.org

United Brotherhood of Carpenters

America’s largest building-trades union, with more than a half-million members in the construction and wood-products industries.

http://www.carpenters.org

RETAIL INVESTORS AND INVESTOR SUFFRAGE MOVEMENT

Investor Suffrage Movement

http://www.isuffrage.org

Moxy Vote

http://www.moxyvote.com

ProxyDemocracy

http://www.proxydemocracy.org

Shareholder Communications Coalition

http://www.shareholdercoalition.com/

ShareOwners.org

http://www.shareowners.org

Transparent Democracy

http://transparentdemocracy.org

VoterMedia Finance Blog

http://votermedia.wordpress.com/

INTERNATIONAL RESOURCES

Asian Corporate Governance Association

The association is an independent, non-profit membership organization dedicated to working with investors, companies, and regulators to implement effective corporate governance practices throughout Asia.

http://www.acga-asia.org/

Berlin Center of Corporate Governance

The center is an empirical research center that performs systematic surveys of the corporate governance practices of German companies.

http://www.bccg.tu-berlin.de/

British Accounting Association: Special Interest Group on Corporate Governance, Cardiff Business School

The group’s purpose is to serve as a forum for research and dialogue on corporate governance issues and to bring together academics and professionals to discuss their research and the latest developments in international corporate governance.

http://www.cardiff.ac.uk/carbs/research/groups/cgsig.html

Canadian Coalition for Good Governance

The Coalition was formed to promote good governance practices in companies owned by its members. Generally, these companies are members of the S&P/TSX Composite Index. The Coalition’s members are institutional investors: pension funds, mutual funds, and third party money managers (currently forty-one members managing over $1.4 trillion in assets).

http://www.ccgg.ca/

Canadian Corporate Governance Institute

The institute researches all aspects of Canadian corporate governance to help Canadians become informed about the laws, regulations, economic issues, and policy debates surrounding corporate governance. It studies governance of listed corporations, family firms, public sector enterprises, and not-for-profit organizations.

http://www.business.ualberta.ca/Centres/CCGI.aspx

Centre for Corporate Governance Research, Birmingham Business School

The centre researches the relationship among directors, investors, and other stakeholders, voting trends, and other corporate governance developments in the United Kingdom and internationally.

http://www.business.bham.ac.uk/research/accounting/ccgr/

Corporate Governance Japan

The site is an on-line forum that promotes broader understanding and lively debate about the ongoing process of change within Japanese corporations.

http://www.rieti.go.jp/cgj/en/index.htm

Clarkson Centre for Business Ethics & Board Effectiveness

The CCBE is located at the Rotman School of Management at the University of Toronto. It monitors Canadian corporate governance trends and provides guidance to firms looking to improve their board effectiveness and disclosure.

http://www.rotman.utoronto.ca/ccbe/

European Commission: Modernization of Company Law and Enhancement of Corporate Governance

The communication explains why the European regulatory framework for company law and corporate governance needs to be modernized and proposes several initiatives to achieve this modernization.

http://ec.europa.eu/internal_market/company/modern/index_en.htm

European Corporate Governance Institute

The institute is an international scientific non-profit association that provides a forum for debate and dialogue between academics, legislators, and practitioners, focusing on major corporate governance issues and best practices. The institute’s website includes links to corporate governance laws and regulations for numerous countries.

http://www.ecgi.org/

Global Corporate Governance Forum

The forum is a joint project between World Bank and Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development and supports regional and local initiatives to improve corporate governance in middle- and low-income countries in the context of broader national or regional economic reform programs.

http://www.gcgf.org/

Hermes Pensions Management Limited

Hermes is a UK-based organization that provides asset and pension fund management services and advises on responsible investing. Its website discloses its pension fund voting history.

http://www.hermes.co.uk/

Hong Kong Institute of Chartered Secretaries

An organization to support and educate chartered secretaries in Hong Kong companies on corporate governance, compliance, and other legal developments related to chartered secretaries’ responsibilities.

http://www.hkics.org.hk/

Institute for International Corporate Governance and Accountability

The institute studies corporate governance systems and capital markets throughout the world and develops methods to devise and sustain responsible and accountable corporate behavior.

http://128.164.132.19/iicga/who.asp

Institute of Corporate Directors

The mission of this institute is to represent the interests of directors—to foster ex-cellence in directors to strengthen the governance and performance of Canadian corporations.

http://www.icd.ca/

Institute of Directors

An organization of about 45,000 directors in the United Kingdom that provides its members with information on local and international corporate governance members and best practices related to their duties and responsibilities as directors.

http://www.iod.com

Institute of Directors Southern Africa

The institute is committed to the development of directors, continuous board learning, and improving board effectiveness by providing members ongoing educational opportunities, technical advice, and leadership publications and updates featuring the latest developments in corporate governance, as well as unique net-working opportunities.

http://www.iodsa.co.za/

International Association for Business and Society

An association composed of academics and practitioners that researches relationships between business, government, and society. The association’s website contains information on upcoming conferences, links to its Business and Society journal, and copies of its newsletter.

http://iabs.net/

International Centre for Corporate Social Responsibility, Nottingham University Business School

This center conducts interdisciplinary and cross-border research on corporate social responsibility, governance, and accountability issues.

http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/business/ICCSR/

International Corporate Governance Network

The network is a global membership organization of around 450 leaders in corporate governance based in forty-five countries with a mission to raise standards of corporate governance worldwide.

http://www.icgn.org/

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development

The organization provides a setting where governments compare policy experiences, seek answers to common problems, identify good practice, and coordinate domestic and international policies. Thirty-three countries are members of the organization.

http://www.oecd.org/home/

Proxinvest

Proxinvest is an independent French proxy voting advisory company that provides services exclusively to investors, large and small, using methods that promote shareholder interests.

http://www.proxinvest.com

SHARE

SHARE is a Canadian proxy advisory firm focused on environmental, social, and governance issues. It makes research, including with respect to shareholder proposals, available on its website.

http://www.share.ca/

Social Investment Organization: The Canadian Association for Socially Responsible Investment

A nonprofit membership organization composed of financial institutions, investment firms, financial advisors, and other organizations and individuals interested in socially responsible investment in Canada.

http://www.socialinvestment.ca/

United Kingdom Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators

The institute is the international qualifying and membership body for the chartered secretary profession. Its members help shape the governance agenda and promote the best practices essential for organizational performance.

http://www.icsa.org.uk

United Kingdom Institute of Directors

The institute is a non-party political business organization with around 55,000 members, including directors from many sectors of the economy—from media to manufacturing, e-business to public sector—and CEOs of large corporations and entrepreneurial directors of start-up companies.

http://www.iod.com/Home/

VIP—Association of Institutional Shareholders

VIP is an international discussion and information platform regarding corporate governance and provides proxy services to institutional investors.

http://www.vip-cg.com/

 

Do’s and Don’ts When Using Independent Contractors

Business lawyers must be flexible and advise their clients on a plethora of legal issues. Clients expect them to not only provide accurate legal advice, but to also provide it in a practical and digestible form. Often, particularly given the fast pace of business today, business lawyers are in the unenviable position of being forced to give a kind of template for how a situation should be resolved.

This is understandable, because their clients must make many decisions. It is not always possible to stop the flow of business and to seek legal advice on every point. Yet actions the client may take can have enormous implications for overall liability, as well as particular employment law and tax implications both immediately and for many years into the future.

The decision whether to hire a worker as an employee or an independent contractor is a significant one with fingers in a large number of pies, with regulations from the IRS, the Department of Labor and employment statutes, and state unemployment insurance authorities. In fact, it is hard to think of a more consequential business decision. Yet paradoxically, the question whether to hire someone in one capacity or the other may garner little attention from business people.

Because of the potential for staggering tax and other liabilities such decisions can trigger, business lawyers must be vigilant. Far from being a one-time or immediate problem, the issue has significant legal implications down the road. When a business client hires workers in any capacity, they understandably focus on business objectives. Whether or not the arrangement works out well, clients tend not to revisit fundamental questions such as whether the workers should be independent contractors or employees.

Businesses can avoid major landmines if they consider these topics from time to time. Business lawyers can serve a key function in this regard. Business lawyers should encourage their clients do so when additional workers are brought on, when the tenure and nature of the relationship changes, when the tasks expected of the worker expand or contract, or when other terms and conditions of the work change. The worker’s role may morph into something quite different from what it was at the inception of the relationship. That can impact the status of the worker as an employee or independent contractor.

Here are the top 10 mistakes I see committed by companies in using workers the company may believe are safely independent contractors but who may actually turn out to be reclassified as employees.

1. Not Having a Written Contract

Failing to have any written agreement for independent contractors is a recipe for disaster. If you hire a plumber for a one-time toilet fix and pay out $200, I would not worry that he or she is an employee. Yet it is surprising how many businesses have regular and long-term workers-on their premises or off-paid month after month and year after year as independent contractors without a written contract.

As a business lawyer, if you become aware of such a situation, take steps to warn your client. Without a written contract, your client is virtually doomed to fail in any dispute over the status of the worker, no matter how strong the client’s independent-contractor facts may be.

The taxing, labor and employment, and insurance authorities expect a written contract that states that the worker is an independent contractor and will be paid as such with no tax withholding, no benefits, etc. See Illinois Tri-Seal Prods., Inc. v. United States, 353 F.2d 216, 218 (1965). Plainly, such a contract does not by itself mean the worker is really an independent contractor, but the lack of a written contract will make employee status much more likely.

Furthermore, your client may even have a dispute with the worker directly. If the worker later claims that he or she considered him or herself to be an employee, to what will your client point as a contrary indication?

2. Treating Similar Workers Differently

Many businesses have some employees and some independent contractors, and there is nothing improper in so doing. However, it is inappropriate to have to have one worker selling shoes on an independent-contractor basis and another similarly situated worker doing the same thing as an employee. The same can be said for having some employee messengers and some independent-contractor messengers (or sales people, computer programmers, or what have you).

The risk of treating similarly situated workers differently is that the workers you are trying to treat as independent contractors may be reclassified as employees. For example, in Institute for Resource Management Inc. v. United States, 22 Cl. Ct. 114 (1990), no safe harbor was available for employment tax treatment of any worker who was treated as an independent contractor if the business treated any worker holding a substantially similar position as an employee for employment tax purposes. In other words, you set yourself up for trouble by having the two differently classified workers for ready comparison by the IRS, state tax authorities, labor or employment agency, or other authority. They all look for this tell-tale sign.

Advising a client in this area requires that you help the client to make significant distinctions between the two types of workers. Some companies are able to have two groups of workers do essentially the same type of work-such as independent-contractor sales agents and employee sales agents. However, business lawyers need to be very careful in helping clients navigate these waters.

3. Providing Tools and Supplies

One of the hallmarks of independent contractors is that they are required to supply their own tools, equipment, and supplies. Rev. Rul. 71-524, 1971-2 C.B. 346 ruled that a trucker working for a trucking company that leased vehicles (and provided maintenance) was an employee. See also Rev. Rul. 87-41 1987-1 C.B. 296, point 14. As with just about everything else in the contractor versus employee characterization realm, this is not dispositive by itself. However, it is certainly something reviewed in making a thumbs-up or thumbs-down decision.

After all, independent contractors are classically independent business people or professionals. It makes sense that they would bring their own ladder, shovel, or paint brush. A company that purports to have independent contractors but that supplies a desk, chair, computer, software, and telephone-everything they need-may not be very convincing in a worker status dispute. As this example suggests, this problem may be most common with office work. Still, it can arise in virtually any setting. In this age of high technology, it is not easy to determine exactly what will be regarded as tools, supplies, and equipment. The safest bet may be to make sure you don’t provide anything. But that can be impractical. (For possible ways around this conundrum, see No. 5 “Paying By the Hour” below.) As a lawyer advising in this area, get as many facts from your client as you can, and try to be creative.

4. Reimbursing Expenses

Another red flag is the extent to which your client reimburses workers for their business expenses. See Rev. Rul. 55-144, 1955-1 C.B.483, where an individual had his business expenses recouped by his auto dealership employer and was deemed to be an employee. See also Rev. Rul. 87-41, 1987-1 C.B. 296, point 13. If workers work late, does your client pay for their dinner or a taxi? If they need special paper for the report they are producing, does your client provide it or reimburse them?

There is no bright line saying one can’t cover the expenses of an independent contractor, but doing so can suggest the worker is an employee. Classically, all such items are supposed to be factored into the price you are paying the independent contractor for a finished product. As a result, reimbursements and reimbursement policies are likely to be reviewed if your client becomes involved in a worker classification dispute.

Lawyers should point out these risks to clients. Your clients might think they are being magnanimous to cover such items. The reality is that the clients may be blurring the line between the employees and independent contractors.

5. Paying By the Hour

How a business pays someone is about a fundamental a work-variable as one can get. And it can be one of the most fundamental indicators of whether a worker is an employee or an independent contractor. See Rev. Rul. 87-41, 1987-1 C.B. 296, point 12. Classically, one pays a contractor for a job, like putting a pool in your backyard, repairing your computer system, or putting in a break room at your office. In contrast, one classically pays employees by the hour or by the week.

Yet it is surprising how many businesses don’t think about this issue, much less explore ways to package it. There is no rule saying that one cannot pay an independent contractor by the hour. After all, that is how most lawyers bill time to their numerous clients.

But when one has alternatives, paying by the hour can be unwise. Consider whether you can come up with a payment regimen that fairly covers all the elements going into the work and yet that is independent contractor-like in scope. Ideally, a project fee or success fee is more consistent with independent-contractor status than an hourly rate. Help your clients to be creative in considering compensation alternatives.

Furthermore, you may be able to help your client to address any tool, equipment, and supply issues, and even expense reimbursements, as part of the payment formula you devise. As the discussion of those topics noted (see No. 3 “Providing Tools and Supplies” and No. 4 “Reimbursing Expenses” above), you don’t want to provide items that are employee-indicators. Yet if an independent-contractor worker arrives at the job site with no hammer, understandably, you may want to provide one.

The answer may be to do so but to have the business charge back the worker for the item provided. The worker could have the charge subtracted from his invoice at the end of the week. As a lawyer, you may find that a little creative thinking with independent contractors will help your clients to remain in the same place economically but with a vastly better appearance, viz., the likelihood independent-contractor treatment will be upheld.

6. Failing to Have Consistent Forms and Documents

The fact that your client calls someone an independent contractor does not make it so. An “employee lounge” sign in an office does not mean only employees can go there. The fact that one pays a worker based on a time card and then issues a check and paystub does not make him or her an employee. But all these things add up.

Sometimes, after all, something is what you call it. So help your clients consider whether they should have an “employee file” for each employee and use a different name for independent contractors. Ask your clients to consider if independent contractors should turn in an “invoice,” not a time card. Ask your clients to consider whether independent-contractor discipline should be handled in exactly the same way as employee discipline. Usually, changes in terminology or substance can be made that may not impact your client’s business but that may help your client materially to bolster independent-contractor treatment.

7. Over-Supervising

With an independent contractor, one is paying for a product or result. With an employee, one is paying for him or her to do what is asked, whatever that might be. With employees, one controls not only the nature of the work, but the method, manner, and means by which they do it. In Alford v. United States, 116 F.3d 334 (8th Cir. 1997), for example, a church pastor was ruled at the district court level to be an employee, but the ruling was reversed by the Eighth Circuit based on the lack of institutional control the national and regional churches had over the operation of his church.

This control factor is the most over-arching point in this area. It is also the most over-arching way in which clients can end up in trouble with workers they believe are independent contractors but who might be ruled otherwise. How much does your client check in with workers, monitor what they are doing, or make suggestions? How frequently must the workers check in with your client and report how and what they are doing?

Urge your clients to be very careful with supervision and control. The mere fact that an independent contractor must provide a weekly progress report on how the installation of the new laundry room in your house is going does not mean the builder is an employee. But if the report involves constant tweaking and redirecting of the effort, it might be otherwise. See Rev. Rul. 70-309, 1970-1 C.B. 199; Rev. Rul. 68-248, 1968-1 C.B. 431; Rev. Rul. 87-41, 1987-1 C.B. 296.

Note that the important inquiry is not merely whether the business is exercising control over the method, manner, and means by which the worker is doing the job. It can even be fatal if your client has the legal right to do thi–even if the client fails to exercise it. Treasury Regulation Sections 31.3121(d)-1(c)(1) and 31.3401 make clear that the common law right-to-control standard is generally controlling in these matters. For that reason, urge your clients to be careful what their contracts and other documents say about reports, supervision, and the like.

8. Requiring Set Hours

One of the classic signs of employee status is a time clock or set office hours. In contrast, with independent contractors, one should normally pay for the result, not exactly when or how the worker does it. See Rev. Rul. 87-41, 1987-1 C.B. 296, points 7-8. That does not mean an employer cannot have some control over the hours an independent contractor works.

For example, the fact that you tell your building contractor not to work on your kitchen remodel past 7:00 p.m. does not make him or her an employee. Nevertheless, it is surprising how many businesses fail to consider which workers need to be on a set schedule and which workers do not. Lawyers can be good issue spotters, and should help the client to consider whether certain workers can be allowed to complete work on their own schedule as long as they meet applicable deadlines. Such flexibility can help to show that the workers involved are independent contractors. Conversely, it can be telling if your client dictates a 9 to 5 and fulltime schedule.

9. Prohibiting Competition

Many businesses using independent contractors require full-time work, prohibit competition, or both. Neither of these points alone is likely to be dispositive of an independent contractor versus employee characterization battle. They are merely factors in the determination. For example, an anesthesiologist who entered into contracts with hospitals guaranteeing to have anesthesia services available at any time (a marker of employee status) was deemed to be an independent contractor (see Rev. Rul. 57-380, 1957-2 C.B. 634, Rev. Rul. 87-41, 1987-1 C.B. 296, point 17).

For that reason, lawyers should urge business clients to consider whether the business needs such rules and why. Optimally, if your client is paying for a particular result-such as selling a minimum dollar volume of goods each month-the client should stick to that target. Point out to the client that it may be inappropriate to focus on how long the worker may take to do it or where else they may work during the same period. Those details are arguably irrelevant.

Since requiring full-time work and/or no competition will be viewed as more employee-like in nature, ask your clients to consider whether it is a good idea to dictate these terms. Always bear in mind the paradigm case: an independent contractor like a lawyer or plumber serving many clients or customers. If your clients are worried about the worker giving away the company’s business methods or intellectual property to a competitor, make those concerns explicit. Focus on prohibiting the worker from disclosing the company’s property. That may accomplish the client’s major goal and may be cosmetically much more pleasing.

10. Attempting the Impossible

As a lawyer, it is never easy to be the bearer of bad news. Yet failing to point out obviously flaws in the client’s operations or documents can be a mistake and can even result in malpractice liability. If your clients cannot possibly keep their influence and direction over workers to a minimum, cannot possibly let them come and go as they please, cannot allow them to work part-time and for other companies, and can’t abide the thought that they may make some of their own decisions, is it realistic for your clients to even try to treat them as independent contractors?

Probably not. In that situation, even if you urge your clients to apply some of the points noted here, the clients may be asking for trouble-either immediately or down the road-if they do not admit face facts.

That may mean simply treating the workers as employees. Sometimes cutting corners ends up costing the business considerably more money in the long run than if appropriate actions were taken in the first place. This occurs over and over with independent-contractor issues. Lawyers are uniquely qualified to offer such perspectives.

As an alternative to a wholesale reclassification, the business could apply this principle in stages, such as by focusing on particular types of workers or even time periods. Lawyers can help business clients engage in a kind of triage to help limit their exposure. Plainly, it is technically wrong to suggest that all short-term workers are independent contractors.

However, a business could try independent-contractor status for short-term workers and those it is trying to evaluate. If the business tries working with someone on an independent-contractor basis for three months as a kind of evaluation period, that might keep them out of company health plans, payroll processing and employment tax returns, and even worker’s compensation and unemployment insurance rolls.

If the worker settles in well, the company could bite the bullet and treat them as employees. If the worker fails, the company could assume that even if the person is later recharacterized as an employee, the company’s financial exposure should be fairly limited. For example, if your client “fires” such a worker after two months, will he qualify for unemployment benefits?

The object of this kind of approach is to limit the business client’s exposure. At least the big picture would be better because the company’s long-term workers would be employees. Even if the company ends up losing a worker-status dispute later, the employment tax or other liabilities for short-term workers should be fairly limited. In contrast, if the company is aggressive with widespread independent-contractor treatment and fails to take some of the steps I advocate here, the company could have staggering liabilities.

Conclusion

Business lawyers must often wear multiple hats, and this may particularly be true in such fundamental legal issues as worker status. Yet the role of the lawyer in helping clients through these circumstances should not be underestimated. Help your clients to evaluate what you are trying to do, what is realistic to expect, and whether your clients are being reasonable.

Moreover, urge your clients not to make this a static or one-time process. Like an annual medical checkup or annual visit with an estate planning lawyer over the terms of a will, companies and their counsel should periodically evaluate workers, their status, duties, and treatment. The more frequently companies do it the less likely it will be that they have major problems to address. As a lawyer, you should be suggesting these evaluations even if your clients are not volunteering. The optimum time for evaluations and for addressing these worker status issues is before there is a lawsuit, audit, or investigation. Don’t wait.

 

Negotiating the Loan Agreement: The Borrower’s Perspective, Part II

One hallmark of an expanding economy is increased lending to businesses. As more capital becomes available, borrowers need to know how best to negotiate the terms and conditions under which they acquire it.

In a Part One of this series (see page 39), this author proposed strategies a borrower might adopt when negotiating a commercial loan commitment. While reasonable minds will differ on what points should be raised at that early stage, a number of matters inevitably remain for negotiation in the loan agreement itself. This article will examine a typical asset-based loan agreement and outline practical steps the borrower’s counsel should take in order to insure that the closing proceeds smoothly and on time.

Satisfying Conditions Precedent

The loan agreement will list a number of items the borrower must deliver as a precondition to funding. Pay close attention to these items from the outset, particularly ones that will require performance by third parties. These parties might include:

Title companies. A lender taking real estate collateral will require an ALTA Standard Loan Policy insuring the validity and priority of its mortgage lien. Engage your title insurer at once and provide it with the list of the lender’s required endorsements. Unexpected difficulties often arise during title clearance and the careful borrower’s counsel will leave herself the maximum time to get it accomplished.

Surveyors. Most real estate lenders require a new survey. The surveyor must be hired and provided a list of the lender’s requirements as well as copies of existing title evidence. Engaging the surveyor quickly is particularly critical in “year-end” transactions where surveyors often have more fieldwork than they can timely perform.

Landlords. Some states afford landlords a statutory security interest in personal property of the tenant located on the leased premises in order to secure rental obligations. A lender advancing against inventory and equipment stored on such sites will frequently ask all (or major) lessors to waive or subordinate their landlords’ liens. The borrower should not assume that these negotiations will be painless (or even successful) and must forward the draft letters to the landlords quickly.

Try to obtain the lender’s agreement that you need not obtain letters from all lessors but only from some lesser percentage, such as 75 percent. Do not be surprised however, if the lender insists that acceptable waiver letters be delivered for all sites deemed crucial to the borrower’s business operations.

Auditors. When a loan closes sometime after the close of a company’s most recent fiscal year, lenders may ask for an audit of the “stub period” from the date of the last audited statements to an agreed-upon date prior to closing. If the lender cannot be dissuaded, the auditor must begin work at once.

Local Counsel. Local counsel must frequently be engaged in multistate transactions for any number of reasons. Negotiations over their opinions are often more protracted than anyone would wish, which is why the borrower should put the lender’s proposed form of legal opinion into local counsel’s hands as early as possible. Far too many transactions find the lender and local counsel still arguing over opinions on the day of closing.

Many provisions are common to loan agreements. The borrower’s ability to revise them will depend not only on its financial strength but also on market terms generally. Nonetheless, the borrower’s counsel should keep certain ideas in mind.

Loan Administration

Establish whether the borrower’s receipts must be paid directly into a lockbox controlled by the lender. If so, determine whether it can be a “soft” lockbox (where the borrower may withdraw funds from the account prior to an event of default without lender approval) or must be a “hard” lockbox (where withdrawals must be consented to, or pre-approved, throughout the life of the loan). In most cases, a soft lockbox is all that will be required although the lender will always be granted the right to debit the account for regular debt service.

Representations and Warranties

All loan agreements require the borrower to recite certain facts as true and to acknowledge that the lender is relying on the truth of those recitations. There are two schools of thought about representations and warranties. Many view the terms interchangeably.

But others distinguish between them based on whether knowledge is implied. In this view, a representation is the borrower’s statement that a fact is true but implies knowledge or at minimum an absence of knowledge that the statement is untrue. A warranty would be much broader: a statement that a fact is true without regard to the borrower’s knowledge. Warranties can also be extended to future events whereas representations cannot meaningfully be so extended. An automobile manufacturer, for example, does not know whether an engine will run properly six months from the date its car leaves the lot, but warrants nonetheless to take certain actions if that statement proves untrue.

No matter which view an attorney adopts, breaches of representations and warranties always have adverse consequences for borrowers, so wherever possible, statements of fact should be expressly limited as being “to the borrower’s knowledge.” Lenders will resist, arguing that the representation and warranty section is simply a risk-shifting device and that, should a given fact prove untrue, the borrower should suffer the consequences without the lender needing to prove the borrower knew the statement was untrue.

A borrower may still succeed in inserting a knowledge limitation on at least two fronts. While it must stand ready to remedy any environmental defect, the borrower should not be in default if an environmental condition arises that was unknown to it. If the Phase I report overlooked something, the borrower should not face acceleration so long as it is actively attempting to remedy the problem.

The borrower should also qualify its representation and warranty about compliance with laws. Most borrowers view themselves as law-abiding, and in popular parlance they are. But on deeper reflection most realize they cannot possibly warrant compliance with all building codes, zoning laws and ordinances, ERISA rules, labor standards, and more. No one can. It should seek to represent only that it neither knows of a violation nor has received a notice of such from a governmental entity.

If a borrower does succeed in obtaining a “best of knowledge” limitation, it must then define that term. What does it mean for a corporate entity to “know” something? Does it have knowledge if anyone in the organization knew it? If anyone should have known it? The borrower’s ideal provision looks something like this:

For purposes hereof, “the Borrower’s best knowledge” shall mean the actual knowledge of [X and Y] as of the date hereof, with no duty of inquiry, which duty has been disclaimed.

In the above clause, X and Y would be two individuals reasonably expected to know of the important facts that are the subject of the representation and warranty section.

Affirmative Covenants

All loan agreements require borrowers to perform a host of acts, such as maintaining its corporate existence, most of which should be unobjectionable. Three covenants in particular warrant close attention.

Maintaining Insurance

Consult an insurance broker or expert as early as possible. Lenders are known for far-reaching and expensive insurance requirements. Quite often the amounts inserted by the lender in the documents are boilerplate without regard to this particular business. The lender might be talked out of some coverage altogether or limit the terms of other requirements such as the length of time one must covered by business interruption insurance.

Even attorneys well-versed in insurance provisions lack the expertise to assess the reasonableness of the amounts of required coverage or permitted deductibles, particularly under liability policies. These determinations require knowledge of insurance market conditions as well as experience with the types, frequencies and amounts of exposures this particular borrower’s business is likely to face.

Financial Reporting Requirements

The loan agreement will invariably require quarterly unaudited income statements and balance sheets together with annual audited statements. There are at least two issues to discuss: (1) does the due date for interim statements afford the chief financial officer time enough to prepare them? and (2) what level of audit review will ultimately be required?

There are three levels of financial statement review. The least expensive, a compilation, consists of the accountant simply arranging the borrower’s financial information in the format of a financial statement. The accountant states only that the statements are in proper form and free of obviously material errors. No comfort is given that the statements were prepared in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Compilations are typically prepared only for the internal use of small companies and lenders virtually never accept them.

Far more common is a review. The accountant performs a certain amount of due diligence on financial information provided by the company, makes limited inquiry of the company, then applies procedures sufficient to form a reasonable basis for giving a limited assurance that no material changes are required for the statements to conform with GAAP. This may be acceptable to some lenders, particularly if the borrower is a small start-up of some sort.

The most expensive, and the one most lenders want, is the audit. The accountant performs all tests required to determine that the statements conform to GAAP. The accountant then issues an opinion that is either “clean” (unqualified), “qualified,” or “adverse.” Lenders will require a clean opinion–that the financial statements “present fairly the financial position” of the borrower. A qualified opinion might be issued if there were agreed upon limitations in the engagement or other uncertainties surrounding the audit. Adverse opinions state that the financial statements do not accord with GAAP and are always unacceptable to the lender.

Some loan agreements require the auditor to certify annually that it has reviewed the financial covenants in the loan document and that there are no defaults thereunder. If so, the borrower must determine at once whether its auditor gives such an opinion. Auditors routinely resist them because they often form the basis of actions against them by lenders.

Compliance with Laws

At most the borrower should agree that it will be in material compliance with laws or alternatively that it will comply with laws so long as the effect of noncompliance does not materially adversely affect the borrower.

Negative Covenants

Several of the more important negative covenants (such as due-on-sale and due-on-encumbrance clauses) were discussed in the previous article on loan commitments. Some additional issues that arise during loan agreement negotiations include:

Mergers and Consolidations

No lender will permit its borrower to be merged or consolidated out of existence, so the borrower’s goal is simply to narrow the scope of the clause by excluding: (a) mergers of subsidiaries into the borrower; (b) mergers of subsidiaries into one another, or (c) mergers where the borrower is the surviving entity. Exceptions (a) and (c) may be difficult to obtain because, although they will typically satisfy the lender’s concern about consistent management and control, they nevertheless expose the lender to the risk that the surviving entity could have a lower net worth than the pre-existing borrower (if the acquired company has a weak balance sheet). An approach acceptable to some lenders is to permit mergers or consolidations where the borrower is the surviving entity and its net worth does not decrease as a result of the merger or consolidation. A careful lender will also insist that certain designated individuals remain in day-to-day control of company decisions.

Dividends

Smaller borrowers frequently express surprise at dividend prohibitions but the lender’s view is always the same: debt gets paid before equity. The lender will take great interest in salaries being paid out by the company and can be expected to limit them. Nonetheless, certain carve-outs from the dividend proscription are generally available. These include exceptions for: (1) dividends paid solely in shares of common stock; (2) pre-existing contractual obligations to pay dividends on preferred stock; and (3) distributions to equity holders (of pass-through entities) in amounts sufficient to pay their allocated share of company income. Members of a limited liability company for example must pay income taxes on their aliquot share of company taxable income whether or not received. The members will want to receive dividends sufficient for them to meet those tax obligations. As a practical matter, the lender will be asked to assume that each distributee is in the highest marginal tax bracket for purposes of these computations, as will often be the case.

Materiality and Reasonableness

Borrowers often attempt to insert materiality limitations on covenants and representations (e.g., “The borrower will advise the lender of any material threatened litigation.”). The author’s view however is that time spent negotiating the many places where materiality limitations could be inserted is largely wasted. The common law requires materiality as a precondition to default in performance of any contract and a loan agreement is no exception. Nor do lenders look to seize upon immaterial defaults as a reason to accelerate. Lenders do not want to run the borrower’s business nor incur the expense of liquidation absent a compelling reason to do so. Lenders take action only when there is a significant problem, no matter what the documents say.

“Reasonableness” on the other hand is something worth fighting for, such as obtaining the lender’s agreement that its consent shall never be “unreasonably withheld, conditioned, or delayed.” A lender will be bound by implied or statutory covenants of good faith and fair dealing, but there is no overarching obligation to act “reasonably” in all contracts nor as to any particular decision. This concession can be difficult to obtain however, particularly in tight credit markets. It is never available in any section dealing with loan defaults.

Events of Default

No section is more apt to capture the borrower’s attention than the one detailing events of default. But most lenders will not countenance extensive discussion of this topic and will be quick to wonder aloud why the borrower is spending so much time on it if the borrower never intends to default. The most effective approach is to press for one or two simple things then let the rest go. These include:

Notice and Cure for Monetary Defaults

Borrowers routinely request a right to receive notice of, and then cure, a default before a lender accelerates the loan. The ideal borrower clause might read as follows:

Any failure of the borrower to pay principal or interest within five (5) days after notice of same from the Lender.

Lenders grant this concession far less frequently than in the past, arguing that the borrower knows full when payments are due and should be making them on time. The borrower should recognize that the lender has a legitimate interest in not being burdened with sending repeated default notices to chronically delinquent parties and try to address that concern. One way is by agreeing that the lender need send such notices no more than twice a year.

A different approach, little used but effective, is to insist that a notice of default should always precede the momentous step of acceleration, but to offer instead that the borrower pay escalating late payments each time the lender is forced to give such a notice. Increasing payments quickly attract the borrower’s attention and will deal with the lender’s worry about chronic delinquency. Parties can and do agree to “reset” the late payments if the borrower is in compliance for an agreed period of time.

Notice and Cure for Nonmonetary Defaults

The borrower has a more compelling request here. While the borrower should know its payment schedule, how is it to know if its lender believes the borrower is not maintaining proper insurance unless it receives notice from its lender? A borrower can often obtain up to a 30-day cure period for non-monetary defaults.

For defaults not capable of being cured within 30 days, borrowers will request a “continuing cure” right such as the following:

Provided however that if the nature of the default is such that it is not capable of being cured within 30 days, then so long as the borrower is actively and continuously attempting to cure such default, the borrower shall not be deemed in default for such breach.

Even if the lender accedes to this request, the borrower should be prepared to accept an outside cut-off date by which the breach must be cured no matter the circumstances. Ninety days is a great result; 60 should be acceptable.

Cross-default Provisions

Pay close attention to cross-default provisions. It may well be that the loan facility under negotiation is not the first or only loan the borrower has with this lender. While the borrower may well view the two loans on a stand-alone basis, the lender often sees it differently. Cross-default provisions should be resisted wherever possible but can prove difficult to fend off.

Material Adverse Change

Although Article 1-309 of the Uniform Commercial Code permits “general insecurity clauses” so long as the lender exercises them in good faith, the borrower should vigorously contest any such provision. The borrower argues that such a provision affords the lender far too much control and, further, that the standards for acceptable financial performance have already been spelled out in the financial covenants. Many lenders will delete this clause but, if unwilling, may be persuaded to move to objective tests rather than subjective ones (e.g., an X percent decline in net operating income for two consecutive quarters or a Y percent decrease in the net worth of the borrower as reflected on the audited financial statements).

Remedies

Beyond the suggestions outlined above, most experienced borrowers’ attorneys spend little time on the remedies section. By the time a lender has finally decided to accelerate the loan, it is difficult to argue there should be further contractual impediments to its exercise of remedies. Most lenders summarily dismiss such requests arguing that the borrower’s best course of action is to repay the loan as agreed.

In loans with substantial personal property as collateral, however, parties will often negotiate the standards for a “commercially reasonable sale”–as contemplated by section 9-603 of the UCC. Borrowers may seek to obtain as long as 21 days prior notice of an Article 9 disposition, but 10 days is a realistic expectancy.

In a syndicated (multi-lender) loan, it is important to resist provisions providing contractual rights of setoff. Generally the law permits setoff only if there is mutuality (i.e., the same two parties owe each other money) and both obligations are fully mature. But in a syndication with participations, only the lead lender is in contractual privity with the borrower. No participants have a right of setoff unless the borrower contractually grants them one. Borrowers often do not know the identity of all (or any) of the loan participants so should not risk discovering that an account has been set off because one if its depositary banks was an unknown participant. Contrast this situation with a “co-lending” agreement in which each of the co-lenders is in direct privity with the borrower. It will be futile to resist setoff rights here.

Conclusion

Even after the major deal points have been finalized in the loan commitment, the loan agreement itself remains to be negotiated. While large portions will always remain off limits, the borrower must still choose its battles wisely and attempt to pare down the most objectionable portions of the document.

Litigation Implications of the Dodd-Frank Financial Reform Act

Times are changing for consumer finance litigators.

Change is on the horizon for consumer finance litigators. On July 21, 2010, President Barack Obama signed into law the largest financial regulatory overhaul since the Great Depression, the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (Pub. L. No. 111-203, H.R. 4173, the Act). The Act’s stated purpose is to “promote the financial stability of the United States by improving accountability and transparency in the financial system, to end ‘too big to fail,’ to protect the American taxpayer by ending bailouts, [and] to protect consumers from abusive financial services practices.” While the majority of the Act’s provisions require new regulations that will, in time, dramatically change the litigation landscape, there are some provisions that will begin to influence consumer finance litigation immediately.

This article will discuss the major changes to the Truth in Lending Act (TILA) and the Real Estate Settlement and Procedures Act (RESPA), outline the newly created Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection, and conclude with several questions that will remain unanswered well after the Act’s effective date.

New Claims, New Defenses, and New Penalty Provisions

New Claims Available to Consumers

Title XIV of the Act significantly amends TILA as it relates to mortgage origination and residential mortgage loans. A “mortgage originator” is defined as any person “who, for direct or indirect compensation or gain,” takes a residential mortgage loan application, assists a consumer in obtaining or applying to obtain a residential mortgage loan, or offers or negotiates terms of a residential mortgage loan. (Sec. 1401(2)(A)) It also includes any person “who represents to the public” that he can or will provide the above services. (Sec. 1401(2)(B)). Under the amendments, mortgage originators are now subject to two claims by consumers: (1) violation of the duty of care and (2) violation of the prohibition on steering incentives.

The duty of care for mortgage originators is twofold: (1) originators must be qualified, registered, and licensed under the SAFE Act and state law and (2) loan documents must include the unique qualifier provided by the Nationwide Mortgage Licensing System Registry. (Sec. 1402) This duty is subject to additional regulation by the Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection and consumers have a claim if it is violated. (Sec. 1404)

Additionally, mortgage originators are subject to a prohibition on steering incentives. In the amended TILA, a mortgage originator cannot be paid compensation that varies based on the terms of the loan, other than the amount of the principal. (Sec. 1403) Moreover, no person other than the consumer may pay the mortgage originator an origination fee or charge unless it is a bona fide third-party charge not retained by the creditor, mortgage originator, or an affiliate of the creditor or mortgage originator. The only exception allows a nonconsumer to pay a fee if the consumer does not pay any compensation directly to the mortgage originator and the consumer does not make any upfront payment of discount points, origination points, or fees. Consumers have a cause of action for violation of this prohibition as well. (Sec. 1404) Moreover, the Board of Governors has authority to prescribe regulations to prohibit the steering of any consumer to a residential mortgage loan that the consumer lacks a reasonable ability to repay or that has predatory characteristics or effects (including equity stripping, excessive fees, or abusive terms). (Sec. 1403) The Board also may prescribe regulations prohibiting a mortgage originator from steering a consumer from a qualified mortgage to a nonqualified mortgage. These yet-to-be-promulgated regulations also create a right of action for the consumer and are subject to the same damages provision. (Sec. 1404 (creating a cause of action when a mortgage originator fails “to comply with any requirement imposed under this section and any regulation prescribed under this section“))

The damages available to consumers for a mortgage originator’s violation of the duty of care or violation of the prohibition on steering incentives include “the greater of actual damages or an amount equal to 3 times the total amount of direct and indirect compensation or gain accruing to the mortgage originator in connection with the residential mortgage loan involved in the violation, plus the costs to the consumer of the action, including a reasonable attorneys’ fee.” (Sec. 1404)

TILA also provides that no creditor may make a residential mortgage loan until it makes a “reasonable and good faith” determination that the consumer has a “reasonable ability to repay” the loan. (Sec. 1411) A creditor makes this determination by considering a variety of factors enumerated in the Act. This requirement is similar to the “ability to repay” factor in many states’ consumer protection laws governing unconscionable loan transactions. Thus, many litigators are already dealing with this issue on the state level. By including the “reasonable ability to repay” in TILA, the federal government is similarly prohibiting “unconscionable” conduct at the federal level.

Violation of the reasonable ability to repay subjects the creditor to consumer claims. The damages available to consumers include all damages under 15 U.S.C. § 1640(a), including

  1. any actual damage sustained by the person as a result of the failure;
  2. twice the amount of any finance charge in connection with the transaction or in an action relating to a credit transaction not under an open-end credit plan that is secured by real property or a dwelling, a penalty not less than $400 or greater than $4,000; and
  3. an amount equal to the sum of all finance charges and fees paid by the consumer unless the creditor demonstrates that the failure to comply is not material.

15 U.S.C. § 1640(a); Sec. 1416.

The Act provides creditors with one safe harbor—a rebuttable presumption that a consumer has a reasonable ability to repay all “qualified mortgages.” (Sec. 1412) Under the Act, “qualified mortgage” is defined according to the following criteria:

  • the periodic payments must not result in an increased principal balance, nor allow the consumer to defer repayment;
  • the terms must not result in a balloon payment (unless allowed by federal regulation);
  • income resources must be on file and verified;
  • for fixed-rate loans the payment schedule must fully amortize and include all taxes, insurance, and assessments;
  • for adjustable rate loans, the payment schedule must be based on the maximum rate permitted during the first five years;
  • it must comply with the Bureau’s regulations relating to ratios of total monthly debt to monthly income;
  • total points and fees cannot exceed 3 percent of the total loan amount; and
  • the term of the loan cannot extend beyond 30 years (except in high-cost areas).

However, the Board of Governors has the authority to “prescribe regulations that revise, add to, or subtract from the criteria that define a qualified mortgage” and to include balloon loans within the definition. (Sec. 1412)

New Defenses for Consumers in Foreclosure

Consumers also have two new defenses to foreclosure: (1) if the newly created prohibition on steering incentives is violated by a mortgage originator or (2) if a creditor violates the reasonable ability to repay requirement. This section will discuss the two new consumer defenses.

Essentially, consumers have a defense of setoff or recoupment against a creditor, assignee, or holder in a foreclosure action or collection action if the creditor violates the newly created “reasonable ability to repay” provision or the mortgage originator violates the prohibition on steering incentives. The amount of setoff or recoupment is “equal to the amount to which the consumer would be entitled under subsection (a) for damages for a valid claim brought in an original action against the creditor, plus the costs to the consumer of the action, including a reasonable attorney’s fee.” (Sec. 1413) As noted above, TILA’s civil liability provision provides that a consumer, in an original action, is entitled to actual damages, twice the amount of any finance charge or a penalty not less than $400 or greater than $4,000, and an amount equal to the sum of all finance charges and fees paid by the consumer. See 15 U.S.C. § 1640(a).

Therefore, the amount set off will include all of the damages above, plus reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs. Because consumers are provided an independent action for violation of these provisions, they also can counterclaim, if within the statute of limitations period, and recover any amount of damages above the setoff.

If the newly created three-year statute of limitations runs, the consumer is entitled to the amount of setoff or recoupment up to the date of the running of the limitations period. (Sec. 1413)

New Defenses for Creditors

Under the Act, creditors have two new, but narrowly drawn defenses to TILA violations. The first defense is one for fraud on the part of the consumer. Specifically, the civil liability provision in TILA provides a new subsection stating “no creditor or assignee shall be liable to an obligor under this section, if such obligor, or co-obligor has been convicted of obtaining by actual fraud such residential mortgage loan.” (Sec. 1417 (emphasis added)) This defense protects creditors or assignees from rescission or damages only if the consumer is convicted of fraud in obtaining the mortgage loan. This defense provides no protection for creditors or assignees unless the consumer is convicted of actual fraud. Thus, if a borrower misrepresents information on his application, the misrepresentation alone is insufficient to provide the creditor with this defense.

The second new defense available to creditors or assignees is a “cure” defense. In the case of a creditor or assignee failing to satisfy any requirement under 15 U.S.C. § 1639, a creditor or assignee is protected from liability if it establishes either:

  1. within 30 days of the loan closing and prior to the institution of any action, the consumer is notified of or discovers the violation, appropriate restitution is made, and at the choice of the consumer, the loan is changed to satisfy the requirements or the terms are changed so the loan is no longer high-cost.
  2. within 60 days of the creditor’s discovery or receipt of notification of an unintentional violation or bona fide error and prior to the institution of any action, the consumer is notified of the compliance failure, appropriate restitution is made, and at the choice of the consumer, the loan is changed to satisfy the requirements or the terms are changed so the loan is no longer high-cost.

Thus, any violation, either intentional or unintentional, will not subject a creditor or assignee to liability under TILA if, within 30 days of the loan closing and prior to the institution of an action by the consumer, the violation is corrected. If the violation is unintentional or the result of a bona fide error, the creditor or assignee has 60 days to make corrections before becoming subject to liability.

Just as the fraud defense provides only limited protection for creditors or assignees, the corrective measures defense provides protection only when the creditor or assignee corrects the violation prior to the consumer instituting suit.

New Penalty Provisions and Extension of Statute of Limitations

In addition to the significant amendments adding new claims for consumers and new defenses for creditors, the TILA amendments directly affect the civil penalty provisions. First, civil liability is increased to an amount not less than $200, nor greater than $2,000 for violations related to consumer leases. (Sec. 1416) Second, total recovery in class actions is now capped at the lesser of $1 million or 1 per centum of the net worth of the creditor. In addition to greater damages, consumers also are given additional time to bring TILA actions with a three year statute of limitations.

Other Noteworthy TILA Amendments

Under the TILA amendments, a servicer must credit a payment to a consumer’s loan account as of the date of receipt. (Sec. 1464) A servicer is excused from immediately crediting the payment when the delay in processing will not affect the consumer’s credit report nor result in a charge on the creditor’s account. Additionally, servicers and creditors must respond quickly to requests for payoff statements. When a consumer or an individual on behalf of the consumer requests a payoff statement, in writing, the servicer must send the statement within a reasonable time not to exceed seven business days from the date of receipt. Thus, under the newly amended TILA provisions, servicers must streamline processing of information to ensure compliance and avoid increased damages.

Also, TILA is amended to prohibit certain provisions in a mortgage loan or extension of credit, including mandatory arbitration provisions when the loan or extension of credit is secured by a principal dwelling and waivers of statutory causes of action. (Sec. 1414).

RESPA: Stiffer Penalties, Stricter Timelines, and Other Prohibitions

Servicers Are Subject to Stiffer Penalties and Stricter Timelines

In addition to the significant changes to TILA, the Act also makes several changes to RESPA. The amendments to RESPA provide for higher damages and stricter timelines for responding to qualified written requests (QWR). Specifically, borrowers in a class action are now entitled to actual damages and additional damages not to exceed $2,000, per member of the class, when there is a pattern of noncompliance. (Sec. 1463) However, total recovery is capped at the lesser of $1 million (up from $500,000) or 1 percent of the net worth of the servicer. Individuals also are entitled to additional damages not to exceed $2,000 (up from $1,000), if the borrower shows a pattern or practice of noncompliance.

Similar to the limited amount of time provided to servicers and creditors under the new TILA provisions, RESPA time limits for responding to a QWR are decreased significantly:

  1. Time for servicer to provide a written response acknowledging receipt decreased from 20 days to 5 days.
  2. Time for servicer to make appropriate corrections or conduct an investigation reduced from 60 days to 30 days.

(Sec. 1463) These reduced response times are land mines to expose servicers to increased litigation.

A new subsection allows a servicer to request a 15-day extension when the servicer notifies the borrower of the extension and the reason for the delayed response. Without additional resources, servicers may not be able to respond to each QWR within 5 days and perform a thorough investigation in 30 days.

New Rules for Force-Placed Insurance

Force-placed insurance will continue to be a hotly contested issue under the Act. RESPA is amended to prohibit servicers from force-placing insurance without a “reasonable basis”—an undefined term—to believe a borrower has failed to comply with property insurance requirements. (Sec. 1463) A servicer may not impose a charge for force-placed insurance unless the servicer has sent a written notice to the borrower, by first-class mail, stating there is no evidence of coverage and outlining the procedure for a borrower to demonstrate coverage. If the consumer fails to respond to the notice, a second notice is sent 30 days later. If the consumer does not respond to the second notice within 15 days, the servicer may then force-place insurance. The process does not end there.

The servicer must accept “any reasonable form of written confirmation from the borrower of existing insurance coverage”—again “reasonable” is not defined—and cancel force-placed insurance within 15 days of receipt. The premiums for any force-placed insurance must then be refunded to the borrower.

Other Prohibitions on Servicers

RESPA, 12 U.S.C. § 2605(k), now states that a servicer of a federally related mortgage loan is expressly prohibited from

  1. charging fees for responding to valid QWRs (as defined in regulations that the Bureau shall prescribe);
  2. failing to take timely action to respond to a borrower’s requests to correct errors relating to allocation of payments, final balances, or other standard servicer’s duties;
  3. failing to respond within 10 business days to a request from a borrower to provide the identity, address, and other relevant contact information about the owner or assignee of the loan; and
  4. failing to comply with any other obligation found by the Bureau, by regulation, to be appropriate to carry out the Act.

Any servicer who violates these new prohibitions is liable to the borrower “for each such failure” in the amount of actual damages to the borrower, any additional damages in an amount not to exceed $2,000, and fees and costs incurred in a successful action. 12 U.S.C. § 2605(f)(1) and (3). Accordingly, servicers should be careful not to participate in any of the newly prohibited actions described above.

Preemption: It’s a Whole New World

Congress also took away a significant defense for some financial institutions when it changed the standards for preemption in the National Bank Act. Specifically, the Act preempts state consumer financial laws in only three limited situations:

  1. to the extent the law has a “discriminatory effect” on national banks or federal thrifts in comparison with the effect on state banks;
  2. in accordance with the standard for preemption in Barnett Bank of Marion County, N.A. v. Nelson, Florida Insurance Commissioner, et al., 517 U.S. 25 (1996), the state consumer financial law “prevents or significantly interferes with the exercise by the national bank of its powers;” or
  3. express preemption by a provision of federal law other than the National Bank Act.

Any preemption determination under Barnett may be made by a court, by regulation, or by the comptroller of currency on a case-by-case basis. Again, this leaves significant issues regarding preemption up to regulations and subsequent litigation, meaning application of the doctrine of preemption may be hotly contested for years.

The Act eliminates state law preemption for all subsidiaries and affiliates of national banks. (Sec. 1044) Under the Act, subsidiaries and affiliates are now exposed to all state laws, including licensing and regulation, and are not provided any protection under Watters v. Wachovia Bank, N.A., 550 U.S. 1 (2007). Prior to the Act, subsidiaries and affiliates could claim preemption as a defense under the Watters opinion, which held that a state may not exercise general supervision or control over a subsidiary of a national bank. This decision is now effectively abolished. Without this valuable defense, national banks must decide whether to have their affiliates and subsidiaries immediately comply with state laws that vary across state lines or fold all affiliates into the parent corporation.

This change in existing law is accomplished by an amendment to the National Bank Act providing that neither the National Bank Act nor the Federal Reserve Act “preempt, annul, or affect the applicability of any State law to any subsidiary or affiliate of a national bank.” (Sec. 1044 (emphasis added)) And, in even more concrete terms, the Act provides that “a State consumer financial law shall apply to a subsidiary or affiliate of a national bank . . . to the same extent that the State consumer financial law applies to any person, corporation, or other entity subject to such State law.” (Sec. 1044 (emphasis added)) While the applicability of preemption for national banks is specifically limited to state consumer financial laws, subsidiaries and affiliates of national banks are now subject to all state laws.

Creation of the Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection

In addition to the amendments to TILA and RESPA and changes in the applicability of the doctrine of preemption, the Act undertakes a significant regulatory overhaul that may have some peripheral effects on litigation. In addition to traditional rulemaking and administrative powers, the newly created Bureau has extensive authority to ensure consumers are protected under the alphabet soup of existing federal consumer protection laws—EFTA, ECOA, FCRA, FDCPA, HMDA, RESPA, SAFE Act, TILA—while potentially creating new requirements through regulation. (See Sec. 1061)

The Bureau is an independent entity established in the Federal Reserve System with its main purpose being to “seek to implement and . . . enforce Federal consumer financial law consistently for the purpose of ensuring that all consumers have access to markets for consumer financial products and services and that markets for consumer financial products and services are fair, transparent, and competitive.” (Secs. 1011(a), 1021) In addition to overseeing new regulations related to established federal consumer financial laws, the Bureau has authority to declare an act or practice unfair or abusive for purposes of federal law. (Sec. 1031(c) and (d)) These practices are deemed “unlawful” under the Act and subject to the Bureau’s enforcement powers. (Sec. 1036)

If the Bureau determines that a covered person or service provider has engaged in unlawful activity, it may issue a cease and desist order or pursue a civil action, in a federal district court or a state court, for violations of the enumerated federal consumer financial laws. (Secs. 1053, 1054(f)) In either instance, remedies available to the Bureau are broad: rescission or reformation, refund of moneys or return of property, restitution, disgorgement, damages, public notification of violation, and civil monetary penalties.

For civil penalties, the Act creates a “Consumer Financial Civil Penalty Fund” to be maintained and established at a federal reserve bank. If the Bureau receives any “civil penalty against any person in any judicial or administrative action under Federal consumer financial laws,” it must deposit it into the fund. (Sec. 1017(d)(1)) The fund is then used to pay “victims of activities for which civil penalties have been imposed under the Federal consumer financial laws.” (Sec. 1017(d)(2)) If victims cannot be located or payments are impracticable, the Bureau may use the funds for “consumer education and financial literacy programs.”

In sum, the Bureau has sweeping rulemaking, investigative, and enforcement authority to regulate all consumer financial products and services. Through its rulemaking, the Bureau has the ability to promulgate rules that could subject creditors, servicers, or mortgage originators to additional consumer actions. Moreover, the Bureau itself also may bring creditors, servicers, and mortgage originators into court for violations. Thus, while the litigation effects of the Bureau are not immediately apparent, they are far reaching.

Where Do We Go from Here?

Even though the Act spans over 800 pages, several questions remain unanswered, the most obvious question being whether Title X—the Consumer Financial Protection Act of 2010—provides for an implied right of action or a duty of care sufficient for a state law negligence per se action. As noted above, the Bureau and the state attorneys general have civil enforcement authority over violations of the Act. However, there is no mention as to whether consumers themselves may pursue a violation of Title X. When the bill was passed by the House on December 11, 2009, it included a provision providing that the title could not be construed so as to create a private right of action. (Sec. 4508) In contrast, when the bill was referred to the Senate and subsequently enrolled, it did not contain this provision, thereby leaving open the question of whether a private right of action exists for consumers.

The Bureau itself is given new powers, new staffing (including lawyers, economists, etc.), and broad authority to regulate all consumer financial products and services. Therefore, enforcement will depend largely on the funding available to the Bureau. Presumably the Bureau will be well-funded considering its funding comes from the budget of the Federal Reserve System, and is based on an amount requested by the director that cannot exceed 10 percent of the fixed operating expenses for fiscal year 2011, 11 percent for fiscal year 2012, and 12 percent for fiscal year 2013, and each year thereafter. (Sec. 1017)

In addition to providing the Bureau with sweeping power, the Act leaves states with broad authority to regulate and enforce violations of consumer protection laws. For example, the state attorneys general have power to bring civil enforcement actions for violations of the Act and any regulations promulgated thereunder. (Sec. 1042) This authority subjects the enforcement and overall effectiveness of the Act to state funding. The question remains whether states are sufficiently funded to undertake enforcement.

Conclusion

The Act itself mostly represents only a framework for change, making it difficult now to determine how dramatically consumer finance litigation will be affected by its provisions. Over the course of the next year, the Bureau will begin to promulgate regulations, begin investigations, and undertake civil administrative proceedings that will begin to clarify claims and defenses. While this article presents the most readily apparent implications, the authors and other consumer finance litigators will need to continue to evaluate the implications of the Act.

 

Jumping Through the Market Window: The Value of a Shelf Registration Statement

Maintaining an effective shelf registration statement is key for public companies seeking to raise capital during tumultuous economic times.

In recent years, the capital markets have experienced extraordinary volatility, and as a result, companies may find it challenging to raise capital for a number of reasons, even as the markets begin to recover. Not only has available capital decreased, but gaining access to the markets can be costly. Companies also risk a potentially adverse impact to the price of their stock if an announced offering is ultimately unsuccessful. In response, several nontraditional approaches to accessing the markets have emerged. Variations of registered offerings, such as registered direct offerings, “at-the-market” offerings, “over-the-wall” offerings, and “overnight” offerings are being used by companies with greater frequency. Such offerings are allowing companies to take advantage of an open “market window” on short notice, and quickly and cost-effectively raise capital. The key to the success of each of these approaches is maintaining an effective shelf registration statement.

Shelf Registration Statements

An effective shelf registration statement permits issuers to take securities “off the shelf” and offer them to the public on a continuous or delayed basis. This “takedown from the shelf” can be accomplished in a number of types of public offerings, some of which are discussed below. A public offering may be registered by filing a shelf registration statement on Form S-3 (or Form F-3 for foreign private issuers). The shelf registration statement is typically used where the issuer does not intend to immediately sell its securities. It can be used for both debt and equity offerings, including common stock, preferred stock, warrants, debt (convertible and nonconvertible), or equity-related debt securities, which can be sold in one or more offerings from time to time. There is no limit on the amount of securities that can be registered.

There are many advantages to using a shelf registration statement. First, it permits companies to register takedowns of its securities on a delayed basis under Rule 415 of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the Securities Act). It also allows companies to incorporate by reference periodic reports that are filed after the effective date of the registration statement, eliminating the need to file post-effective amendments and prospectus supplements to reflect new business and financial developments. Historically, the SEC staff has been less likely to review, and comment on, short-form registration statements such as a shelf registration statement, and in some instances shelf registration statements are automatically effective. In addition, the SEC will not review offering documents for a specific takedown under the shelf registration statement. For these reasons, companies using shelf registration statements are able to gain quicker access to capital when a “market window” opens.

Eligibility to Use Shelf Registration Statements

Not every company is eligible to use a shelf registration statement. To be eligible, the company must be a public company (and have been a public company for at least 12 months prior to filing the registration statement), have a timely reporting history for the last 12 months, and not be in default on indebtedness for borrowed money or material leases, or have failed to pay dividends or sinking fund installments on preferred stock since the end of its last fiscal year (together, the Company Requirements).

Shelf-eligible companies are then further divided into two classes based on the size of the issuer’s public float (as discussed below). A larger company may use a shelf for a primary offering (sale by an issuer of newly issued securities) if (1) the aggregate market value of its voting and nonvoting common equity held by nonaffiliates (the “public float”) is at least $75 million, within 60 days of the filing of the registration statement, or (2) only nonconvertible investment-grade securities are being offered. Companies with a public float of less than $75 million may nevertheless register primary offerings on a shelf if the company (1) meets all of the other eligibility requirements, (2) is not (and has not been during the previous 12 months) a shell company, (3) has a class of common equity securities listed on a national securities exchange (i.e., not the over-the-counter market or the “pink sheets”), and (4) does not sell in a 12-month period more than the equivalent of one-third of its public float (the “one-third cap”).

In light of the current uncertain market conditions, it is important for an issuer to consider filing a shelf registration statement as soon as it is eligible. An issuer’s ability to use an existing shelf registration statement will only be retested when the issuer files its annual report on Form 10-K. It is important for issuers who may need to raise more funds than they could under the one-third cap to carefully consider the timing of any financing transactions to take maximum advantage of the Form S-3.

Filing a Shelf Registration Statement

The shelf registration statement is filed with the SEC on a Form S-3 (or Form F-3 for foreign private issuers), with a base prospectus. The base prospectus typically contains general information such as the types of securities to be offered, a brief summary of the issuer’s business, the use of proceeds, and a plan of distribution. The base prospectus also may contain a description of the risk factors of the offering and, if the offering involves the sale of debt securities, it may contain a ratio of earnings to fixed charges.

The shelf registration statement also will include the estimated expenses of the registration, required exhibits, the undertakings required by the SEC rules, and the issuer’s signature page. The issuer is not required to specify the exact amount or offering price of each type of security in its registration statement, but instead may include only an aggregate dollar amount of securities to be offered.

Once a shelf registration has been declared effective, an issuer can take securities “off the shelf.” Takedowns are described in a prospectus supplement. The prospectus supplement typically contains the terms of an offering that were not provided in the base prospectus. It may include the risk factors and tax consequences of a specific offering, as well as a description of the specific distribution arrangements and any planned use of the proceeds that differs from the description in the base prospectus. A prospectus supplement is generally filed pursuant to Rule 424(b) of the Securities Act and is delivered to investors with the base prospectus.

Three-Year Limit

A shelf registration statement can generally only be used for three years after its initial effective date. Unsold securities and fees paid under an expiring registration statement can be rolled over to the new registration statement. Some types of shelf registration statements are not subject to the three-year limitation, including registration statements to be used only for secondary offerings by selling security holders and shelf registration statements to be used in connection with an acquisition.

The issuer has a 180-day grace period between the expiration of the old registration statement and the effectiveness of the new registration statement. It may continue to offer and sell securities under the expiring registration statement for up to 180 days as long as the new shelf registration statement is filed within three years of the original effective date of the old registration statement. The 180-day grace period does not apply to automatic shelf registration statements filed by “well-known seasoned issuers” (as defined below), since they are effective immediately upon filing. In addition, continuous offerings that commenced under the old registration statement prior to the end of the three-year period may continue under the expiring registration statement until the effective date of the new registration statement if such offerings are permitted to be made under the new registration statement.

Increased Flexibility for Well-Known Seasoned Issuers

Some companies may qualify for a “well-known seasoned issuer” (WKSI) status. WKSIs are exempt from certain requirements. For example, WKSIs may exclude certain information from the base prospectus, such as whether the offering is a primary or secondary offering, a description of the securities (other than the name or class of the securities), and the plan of distribution. Moreover, WKSIs can file an automatically effective shelf registration (ASR) statement. In other words, there will be no delay in effectiveness as the issuer will not have to receive and respond to any SEC comments. Automatic effectiveness is particularly important to issuers contemplating a nontraditional offering as it provides a shorter waiting period and quicker access to the markets. Post-effective amendments also will be automatically effective, which allows issuers to amend the registration statement to do things such as registering additional classes of shares quickly. WKSIs have the convenience of being able to pay filing fees on a pay-as-you-go basis at the time of each takedown.

A WKSI is an issuer that (1) is required to file reports with the SEC under section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; (2) meets the Company Requirements (as described above); and (3) as of date within 60 days of the “determination date,” has either (a) a public float of $700 million or more or (b) issued, in the last three years, at least $1 billion aggregate principal amount of nonconvertible securities in primary offerings for cash. The “determination date,” or the date upon which it is determined whether a company will qualify for WKSI status, is the later of (1) the filing of its most recent shelf registration statement, (2) the filing of its most recent post-effective amendment, or (3) if it has not filed a shelf registration statement in the previous 16 months, the filing of its most recent annual report on Form 10-K. An issuer’s eligibility to use an existing ASR will be retested when the issuer files its annual report on Form 10-K.

A WKSI should consider the benefits of filing a shelf registration statement as soon as it is eligible. Filing an ASR when the issuer is able to do so will protect the issuer’s ability to use the ASR until the issuer’s WKSI status is retested when the next Form 10-K is filed, and may permit the use of an ASR at a time when the issuer does not meet the WKSI test and would thus otherwise not be able to file an ASR.

Nontraditional Uses of Shelf Registration Statements

As a result of the recent market turmoil, issuers and investors are seeking new ways to access the markets. Some of the options available to issuers with a shelf registration statement include at-the-market offerings, over-the-wall offerings, and registered direct offerings.

At-the-Market Offerings

An “at-the-market” (or ATM) offering, the most common of the nontraditional approaches, is an offering of securities into an existing trading market for outstanding shares of the same class at the price of the securities in the market. Therefore, the price at which securities are sold varies as the market price for the securities varies. Typically, the distribution agent completes sales of the issuer’s securities through ordinary trading transactions. Companies must have an effective shelf registration statement to enter into an ATM program due to the continuous nature of this type of offering.

At-the-market offerings are advantageous over traditional offerings for several reasons, including

  • Capital is raised quickly by selling new shares into the existing trading flow of the market without having to market or announce the offering, which serves to mitigate the risk of an adverse impact on the issuer’s stock price;
  • Issuers can structure the deal with the distribution agent to match its capital needs, including with respect to timing and size;
  • At-the-market offerings typically cost less than traditional offerings; and
  • Companies usually don’t engage in special selling efforts (i.e., no roadshows).

Over-the-Wall Transactions

An “over-the-wall” offering occurs when underwriters market the offering to a limited number of potential investors prior to the public announcement of the transaction. This type of offering has been used more frequently since the downturn in the markets began, prompted by concerns issuers have with the potential adverse impact an announced offering would have on its stock price if the offering fails. Subject to a limited exception for WKSIs, companies using this rule must have a shelf registration statement on file with the SEC in order to avoid gun jumping issues.

In an over-the-wall transaction, underwriters typically contact a group of institutional investors about a potential offering but do not disclose the identity of the issuer. If a prospective investor expresses interest in the offering, the underwriter will bring the investor “over the wall” and disclose the identity of the issuer and specifics relating to the offering.

Over-the-wall offerings are sometimes completed overnight. In an overnight offering, underwriters will contact investors to gauge interest prior to the marketing period. After investors are brought “over the wall” and the offering is priced, the issuer will take the offering public in a fully disclosed offering for a short period of time after the market closes. The marketing period only lasts overnight and the offering is completed before the markets open the next morning.

SEC rules (Rule 163) sought to provide additional benefits to WKSI’s wall-crossed deals by permitting pre-marketing efforts without having a shelf registration in place. Only the WKSI itself may engage in pre-marketing offers under Rule 163. This limitation, however, exposes the issuer to the very market risk issuers are attempting to avoid. The issuer’s identity will clearly be made known once it begins to solicit potential investors. On December 21, 2009, the SEC proposed an amendment to Rule 163 to close this gap for WKSIs and allow an authorized underwriter or dealer to make offers prior to the marketing period if the following conditions are met: (1) the underwriter or dealer receives written authorization from the issuer to act as the issuer’s agent or representative before any communications are made on the issuer’s behalf; (2) the issuer authorizes or approves any written or oral communication before such communication is made by an authorized underwriter or dealer acting as an agent or representative for the issue; and (3) any authorized underwriter or dealer that has made any authorized communication on behalf of the issuer is identified in the prospectus.

Over-the-wall transactions have a number of advantages, including the following:

  • Companies have the ability to test the waters for interest in an offering of the Company’s securities without risking a negative impact on its stock price;
  • Offerings can be completed quickly following the announcement of the offering, typically within several days, and even overnight on occasion;
  • A large marketing effort can be avoided since potential investors have already indicated their interest in the offering; and
  • Costs are reduced by shorter transaction times and reduced marketing efforts.

Registered Direct Offerings

A registered direct offering is a public offering of registered securities that is marketed like a private placement or a PIPE (private investment in public equity). An issuer may conduct the registered direct offering as a takedown off of an existing shelf registration statement. Registered direct offerings are typically marketed to a targeted group of investors, oftentimes through a placement agent.

Advantages of using a registered direct offering include

  • The offering may be conducted with minimal publicity, reducing the effects of speculative trading on the market, because the group of investors is targeted;
  • When a company has an effective shelf registration statement on file, it may obtain confidentiality agreements from potential investors during the marketing period, allowing the company to lower its risk of falling stock prices upon announcement of the offering; and
  • Companies may receive better pricing than in a PIPE due to the liquidity discount traditionally associated with a PIPE.

Regulation FD Considerations

Regulation FD requires that any time an issuer, or any person acting on its behalf, discloses any material nonpublic information regarding the issuer or its securities, the issuer must publicly disclose such information. In general, continuous or delayed offerings under a shelf registration statement, including at-the-market, over-the-wall, and overnight offerings, will not be exempt from Regulation FD. Issuers should keep in mind its obligations under Regulation FD prior to engaging in any of the offerings described in this article. Most companies require prospective investors to sign a confidentiality agreement to hold nonpublic information relating to the company confidential until the information is made available to the public. In the absence of a confidentiality agreement, issuers may be required to file current reports on Form 8-K, from time to time, relating to the offering.

Securities Exchange Approval Policies

Although there is no limit on the number of shares an issuer may sell under a shelf registration statement, in certain circumstances, the securities exchanges require issuers to obtain the consent of the stockholders. Nasdaq Rule 5635(d) and NYSE Rule 312.03 generally require stockholder approval of any issuance that may exceed 20 percent of the pre-offering total shares outstanding that are priced at less than the book or market value (whichever is greater). Stockholder approval, however, is not required in a public offering. In light of the extremely short period of time in which overnight or over-the-wall transactions are conducted and the pre-marketing efforts, companies should carefully consider whether a registered offering will trigger the stockholder approval policies of the securities exchanges.

Conclusion

In summary, shelf registration statements are useful tools to access the capital markets quickly and cost-effectively, while also minimizing some of the risks facing issuers contemplating an offering. It is important for companies to maintain an effective shelf registration statement and ensure that a new statement is filed every three years to avoid any blackout periods and preserve its ability to use the shelf in the event of a significant market decline. The key to a company’s successful transaction on the capital markets during tumultuous economic conditions is a shelf registration statement–it ensures quicker access to capital, greater flexibility in structure, and the ability to jump when the market window opens.

FCPA Prosecutions: The Critical Role of the Accounting and Recordkeeping Provisions

As part of the expanding enforcement of the FCPA, the Justice Department and SEC are increasingly using the FCPA’s internal controls and recordkeeping provisions to prosecute improper payments that may otherwise be beyond the reach of the antibribery provisions.

Often overlooked in the dramatic increase in enforcement of the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA) is the critical role of the FCPA’s accounting and recordkeeping provisions. One of the lesser-known problems disclosed by the revelations of the Watergate era in the United States was the accounting and recordkeeping practices that made improper payments possible. To address these practices, in addition to prohibiting improper inducements to foreign officials, the FCPA placed new and significant obligations on issuers to make and keep accurate records and to maintain a system of internal accounting controls.

Known as the “accounting and recordkeeping” provisions, these new obligations constituted the second and less-well-known mechanism to deter improper inducements to foreign officials. Compared to the antibribery provisions, which prohibit improper inducements to foreign officials, the accounting and recordkeeping provisions, in many respects, constitute a more potent mechanism in deterring improper inducements to foreign officials. They provide a completely independent basis for prosecuting issuers or those acting on their behalf for making improper inducements.

Unlike the antibribery provisions, which apply only to improper inducements to foreign officials, the accounting and recordkeeping provisions apply to an issuer’s domestic and foreign operations, including domestic reporting and disclosure practices as well as practices involving foreign payments. They create affirmative duties on the part of issuers and officers, directors, employees, agents, and stockholders acting on behalf of an issuer.

As opposed to the antibribery provisions, no proof of intent is required to establish a civil violation under the accounting and recordkeeping provisions. A criminal violation can lead to a 20-year term of imprisonment instead of a five-year term under the antibribery provisions. Moreover, critical evidence of a violation of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions in a foreign setting is more likely to be under the control of an issuer and subject to compulsion by U.S. enforcement authorities.

Broad Reach

Seemingly, the application of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions is more limited than the antibribery provisions. They apply to foreign and domestic issuers of securities as defined by section 3 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Exchange Act) as entities required to register under section 12 or file reports under section 15(d). Issuers can include foreign entities with American depository receipts (ADRs).

Unlike the antibribery provisions, the accounting and recordkeeping provisions extend to majority-owned foreign subsidiaries of an issuer. In addition, for an issuer to be held civilly liable, it makes no difference whether the controlling entity lacks knowledge of the conduct of the subsidiary that serves as a basis for a violation. Criminal liability may be established where an individual or entity subject to the accounting and recordkeeping provisions knowingly circumvents or fails to implement a system of internal controls or knowingly falsifies any book, record, or account. Even when an issuer holds an interest of 50 percent or less, the FCPA requires it to “proceed in good faith to use its influence to the extent reasonable under the circumstances to cause [the subsidiary] to devise and maintain a system of internal accounting controls” consistent with the accounting and recordkeeping provisions. In such circumstances, an issuer will be “conclusively presumed” to have complied when it can demonstrate its good-faith efforts to influence its subsidiary. An issuer’s duty to influence a subsidiary’s behavior increases directly with the degree to which it can exercise control over the subsidiary.

In terms of individuals, while acting within the scope of their duties on behalf of an issuer, individuals, and, in particular, officers, directors, employees, stockholders, and agents of an issuer, can be subject to the terms of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions. The accounting and recordkeeping provisions also extend to individuals who, while acting within the scope of their duties, are officers, directors, employees, or agents of a foreign subsidiary where the issuer has an interest greater than 50 percent.

Except for violations relating to disclosures to auditors, the recordkeeping provisions apply to “any person” and not just to officers and directors. Though proof of intent may be required to establish civil liability for aiding and abetting a violation of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions, even individuals and entities not otherwise subject to their terms can become subject to liability. For example, a supplier to an issuer who knowingly facilitates the making of a false invoice to conceal the true nature of the underlying transaction could be subject to prosecution for violating the recordkeeping provisions.

Falsification of Books and Records

Under the recordkeeping provisions, an issuer must ensure that the books and records are accurate so that the financial statements can be prepared in conformity with accepted methods of recording economic events. The recordkeeping provisions are not focused solely with the preparation of financial statements. They seek to strengthen the accuracy of the corporate books and records and the reliability of the audit process. Books and records subject to the recordkeeping provisions are not specifically defined by the FCPA. But given the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002’s (Sarbanes-Oxley) emphasis on internal controls and deterring conduct that might impede or affect the audit function, Congress implicitly reaffirmed the broad scope of records subject to the terms of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions.

In general, the greater the degree to which a record may relate to the preparation of financial statements, the adequacy of internal controls, or the performance of audits, the more courts are likely to find the record to be subject to the terms of the recordkeeping provisions. Records such as corporate minutes, transactional documents, and authorizations for expenditures are all incidental to the preparation of financial statements or recording economic events. Records that may relate to internal controls, such as compliance programs, fall within the scope of records subject to the recordkeeping provisions since such records bear on the accuracy of the financial statements. Similarly, records bearing on the audit of financial statements are likely to be extremely broad in scope.

Of critical significance is the absence of a materiality requirement under the recordkeeping provisions. Even if the amount of a transaction does not affect the bottom line of an issuer in quantitative terms, it may still constitute a violation of the recordkeeping provisions if not accurately recorded. A classic situation is presented by expediting payments, which are permitted under the antibribery provisions but could pose a problem if not accurately recorded.

Manipulating records to mask transactions by characterizing them in some oblique manner or actually falsifying a transaction can implicate an issuer and those individuals involved. Placing a transaction into an abnormal category or burying it in some other way may serve as a basis for a violation. The Securities and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) posture has been described as one of zero tolerance for the falsification of records relating to an improper inducement.

One practical consideration in prosecuting violations of the antibribery provisions is the difficulty in securing evidence in a foreign setting. This difficulty is further complicated by the question of whether evidence obtained in a foreign setting will be admissible in a U.S. court. In the context of prosecuting a violation of the recordkeeping provisions, the evidence is more likely to be documentary in nature, to be in the possession or control of an issuer, and to be admissible in court. An issuer is subject to compulsion by U.S. enforcement authorities to produce records, including foreign records, in its custody or control.

Moreover, in a criminal context, proving a violation of the recordkeeping provisions is more straightforward and more likely to succeed than proving a violation of the antibribery provisions. The evidence necessary to establish a criminal violation is much simpler and less apt to confuse a jury. Unlike the antibribery provisions, proving corrupt intent is not required. Nor is there a requirement to prove whether a foreign official was involved or whether a promise, offer, or payment was made to obtain or retain business. In large part, the elements of the offense are limited to whether the record is subject to the recordkeeping provisions, whether the conduct was willful, and whether the record was accurate in reasonable detail. The documentary nature of the evidence makes proving a violation less dependent upon recollections that can be subjective and that can fade over time. Unlike proving a bribe, proving a false statement is likely to be much more clear-cut and less susceptible to differing interpretations. From the standpoint of a prosecutor, a criminal violation of the recordkeeping provisions has an added strategic advantage because it carries a far more severe penalty than a violation of the antibribery provisions. Given the severity of the criminal penalty for a violation of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions, and a greater ability to prove a violation, a prosecutor has an enhanced ability to negotiate a plea. It also enhances a prosecutor’s ability to secure cooperation to provide evidence relative to violations of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions as well as the antibribery provisions. Individuals facing a prison sentence are apt to be receptive to alternatives that may limit the possibility of a lengthy prison term.

Material Misrepresentations or Omissions to Auditors

In implementing the recordkeeping provisions through the adoption by the SEC of Rule 13b2-2, officers or directors of an issuer were prohibited from making materially false or misleading statements or omitting to state any material facts in the preparation of filings required by the Exchange Act. Although this rule applies only to officers and directors, and anyone acting on their behalf, it is very broad in terms of its coverage. Under Rule 13b2-2, officers and directors are prohibited from “taking any action to fraudulently influence, coerce, manipulate, or mislead any independent public or certified accountant engaged in the performance of an audit of the financial statements of that issuer for the purpose of rendering such financial statements materially misleading.”

Rule 13b2-2 also extends to written and oral statements made to internal auditors as well as to outside auditors by officers or directors. It also extends to “causing another person to make a material misstatement or make or cause to be made a materially false or misleading statement.” Not only are misrepresentations covered, but a material omission or failure to clarify a statement so as to make it materially false or misleading can constitute a violation.

Adequate Internal Controls

Under the accounting provisions, the purpose of internal controls is to ensure that issuers adopt accepted methods of recording economic events, protecting assets, and confirming transactions to management’s authorization. No specific system of internal controls is required. A system of internal controls must be sufficient to provide reasonable assurance that directors, officers, and shareholders are made aware of and thus able to prevent the improper use of assets. Under the accounting provisions, “[r]easonable assurance” means “such level of detail and degree of assurance as would satisfy prudent officials in the conduct of their own affairs.” The standard for compliance is whether a system, taken as a whole, reasonably meets the requirements of the internal control provisions.

An issuer’s antibribery compliance program should not necessarily be separate from its system of internal accounting controls. A natural interplay was intended between the antibribery and the accounting and recordkeeping provisions. An effective system of internal accounting controls includes a range of review and approval guidelines designed to detect and deter questionable payments. Indeed, the planning, implementation, and monitoring of an issuer’s compliance program should be closely linked, if not intertwined, with its system of internal accounting controls.

For issuers engaged in international business, the failure to devise or maintain an effective system to prevent or detect violations of the antibribery provisions can constitute a violation of the internal controls provisions. At the very least, it must include a formal FCPA policy made applicable to the entire entity, an FCPA compliance program, and a practice of conducting due diligence and maintaining due diligence records on the entity’s foreign agents. Those responsible for ensuring compliance with an FCPA policy must have adequate experience and training to address issues that may arise relative to preventing, detecting, and addressing possible violations of the FCPA. Due to their esoteric nature, and the absence of specific standards, the internal accounting control provisions are seldom the focus of criminal enforcement activity. Yet, in a civil enforcement context, where no proof of intent is required, these provisions provide an almost endless series of bases for the SEC to take action against an issuer. In almost any after-the-fact analysis relating to financial irregularities, the SEC will be able to point to a breakdown of some sort associated with the internal accounting controls of an issuer.

Expediting Payments

A related consideration is how expediting payments are recorded. An effort to conceal expediting payments by placing them among other types of payments would be improper. Regulators prefer that such expenditures be set out in a separate line item. This reasoning is premised on the view that payments of a questionable nature are not apt to be disclosed. Thus the greater the transparency or degree to which expediting payments are fully disclosed, the less likely they will be perceived as being suspect.

A separate line item may not be required as long as the line item in which an expediting payment is incorporated is both logical and not calculated to conceal. If the expediting payment is a relatively small amount of money and has no relationship to any particular function of an entity, its inclusion in a category of miscellaneous items may not be inappropriate. Similarly, the degree to which the expediting payments may be rolled up into larger line items and thereby hidden is not necessarily improper as long as the manner in which such payments are incorporated into a larger line item is logical and not for the purpose of concealing questionable transactions. The classification is not necessarily false or inaccurate. It is mere circumstance that leads to the expediting payment being, in effect, buried. But should the expediting payment be incorrectly classified so that it may be rolled up into a larger line item and thereby concealed, a basis may exist for a violation of the recordkeeping provisions to be alleged.

Expediting payments also bear on the adequacy of internal controls. Consistent with maintaining an effective compliance program and the heightened obligations on auditors to plan audits so as to detect fraud, issuers need to be in a position to be responsive to inquiries and, if necessary, to quickly identify expediting payments and to provide substantiating documentation. Greater segregation is more likely to enhance the adequacy of internal controls. If the expediting payments are not properly approved, an issuer may also open itself up to possible allegations of inadequate internal controls.

Regardless of whether they may be permitted by the FCPA, the underlying dynamic associated with expediting payments must always be kept in mind. By their very nature, expediting payments are illegal in the country of the intended recipient. Proper recordkeeping is more likely to expose an entity to liability associated with an investigation in the host country for making payments prohibited by local law.

Conclusion

The increased reliance on the accounting and recordkeeping provisions to deter improper payments is not likely to decline. To the contrary, at the core of the heightened obligations under Sarbanes-Oxley are those relating to the FCPA’s accounting provisions. Subject to criminal sanctions, internal control reports are now required expressing management’s responsibility for establishing and maintaining adequate internal controls for financial reporting and assessing their effectiveness. An attestation by an issuer’s outside auditor is also required as to management’s assessment of the adequacy of the issuer’s internal controls.

In sum, the critical role of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions in deterring improper inducements to foreign officials cannot be overstated. Conduct that may be perceived to be beyond the reach of the antibribery provisions may constitute a violation of the accounting and recordkeeping provisions. Compliance with the FCPA’s prohibitions on improper inducements cannot be limited to complying with the antibribery provisions. To be effective, an FCPA compliance program must ensure that adequate internal controls are in place and that accurate recordkeeping practices are rigorously enforced.

The Single-Member Limited Liability Company as Disregarded Entity: Now You See It, Now You Don’t

The power and complexity of the single-member limited liability company (SMLLC) comes from a conceptual contradiction: the conflation of owner and organization for federal income tax purposes and the separation of owner and entity for nontax, state law purposes. The contraction has significant practical consequences, which this article explores by first, explaining why federal regulators chose to disregard the existence of a class of valid and existing state law entities (i.e., SMLLCs) and then, providing several illustrations of the practical vagaries that can result.

Why a Disregarded Entity?

In 1996, as the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) prepared to revolutionize tax classification through its “check the box” regulations, the IRS’s lawyers and theoreticians faced a knotty conceptual problem. The essence of check the box was to accord partnership tax classification, and therefore flow-through tax status, to all noncorporate business entities organized under the law of a U.S. jurisdiction. This approach was destined to, and did, open the floodgates for LLCs having at least two members and, eventually, for limited liability partnerships and limited liability limited partnerships as well.

But what was the IRS to do with the “single-member LLC”–an LLC with only one owner? It is axiomatic under both state and tax law that a partnership has at least two owners. The IRS had neither the statutory nor the jurisprudential basis for announcing that an LLC with only one member would be taxed as a partnership.

The IRS’s solution was a tour de force; it cut the Gordian knot by declaring that a single-member LLC simply does not exist for federal income tax purposes. Put simply, under check the box, unless an SMLLC elects to be classified as a corporation, the SMLLC is a disregarded entity. The sole member of an SMLLC might paraphrase Louis XIV and say, “the entity, it’s me.”

Since the promulgation of “check the box,” the single-member LLC has become a centrally important aspect of LLC law and practice. Countless individuals use the SMLLC to provide a liability shield for entrepreneurial activity (activity that for tax purposes disappears into a Schedule C on the individual’s tax returns), and SMLLCs also figure prominently in more complicated contexts (ranging from simply serving as corporate subsidiaries to playing a pivotal role in structuring “bankruptcy remote” entities for securitization purposes).

The disregarded entity construct solved the IRS’s conceptual problems for federal income tax purposes. However, as discussed below, the new approach has occasioned considerable confusion in other contexts.

Illustration No. 1–The SMLLC in Federal Court

A pair of recent circuit court decisions illustrate the confusion, in the context of the right of a litigant to appear pro se in federal court. Lattanzio v. COMTA, 482 F. 3d 137 (2d Cir. 2007), and U.S. v. Hagerman, 545 F.3d 579 (7th Cir. 2008), both involved essentially the same legal question. In each case, an LLC’s sole owner attempted to appear pro se on behalf of the LLC.

In each case, the attempt failed. Although the right to appear pro se in federal court is of venerable origin, the right applies to individuals and not to juridic persons. As Chief Justice Marshall explained almost 200 years ago, “a natural person may appear for himself,” but “[a] corporation . . . can appear only by attorney.” Osborn v. Bank of the United States, 22 U.S. (9 Wheat.) 738, 830 (1824).

In the pro secontext, an LLC is very much like a corporation. Conflation is not the paradigm; the owner and the organization are distinct conceptually and legally. Even when the entity is an LLC with only one member, for pro se purposes the entity may not be disregarded.

The right to appear pro sein federal court has been codified, 28 U.S.C. § 1654, but the codification leaves unchanged the “no conflation” analysis. In Lattanzio, for example, the court stated, “the [pro se representation] statute does not permit unlicensed laymen to represent anyone else other than themselves.” This limitation prevents “a layperson . . . [from] represent[ing] a separate legal entity such as a corporation,” and the limitation extends to “partnerships and single shareholder corporations” and to limited liability companies as well.

For the Lattanzio court, it was immaterial that the LLC had only one member. The court acknowledged that “some courts allow sole proprietorships to proceed pro se” but sharply distinguished that situation from the situation of a single member LLC: “[A] sole proprietorship has no legal existence apart from its owner. Unlike a sole proprietorship, a sole member limited liability company is a distinct legal entity that is separate from its owner,” with, for example, the power to sue and be sued in its own name.

Having in previous decisions “refus[ed] to distinguish between a single shareholder corporation and a multi-shareholder corporation,” the Lattanzio court saw “no reason to distinguish between limited liability companies and sole member or solely-owned limited liability companies.” Like the sole shareholder of a corporation, “a sole member of a limited liability company must bear the burdens that accompany the benefits of the corporate [sic] form and may appear in federal court only through a licensed attorney.”

Lattanzio was a civil case. U.S. v. Hagerman was a criminal matter, but the Seventh Circuit used the same reasoning as the Second Circuit to reach the same conclusion. “[T]he right to conduct business in a form that confers privileges, such as the limited personal liability of the owners for tort or contract claims against the business, carries with it obligations one of which is to hire a lawyer if you want to sue or defend on behalf of the entity. Pro se litigation is a burden on the judiciary, and the burden is not to be borne when the litigant has chosen to do business in entity form. He must take the burdens with the benefits.” In other words, “now you see it, . . . now you see it.”

Illustration No. 2–Liability for an SMLLC’s Employment Taxes

As a matter of state, nontax law, “[a] limited liability company is an entity distinct from its members.” Revised Uniform Limited Liability Company Act (Re-ULLCA), § 104(a). As a result, even when an LLC has only one member, “the debts, obligations, or other liabilities of a limited liability company, whether arising in contract, tort, or otherwise: (1) are solely the debts, obligations, or other liabilities of the company; and (2) do not become the debts, obligations, or other liabilities of a member . . . solely by reason of the member acting as a member.” Re-ULLCA, § 304(a).

It would seem to follow, therefore, that, when an SMLLC fails to pay its federal employment taxes, the IRS, like any other creditor of the LLC, must

  • content itself with the assets of the LLC to satisfy the entity’s obligations, or
  • find a way to use the controlling person liability approach applicable to other state law entities, IRC § 6671(b), or
  • pursue the elaborate and sometimes difficult path of piercing the veil of the LLC to reach the assets of the LLC’s owner.

Federal regulations effective in 2007 do indeed follow this approach, but the IRS’s path to this conclusion has been tortuous. An initial pronouncement, Notice 99-6, 1999-1 CB 321, contended that an SMLLC’s disregarded status meant that conflation was the rule for purposes of employment tax liability just as much as for pass-through tax status. “The Service recognized that, because the federal tax classification regulations essentially ignore the separate existence of a disregarded entity, the owner of the disregarded entity, and not the entity itself, is treated as the employer and that traditionally employment tax responsibilities rest with the employer.” CARTER G. BISHOP & DANIEL KLEINBERGER, LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANIES: TAX AND BUSINESS LAW, ? 2.07[1][a][i] (1994, Supp. 2010-1).

We criticized that approach as “lead[ing] to confusion” because, as a matter of state law, “the employees are actually employed by the [tax] disregarded entity.” Moreover, the approach conflicted with the IRS’s own recognition that it could not directly levy on the assets of an SMLLC to satisfy the separate tax debt of the LLC’s single member.

Nonetheless, in 2007, in Littriello v. U.S., 484 F.3d 372 (6th Cir. 2007), the Sixth Circuit approved the IRS’s approach and held a sole member automatically liable for the enterprise’s employment taxes. To reach this result, the court applied “Chevron deference”–i.e., the court followed the “directive” in Chevron U.S.A., Inc. v. Natural Resources Defense Council, Inc., 467 U.S. 837 (1984), “to give deference to an agency’s interpretation of statutes that the agency is entrusted to administer and to the rules that govern implementation, as long as they are reasonable.”

Under that approach, the court upheld the entire check the box regime, and that holding is Littriello‘s enduring significance.

Ironically, however, on the employment tax/SMLLC issue, Littriello is moot. The case validated a regulatory approach that the IRS had already prospectively abandoned. In 2005, the IRS had announced its intention to jettison Notice 99-6 and had issued proposed regulations on the subject. The proposed regulations sought to treat an SMLLC as if it were a corporation for employment tax purposes.

The regulations became final on August 17, 2007. In the context of federal employment taxes, therefore, the disregarded entity has ceased to be transparent. In other words, “now you see it, . . . now you don’t; wait . . . now you do.

Illustration No. 3–SMLLCs and Transfer Taxes

Suppose that a person becomes a member of a limited liability company and in connection with that event contributes land to the LLC (so as to “pay for” the membership). As a matter of state entity and property law, it seems self-evident that the contribution involves the transfer for value of the land from the would-be member to a separate legal person (i.e., the LLC). Under the laws of many states, such a transfer triggers a transfer tax, and certainly under the LLC laws of all states the transfer severs the transferor’s ownership interest in the land.

However, when the LLC has only one member, under the statutes of some states it is possible to reframe the arrangement to avoid the transfer tax. A Connecticut case shows how.

Mandell v. Gavin, 816 A.2d 619 (Conn. 2003), involved a transfer tax applicable only to transfers made for “consideration,” a term that the court stated “has been used in a specific, legal sense for centuries.” In that sense, “[t]o constitute consideration, a performance or a return promise must be . . . sought by the promisor in exchange for his promise and is given by the promisee in exchange for that promise.”

Timing is therefore everything in a consideration analysis. “Past consideration” is no consideration because the subsequent promise cannot have been exchanged for an action already performed. Through good advice or good fortune (or both), Mr. Mandell got the timing just right. “The plaintiff formed his company soon after the effective date of [Connecticut’s LLC] legislation, naming himself the sole member. The plaintiff then transferred the real property to his company by quitclaim deed. In the deed, the plaintiff recited that the transfer was ‘for NO CONSIDERATION . . .'”

Given this sequence, Mr. Mandell’s transfer of land to his LLC could seem gratuitous. After all, his admission into the LLC as its sole member provided him with all the economic and governance rights a person could have as a member. His subsequent contribution of the land did nothing to increase his rights as a member.

Of course, anyone who actually believes that Mr. Mandell’s admission as the LLC’s member occurred without contemplation of the land transfer has (1) never heard of the “step transaction” doctrine and (2) like the White Queen in Through the Looking Glass, can “believe[] as many as six impossible things before breakfast.” Indeed, Mr. Mandell contested the transfer tax on an entirely different basis. He argued that “he and his single-member limited liability company should be considered a single entity for taxation purposes, and that any transfer of property between them would fail to satisfy the requirement . . . that transfers be for ‘consideration’ to be taxable . . . because he, as an ‘individual, owns the real estate both before and after the purported transfer . . .'”

Although the Connecticut Supreme Court chose not to follow Mr. Mandell’s suggested “disregarded entity” approach, the fact that the LLC was an SMLLC was crucial to the court’s decision. If, for example, the LLC had had just one additional member, it would have been impossible to pretend that the members (1) had first agreed to become members, with an understanding as to how to share governance rights and allocate profits, and then (2) had just happened to make contributions of property to the LLC–fortuitously, gratuitously, and not in furtherance of their agreement as to membership. But with an SMLLC, “now you see it, . . . now you see it, but it doesn’t matter.

Warning: It’s All How You Look at It

All transfer tax cases depend heavily on the language of the applicable statute, so the Mandell analysis might not apply generally. Nonetheless, the case helps illustrate why lawyers must pay careful attention to the shape-shifting nature of the SMLLC.

Other illustrations are easy enough to find. For example, in Olmstead v. FTC, __ So.3d __, 2010 WL 2518106 (Fl. 2010), the Florida Supreme Court spent more than a year considering an SMLLC question certified by the Eleventh Circuit: do membership transfer restrictions, which were built into LLC statutes in order to prevent the separate creditors of any one LLC member from intruding into the business of a multimember LLC,permit a sole member to shelter assets from the claims of the sole member’s legitimate creditors? The issue is a cause célèbre among LLC practitioners and “asset protection” mavens, and in July a sharply divided court reformulated the certified question, opined in favor of the creditor, and left practitioners and scholars wondering whether the decision undermines transfer restrictions for multimember as well as single member LLCs. In another controversial case, the Tax Court recently held that an SMLLC is not a disregarded entity for the purposes of gift tax law. Two vehement dissents argued that the plain language of the check the box regulations makes them applicable “for [all] federal tax purposes.”

In sum, practitioners must take great care when working with an SMLLC because how separate an SMLLC is from its owner depends on how one looks at the situation. Depending on which legal regime applies, the SMLLC may be as visible and substantial as a stone wall or as diaphanous and prone to disappearance as the Cheshire Cat.

Report of the Model First Lien/Second Lien Intercreditor Agreement Task Force

This is the Report of the Model First Lien/Second Lien Intercreditor Agreement Task Force (“Task Force”) established by the Commercial Finance Committee of the Business Law Section of the American Bar Association. This Report will first review the reasons for the creation of the Task Force, its goals, and its methodology. It will then introduce and examine each major provision of the Model Agreement, exploring its purpose, perceived market practice, and the perspectives of first and second lien creditors. Where appropriate, the Report will present alternative provisions and views.

CREATION OF THE TASK FORCE

Intercreditor agreements are used in a variety of financing transactions to establish the respective rights and remedies of two or more creditors in credit facilities provided to a common borrower. Intercreditor agreements are not standardized, and their scope varies widely. Intercreditor agreements may include payment subordination provisions, payment standstill terms, and other creditor rights and remedies that do not involve collateral. Such payment subordination arrangements are typically found in unsecured mezzanine financing, for example. In secured financing transactions, however, the intercreditor agreement may also govern the relative rights and priorities of each creditor’s liens in the borrower’s assets, and it is here that the Task Force has concentrated its efforts.

The past five to eight years have witnessed an increase in the use of “second lien” structures in institutional senior secured syndicated financing transactions. These structures involve a “first lien” loan secured by a first priority lien in substantially all of the assets of the borrower, and a separate pari passu “second lien” loan, typically provided by a separate lender group, secured by a second priority lien in the same collateral. Second lien structures have enjoyed increased popularity in recent years because of the increased liquidity provided by second lien lenders that might not have provided financing on an unsecured basis, and because of the relatively narrow interest rate spreads available in the second lien market before the financial crisis in the latter half of 2008.

Until the financial crisis, the second lien market had grown rapidly. According to the Loan Pricing Corporation, the dollar volume of second lien loans grew from approximately $8 billion in 2003 to over $29 billion in 2006.1 In the second quarter of 2007, second lien loans reached $15.21 billion, the highest quarter recorded for second lien issuance.2 Like other forms of leveraged finance, second lien financing fell sharply with the 2008 credit crisis. By the second quarter of 2009, second lien issuance was under $300 million.3

Second lien structures also migrated to the middle market, and to asset-based loans, where second lien structures became common. A typical structure is for a revolving lender to hold a first lien in all accounts, inventory, and other current assets while a term lender holds a first lien in equipment, real estate, and other fixed assets, with each lender also holding a second lien in the other’s primary collateral. Variations of such “wrap” structures have become increasingly creative.

As the second lien market grew, counsel to first lien lenders drafted various forms of substantially similar first lien/second lien intercreditor agreements. In the early years of the second lien market, the second lien lender generally subordinated virtually all of its rights as a secured creditor to the rights of the first lien creditor until the first lien creditor was paid in full—a so-called “silent second.” Surprisingly, there was little published guidance on the issues that counsel should consider in drafting or reviewing an intercreditor agreement, and participants relied heavily on “market practice.” It gradually became apparent, however, that the market had only a limited experience of the effect of these provisions following a default by the borrower or the initiation of a bankruptcy proceeding.

Although second lien transactions are structured in myriad ways, the principal intercreditor issues remain consistent throughout all structures. Similar intercreditor issues arise in most other secured transactions involving lien subordination. Therefore, the Task Force believes that the development of a form of first lien/second lien intercreditor agreement that covers the major recurring issues and fairly protects the interests of first and second lien creditors while reflecting market expectations would be a useful resource for practitioners.

PRINCIPAL GOALS AND USE OF MODEL AGREEMENT

It is important to identify what the Model Agreement is not. The Task Force initially received the criticism that its work would be of limited utility because an intercreditor agreement could not be standardized for all transactions. Although this is a legitimate concern, it is important to note that nearly all intercreditor agreements dealing with priority of liens in common collateral must necessarily address similar lien subordination issues. Likewise, all must address the effect of the intercreditor terms both outside of bankruptcy and during the pendency of a bankruptcy proceeding. While there will be structural differences in the transaction itself, the same issues will be present.

The Model Agreement and accompanying comments, other footnotes, and text are intended, first and foremost, to be a reference tool for the practitioner. The comments are intended to explain the general purpose of each section, highlight the principal issues encountered in practice, and convey the prevailing market expectation. Accordingly, the Model Agreement is not a universal solution to the problem of identifying the “correct form” to use for a transaction. The form will necessarily be determined by the details of the transaction. The Model Agreement introduces the major components of lien intercreditor agreements generally, addresses why such provisions are necessary, and explores the effect of drafting a provision in a manner more favorable to a first or second lien lender. Armed with an understanding of these basic concepts and their implementation in the Model Agreement, the practitioner may construct an intercreditor agreement that fits his or her transaction.

The Model Agreement does not address all types of transactions. For example, an intercreditor agreement for an asset-based transaction would typically include a provision requiring the holder of a first lien in fixed assets in a wrap structure to allow the holder of the first lien in the current assets to remain on the real property for a certain period of time to use the fixed assets to complete manufacture of goods to provide finished product for pending orders. Increasingly, lien intercreditor agreements also deal with payment subordination provisions and rights of additional secured parties such as third and fourth lienholders on common collateral. These variations are beyond the scope of the Model Agreement.

HOW THE TASK FORCE CONDUCTED ITS WORK

The Task Force is sponsored by the Syndications and Lender Relations Subcommittee of the Commercial Finance Committee of the Section of Business Law of the American Bar Association. The Chair of the Task Force is Gary D. Chamblee. The Vice Chairs of the Task Force are Alyson Allen, Christian Brose, Richard K. Brown, Robert L. Cunningham, Jr., Randall Klein, and Jane Summers, and the Editor is Howard Darmstadter. In addition to the Chair and the Vice Chairs, other members of the Task Force have played key roles in drafting the text and commentary of the Model Agreement, including Anthony R. Callobre, John Francis Hilson, and Matthew W. Kavanaugh. Many other members of the Task Force regularly attended meetings of the Task Force, contributed significantly to the ongoing discussion regarding the many difficult issues faced by the Task Force, and otherwise made contributions essential to the goal of providing a balanced, market-driven Model Agreement. The names of the over 200 members of the Task Force and their law firms or other affiliations can be found on the Task Force web site at http://www.abanet.org/dch/committee.cfm?com=CL190029.

The Task Force was formed in the spring of 2006 and met for the first time at the 2006 Annual Meeting in Honolulu, Hawaii. The Task Force is composed of practitioners who represent primarily first lien lenders, practitioners who represent primarily second lien lenders, and practitioners who represent both. As a result, the Task Force reflected a relatively balanced representation among all concerned parties. At the initial meeting, it was determined that the Task Force would meet at each scheduled meeting of the Section, which includes the Spring Meeting in April, the Annual Meeting in August, and the Fall Meeting in November of each year, and would also meet by telephone conference on a regular basis.

The agreement selected by the Task Force as a source document is an institutional first lien/second lien intercreditor agreement commonly used in the market for second lien transactions initially prepared by Latham & Watkins LLP. This form was disassembled by subject matter sections, with each section being the focus of one or more of the Task Force meetings. Where possible, the Task Force utilized experts in certain practice areas among its members to lead the review and revision of the respective sections in the member’s specialty. After each Task Force meeting, the Model Agreement was revised to reflect the concerns raised by Task Force members at the meeting.

Significant discussion was devoted to the presentation of alternative provisions favoring second lien lenders. Task Force members who represented primarily second lien lenders were troubled by the placement of such provisions as footnotes or at the end of the agreement, feeling that such placement implied that the alternative text did not reflect market terms. It was decided that alternative text that involved concepts important to second lien lenders and that was actually used in practice would be placed in the body of the relevant section of the agreement as a second lien favorable alternative. Concepts deemed less important or not widely used in practice, as well as clarifications and explanations of differences and concerns of the various parties, would be placed in the footnotes. In addition, introductory comments are included in notes to most sections of the Model Agreement.

Following the initial revision of each section, the Model Agreement was further edited and revised stylistically by Howard Darmstadter. The Task Force is grateful for Howard’s fine work in making the Model Agreement more concise and user friendly.

The Task Force intends from time to time to publish appendices or revisions to the Model Agreement to deal with special situations or to reflect the experience of practitioners working with the document and to reflect market changes.

First Lien/Second Lien Intercreditor Agreement

[First Lien Agent]
[Second Lien Agent]
[Control Agent]
[Borrower]
[Holdings]
[Guarantor Subsidiaries]
[date]

Table of Contents

Preamble

Parties

Background

Agreement

1   Lien Priorities

1.1   Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations

1.2   No Payment Subordination

1.3   First Lien Obligations and Second Lien Obligations

1.4   First Lien Cap

1.5   First and Second Lien Collateral to Be Identical

1.6   Pledged Collateral

1.7   Limitations on Duties and Obligations

1.8   Prohibition on Contesting Liens; No Marshaling

1.9   Confirmation of Subordination in Second Lien Collateral Documents

1.10 Release of Liens [or Guaranties]

1.11 Subordination of Liens Securing Excess First Lien Obligations

2   Modification of Obligations

2.1   Permitted Modifications

2.2   Modifications Requiring Consent

2.3   Parallel Modifications to Second Lien Obligations

2.4   Notice of Modifications

3   Enforcement

3.1   Who May Exercise Remedies

3.2   Manner of Exercise

3.3   Specific Performance

3.4   Notice of Exercise

4   Payments

4.1   Application of Proceeds

4.2   Insurance

4.3   Payment Turnover

4.4   Refinancing After Discharge of First Lien Obligations

5   Purchase of First Lien Obligations by Second Lien Claimholders

5.1   Purchase Right

5.2   Purchase Notice

5.3   Purchase Price

5.4   Purchase Closing

5.5   Excess First Lien Obligations Not Purchased

5.6   Actions After Purchase Closing

5.7   No Recourse or Warranties; Defaulting Creditors

6   Insolvency Proceedings

6.1   Use of Cash Collateral and DIP Financing

6.2   Sale of Collateral

6.3   Relief from the Automatic Stay

6.4   Adequate Protection

6.5   First Lien Objections to Second Lien Actions

6.6   Avoidance; Reinstatement of Obligations

6.7   Reorganization Securities

6.8   Post-Petition Claims

6.9   Waivers

6.10 Separate Grants of Security and Separate Classification

6.11 Effectiveness in Insolvency Proceedings

7   Miscellaneous

7.1   Conflicts

7.2   No Waivers; Remedies Cumulative; Integration

7.3   Effectiveness; Severability; Termination

7.4   Modifications of This Agreement

7.5   Information Concerning Financial Condition of Borrower and Its Subsidiaries

7.6   No Reliance

7.7   No Warranties; Independent Action

7.8   Subrogation

7.9   Applicable Law; Jurisdiction; Service

7.10 Waiver of Jury Trial

7.11 Notices

7.12 Further Assurances

7.13 Successors and Assigns

7.14 Authorization

7.15 No Third-Party Beneficiaries

7.16 No Indirect Actions

7.17 Counterparts

7.18 Original Grantors; Additional Grantors

8   Definitions

8.1   Defined Terms

8.2   Usages

[date]

PREAMBLE

PARTIES

  • ____________________________, as collateral agent for the holders of the First Lien Obligations defined below (in such capacity, First Lien Agent)4
  • ____________________________, as collateral agent for the holders of the Second Lien Obligations defined below (in such capacity, Second Lien Agent)
  • ______________________________, as control agent for First Lien Agent and Second Lien Agent (in such capacity, the Control Agent)
  • ______________________________ (Borrower)
  • ______________________________ (Holdings)
  • The Guarantor Subsidiaries (as defined below).

BACKGROUND

Borrower, Borrower’s parent company, Holdings, certain lenders and agents, and First Lien Agent have entered into a First Lien Credit Agreement dated the date hereof providing for a revolving credit facility and term loan.

Borrower, Holdings, certain lenders and agents, and Second Lien Agent have entered into a Second Lien Credit Agreement dated the date hereof providing for a term loan.

Holdings has guaranteed, and Holdings and Borrower have agreed to cause certain current and future Subsidiaries of Borrower [and Holdings] (the Guarantor Subsidiaries) to guarantee, Borrower’s Obligations under the First Lien Credit Agreement and the Second Lien Credit Agreement.

Each of Borrower, Holdings, each Guarantor Subsidiary, and each other Person that executes and delivers a First Lien Collateral Document or a Second Lien Collateral Document as a “grantor” or “pledgor” (or the equivalent) is a Grantor.

A Grantor may enter into Hedge Agreements and Cash Management Agreements with one or more lenders under the First Lien Credit Agreement or their affiliates as counterparties, which may be included in the First Lien Obligations defined below.5

The First Lien Obligations and the Second Lien Obligations are secured by Liens on substantially all the assets of Borrower, Holdings, and the Guarantor Subsidiaries.

The Parties desire to set forth in this First Lien/Second Lien Intercreditor Agreement (this Agreement) their rights and remedies with respect to the Collateral securing the First Lien Obligations and the Second Lien Obligations.

AGREEMENT

1   LIEN PRIORITIES6

1.1 SENIORITY OF LIENS SECURING FIRST LIEN OBLIGATIONS

(a)   A Lien on Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is included in the Capped Obligations up to but not in excess of the First Lien Cap will at all times be senior and prior in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation, and a Lien on Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation will at all times be junior and subordinate in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is included in the Capped Obligations up to but not in excess of the First Lien Cap.

(b)   A Lien on Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is not included in the Capped Obligations will at all times be senior and prior in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation, and a Lien on Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation will at all times be junior and subordinate in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is not included in the Capped Obligations.

(c)   The Lien on Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is included in the Capped Obligations in excess of the First Lien Cap will have the priority set forth in section 1.11, “Subordination of Liens Securing Excess First Lien Obligations.”

(d)   Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, the priority of the Liens securing First Lien Obligations and the rights and obligations of the Parties will remain in full force and effect irrespective of

(1)   how a Lien was acquired (whether by grant, possession, statute, operation of law, subrogation, or otherwise),

(2)   the time, manner, or order of the grant, attachment, or perfection of a Lien,

(3)   any conflicting provision of the U.C.C. or other applicable law,

(4)   any defect in, or non-perfection, setting aside, or avoidance of, a Lien or a First Lien Loan Document or a Second Lien Loan Document,

(5)   the modification of a First Lien Obligation or a Second Lien Obligation,

(6)   the modification of a First Lien Loan Document or a Second Lien Loan Document,

(7)   the subordination of a Lien on Collateral securing a First Lien Obligation to a Lien securing another obligation of a Grantor or other Person that is permitted under the First Lien Loan Documents as in effect on the date hereof or secures a DIP Financing deemed consented to by the Second Lien Claimholders pursuant to section 6.1, “Use of Collateral and DIP Financing,”

(8)   the exchange of a security interest in any Collateral for a security interest in other Collateral,

(9)   the commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding, or

(10)   any other circumstance whatsoever, including a circumstance that might be a defense available to, or a discharge of, a Grantor in respect of a First Lien Obligation or a Second Lien Obligation or holder of such Obligation.

[ALTERNATIVE SECTION FAVORABLE TO SECOND LIEN LENDERS]7

[1.1 SENIORITY OF LIENS SECURING FIRST LIEN OBLIGATIONS

(a)   A Lien on Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is included in the Capped Obligations up to but not in excess of the First Lien Cap will at all times be senior and prior in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation, and a Lien on Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation will at all times be junior and subordinate in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is included in the Capped Obligations up to but not in excess of the First Lien Cap so long as the Lien securing the First Lien Obligations is valid, perfected, [and unavoidable][and is not avoided in an Insolvency Proceeding].

(b)   A Lien on Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is not included in the Capped Obligations will at all times be senior and prior in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation, and a Lien on Collateral securing any Second Lien Obligation will at all times be junior and subordinate in all respects to a Lien on such Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is not included in the Capped Obligations so long as the Lien securing the First Lien Obligations is valid, perfected, [and unavoidable][and is not avoided in an Insolvency Proceeding].

(c)   The Lien on Collateral securing any First Lien Obligation that is included in the Capped Obligations in excess of the First Lien Cap will have the priority set forth in section 1.11, “Subordination of Liens Securing Excess First Lien Obligations.”

(d)   Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, the priority of the Liens securing First Lien Obligations and the rights and obligations of the Parties will remain in full force and effect irrespective of

(1)   how a Lien was acquired (whether by grant, possession, statute, operation of law, subrogation, or otherwise),

(2)   the time, manner, or order of the grant, attachment, or perfection of a Lien,

(3)   any conflicting provision of the U.C.C. or other applicable law,

(4) the modification of a First Lien Obligation or a Second Lien Obligation,

(5) the modification of a First Lien Loan Document or a Second Lien Loan Document,

(6) the subordination of a Lien on Collateral securing a First Lien Obligation to a Lien securing another obligation of a Grantor or other Person that is permitted under the First Lien Loan Documents as in effect on the date hereof or secures a DIP Financing deemed consented to by the Second Lien Claimholders pursuant to Section 6.1, “Use of Collateral and DIP Financing,”

(7)   the exchange of a security interest in any Collateral for a security interest in other Collateral, or

(8)   the commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE SECTION]

1.2 NO PAYMENT SUBORDINATION8

The subordination of Liens securing Second Lien Obligations to Liens securing First Lien Obligations set forth in the preceding section 1.1 affects only the relative priority of those Liens, and does not subordinate the Second Lien Obligations in right of payment to the First Lien Obligations. Nothing in this Agreement will affect the entitlement of any Second Lien Claimholder to receive and retain required payments of interest, principal, and other amounts in respect of a Second Lien Obligation unless the receipt is expressly prohibited by, or results from the Second Lien Claimholder’s breach of, this Agreement.

1.3 FIRST LIEN OBLIGATIONS AND SECOND LIEN OBLIGATIONS

(a)   First Lien Obligations means all Obligations of the Grantors under

(1)   the First Lien Credit Agreement and the other First Lien Loan Documents,

(2)   the guaranties by Holdings and the Guarantor Subsidiaries of the Borrower’s Obligations under the First Lien Loan Documents,

(3)   any Hedge Agreement entered into with an agent or a lender (or an Affiliate thereof) under the First Lien Credit Agreement (even if the counterparty or an Affiliate of the counterparty ceases to be an agent or a lender under the First Lien Credit Agreement),

(4)   any Cash Management Agreement, or

(5) any other agreement or instrument granting or providing for the perfection of a Lien securing any of the foregoing.

Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, the term “First Lien Obligations” will include accrued interest, fees, costs, and other charges incurred under the First Lien Credit Agreement and the other First Lien Loan Documents, whether incurred before or after commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding, and whether or not allowable in an Insolvency Proceeding. To the extent that any payment with respect to the First Lien Obligations (whether by or on behalf of any Grantor, as proceeds of security, enforcement of any right of set-off, or otherwise) is declared to be fraudulent or preferential in any respect, set aside, or required to be paid to a debtor in possession, trustee, receiver, or similar Person, then the obligation or part thereof originally intended to be satisfied will be deemed to be reinstated and outstanding as if such payment had not occurred.

[ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION MORE FAVORABLE TO SECOND LIEN LENDERS]
[(a) First Lien Obligations means all Obligations of the Grantors under

(1)   the First Lien Credit Agreement and the First Lien Loan Documents,

(2)   the guaranties by Holdings and the Guarantor Subsidiaries of the Borrower’s Obligations under the First Lien Loan Documents,

(3)   any Hedge Agreement entered into with an agent or a lender (or an Affiliate thereof) under the First Lien Credit Agreement (even if the counterparty or an Affiliate of the counterparty ceases to be an agent or a lender under the First Lien Credit Agreement),

(4)   any Cash Management Agreement, or

(5)   any other agreement or instrument granting or providing for the perfection of a Lien securing any of the foregoing, except that such Obligations will only be considered First Lien Obligations to the extent

(i)   they are secured by a valid, perfected, and unavoidable Lien on the Collateral in favor of First Lien Agent,9 and

(ii)   a claim for such Obligations would be allowed or allowable in an Insolvency Proceeding applicable to the relevant Grantor.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION]

(b)   Second Lien Obligations means all Obligations of the Grantors under

(1)   the Second Lien Credit Agreement and the other Second Lien Loan Documents,

(2)   the guaranties by Holdings and the Guarantor Subsidiaries of Borrower’s Obligations under the Second Lien Loan Documents,

(3)   any Hedge Agreement entered into with an agent or a lender (or an Affiliate thereof) under the Second Lien Credit Agreement if such agent or lender is not an agent or lender under the First Lien Credit Agreement (even if the counterparty or an Affiliate of the counter party ceases to be an agent or a lender under the Second Lien Credit Agreement),

(4)   any agreement or instrument granting or providing for the perfection of a Lien securing any of the foregoing[, except that the aggregate principal amount of the Second Lien Obligations (other than Obligations under Hedge Agreements or Cash Management Agreements) in excess of the Second Lien Cap (as defined below) will not be Second Lien Obligations].10

Notwithstanding any other provision hereof, the term “Second Lien Obligations” will include accrued interest, fees, costs, and other charges incurred under the Second Lien Credit Agreement and the other Second Lien Loan Documents, whether incurred before or after commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding[, and whether or not allowable in an Insolvency Proceeding].

(c)   The inclusion of Obligations under Hedge Agreements in the First Lien Obligations will not create in favor of the applicable counterparty any rights in connection with the management or release of any Collateral or of the Obligations of any Grantor under any First Lien Collateral Document, and the inclusion of Obligations under Hedge Agreements in the Second Lien Obligations will not create in favor of the applicable counterparty any rights in connection with the management or release of any Collateral or of the Obligations of any Grantor under any Second Lien Collateral Document.

(d)   First Lien Agent and the holders of First Lien Obligations are, together, the First Lien Claimholders. Second Lien Agent and the holders of Second Lien Obligations are, together, the Second Lien Claimholders.

1.4 FIRST LIEN CAP11

Capped Obligations means First Lien Obligations for the payment of principal of Loans and reimbursement obligations in respect of Letters of Credit [, Obligations under Interest Rate Protection Agreements,] and interest, premium, if any, and fees accruing or payable in respect thereof or in respect of commitments therefor.

First Lien Cap means the sum of

(a)   the excess of

(1)   the aggregate principal amount of First Lien Obligations (including the undrawn amount of all letters of credit constituting First Lien Obligations (Letters of Credit) and the aggregate original principal amount of any term loan that is a First Lien Obligation but excluding First Lien Obligations under Hedge Agreements) up to, but not in excess of, $_________,12 over

(2)   the sum of (A) principal payments applied to term loans that are First Lien Obligations, (B) permanent reductions of revolving credit loans (and accompanying commitments) under the revolving credit facility provided for in the First Lien Credit Agreement, and (C) reimbursements of drawings under Letters of Credit constituting First Loan Obligations to the extent that any such reimbursement results in a permanent reduction of the Letter of Credit commitment amount under the First Lien Loan Documents, excluding reductions resulting from a Refinancing, plus

(b)   amounts in respect of accrued, unpaid interest, fees, and premium (if any), in each case above accruing in respect of or attributable to, but only in respect of or attributable to, the aggregate principal amount of First Lien Obligations (including the undrawn amount of all Letters of Credit constituting First Lien Obligations and the aggregate original principal amount of any term loan that is a First Lien Obligation) at any one time not to exceed the amount referred to in clause (a) above,13 provided that the First Lien Cap shall not apply to any First Lien Obligations other than Capped Obligations[, and plus

(c)   [Obligations owing by Grantors to First Lien Claimholders under non-speculative Hedge Agreements][Obligations owing by Grantors to First Lien Claimholders under Interest Rate Protection Agreements designed to protect a Grantor against fluctuations in interest rates on an aggregate principal amount of First Lien Obligations (including the undrawn amount of all Letters of Credit constituting First Lien Obligations and the aggregate original principal amount of any term loan that is a First Lien Obligation) at any one time not to exceed the amount referred to in clause (a) above, plus amounts in respect of accrued, unpaid interest on such Obligations,][, plus

(d)   the aggregate amount of all Second Lien Adequate Protection Payments to the extent paid from a DIP financing or Proceeds of Collateral14 [, and

(e)   if there is an Insolvency Proceeding, $___________].15

[ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION OF FIRST LIEN CAP FOR FIRST LIEN LOANS INVOLVING A BORROWING BASE]
[First Lien Cap16 means the excess of

(a)   the sum of (1) the aggregate principal amount of First Lien Obligations (including the undrawn amount of all letters of credit constituting First Lien Obligations (Letters of Credit) but excluding for purposes of this section (a) only the principal amount of any term loan that is a First Lien Obligation and any First Lien Obligations under Hedge Agreements) up to, but not in excess of, the lesser of (A) $_________, and (B) [110%] of Availability as determined by First Lien Agent at the time each principal amount is made, issued, or otherwise incurred, plus (2) the aggregate original principal amount of any term loan that is a First Lien Obligation, over

(b)   the sum of (1) the aggregate amount of all payments of the principal of any term loan included in the First Lien Obligations, and (2) the amount of all payments of revolving loans or reimbursements of drawings under Letters of Credit that permanently reduce the accompanying revolving credit commitment or letter of credit commitment amount under the First Lien Credit Agreement (excluding reductions in sub-facility commitments not accompanied by a corresponding permanent reduction in the revolving facility or letters of credit commitment amount, excluding reductions under (A) and (B) as a result of a Refinancing, and provided that the First Lien Cap shall not apply to any First Lien Obligations other than Capped Obligations)[, plus

(c)   [Obligations owing by Grantors to First Lien Claimholders under non-speculative Hedge Agreements][Obligations owing by Grantors to First Lien Claimholders under Interest Rate Protection Agreements designed to protect a Grantor against fluctuations in interest rates on an aggregate principal amount of First Lien Obligations (including the undrawn amount of all Letters of Credit constituting First Lien Obligations and the aggregate original principal amount of any term loan that is a First Lien Obligation) at any one time not to exceed the amount referred to in clause (a) above, plus amounts in respect of accrued, unpaid interest on such Obligations,][, plus

(d)   all Second Lien Adequate Protection Payments to the extent paid from any DIP Financing or Proceeds of Collateral]17,] [,plus

(e)   if there is an Insolvency Proceeding, $_______________]].]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION]

[ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION MORE FAVORABLE TO SECOND LIEN LENDERS]18

Capped Obligations means First Lien Obligations for the payment of principal of Loans and reimbursement obligations in respect of Letters of Credit, and interest, premium, if any, and fees accruing or payable in respect thereof or in respect of commitments therefor[, plus obligations under Interest Rate Protection Agreements in respect of interest on First Lien Principal Obligations not in excess of the First Lien Cap]

[First Lien Cap means the sum of

(a)   the excess of (1) the outstanding amount of First Lien Principal Obligations not to exceed in the aggregate [the sum of (x)] $_______ of term Indebtedness [plus (y) the lesser of (A) [110]% of [Availability] as determined by First Lien Agent at the time each principal amount is made, issued, or otherwise incurred, and (B) $_______ of revolving credit Indebtedness included in the First Lien Obligations [(including the outstanding undrawn amount of, and reimbursement obligations in respect of, letters of credit constituting First Lien Obligations (Letters of Credit))] [(calculated, in the case of any First Lien Principal Obligations issued at a discount, at the aggregate amount due at maturity thereof)]], over (2) the aggregate amount of all repayments of term Indebtedness, and all repayments or reductions of revolving credit Indebtedness, included in the First Lien Principal Obligations[, and of reimbursement obligations under Letters of Credit,] (to the extent effected with a corresponding permanent commitment reduction under the First Lien Credit Agreement but excluding reductions as a result of a Refinancing) (First Lien Principal Obligations in excess of the First Lien Cap being the Excess First Lien Principal Obligations), plus

(b)   accrued but unpaid interest, commitment, facility, utilization, and other analogous fees and, if applicable, prepayment premiums on the First Lien Principal Obligations referred to in clause (a) above [(at [rates] [interest rate margins] not in excess of __ basis points [or __ %] above the [rates] [interest rate margins] provided for under the First Lien Credit Agreement as in effect on the date hereof)], plus

(c)   all fees, expenses, premium (if any), reimbursement obligations, and other amounts of a type not referred to in clause (a) or (b) above payable in respect of the amounts referred to in clauses (a) and (b) above, [plus

(d)   Obligations under Hedge Agreements in respect of interest on First Lien Principal Obligations referred to in clause (a) above not to exceed $_______ in the aggregate,] in each case payable pursuant to the First Lien Loan Documents provided that the First Lien Cap shall not apply to any First Lien Obligations other than Capped Obligations.

For purposes of this definition, all payments of First Lien Principal Obligations will be deemed to be applied first to reduce the First Lien Principal Obligations referred to in clause (a)(1) above and thereafter to reduce any Excess First Lien Principal Obligations.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION]

Any net increase in the aggregate principal amount of a loan or Letter of Credit (on a U.S. Dollar equivalent basis) after the loan is incurred or the Letter of Credit issued that is caused by a fluctuation in the exchange rate of the currency in which the loan or Letter of Credit is denominated will be ignored in determining whether the First Lien Cap has been exceeded[, except with respect to the principal amount of First Lien Obligations made, issued, or advanced after the calculation of such fluctuation in exchange rate].19

1.5 FIRST AND SECOND LIEN COLLATERAL TO BE IDENTICAL

(a)   The Parties intend that the First Lien Collateral and the Second Lien Collateral be identical, except [specify any exceptions]. Accordingly, subject to the other provisions of this Agreement, the Parties will cooperate

(1)   to determine the specific items included in the First Lien Collateral and the Second Lien Collateral, the steps taken to perfect the Liens thereon, and the identity of the Persons having First Lien Obligations or Second Lien Obligations, and

(2)   to make the forms, documents, and agreements creating or evidencing the First Lien Collateral and Second Lien Collateral and the guaranties of the First Lien Obligations and the Second Lien Obligations materially the same, other than with respect to the first and second lien nature of the Liens.

(b)   Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations, and whether or not an Insolvency Proceeding has commenced, Borrower and Holdings will not grant, and will use their best efforts to prevent any other Person from granting, a Lien on any property

(1)   in favor of a First Lien Claimholder to secure the First Lien Obligations unless Borrower, Holdings, or such other Person grants (or offers to grant with a reasonable opportunity for the Lien to be accepted) Second Lien Agent a junior Lien on such property to secure the Second Lien Obligations (however, the refusal of Second Lien Agent to accept such Lien will not prevent the First Lien Claimholder from taking the Lien), and

(2)   in favor of a Second Lien Claimholder to secure the Second Lien Obligations unless Borrower, Holdings, or such other Person grants (or offers to grant with a reasonable opportunity for the Lien to be accepted) First Lien Agent a senior Lien on such property to secure the First Lien Obligations (however, the refusal of First Lien Agent to accept such Lien will not prevent the Second Lien Claimholder from taking the Lien).

(c)   Subject to section 1.1, “Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations,” if a Second Lien Claimholder hereafter acquires a Lien on property to secure a Second Lien Obligation where the property is not also subject to a Lien securing the First Lien Obligations, then such Second Lien Claimholder will give First Lien Agent written notice of such Lien no later than five Business Days after acquiring such Lien. If First Lien Agent also obtains a Lien on such property or if such Second Lien Claimholder fails to provide such timely notice to First Lien Agent, then such property will be deemed to be Collateral for all purposes hereunder.

1.6 PLEDGED COLLATERAL

(a)   If First Lien Agent has any Collateral in its possession or control (such Collateral being the Pledged Collateral), then, subject to section 1.1, “Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations,” and this section 1.6, First Lien Agent will possess or control the Pledged Collateral as gratuitous bailee and/or gratuitous agent for perfection for the benefit of Second Lien Agent as secured party, so as to satisfy the requirements of sections 8-106(d)(3), 8-301(a)(2), and 9-313(c) of the U.C.C. In this section 1.6, “control” has the meaning given that term in sections 8-106 and 9-314 of the U.C.C.

(b)   First Lien Agent will have no obligation to any First Lien Claimholder or Second Lien Claimholder to ensure that any Pledged Collateral is genuine or owned by any of the Grantors or to preserve rights or benefits of any Person except as expressly set forth in this section 1.6. The duties or responsibilities of First Lien Agent under this section 1.6 will be limited solely to possessing or controlling the Pledged Collateral as bailee and/ or agent for perfection in accordance with this section 1.6 and delivering the Pledged Collateral upon a Discharge of First Lien Obligations as provided in subsection (d) below.

(c)   Second Lien Agent hereby waives and releases First Lien Agent from all claims and liabilities arising out of First Lien Agent’s role under this section 1.6 as bailee and/or agent with respect to the Pledged Collateral [except for claims arising by reason of First Lien Agent’s gross negligence or willful misconduct].

(d)   Upon the Discharge of First Lien Obligations, First Lien Agent will deliver or transfer control of any Pledged Collateral in its possession or control, together with any necessary endorsements (which endorsements will be without recourse and without any representation or warranty),

(1)   first, to Second Lien Agent if any Second Lien Obligations remain outstanding, and

(2)   second, to Borrower,

and will take any other action reasonably requested by Second Lien Agent (at the expense of Borrower or, upon default by Borrower in payment or reimbursement thereof, Second Lien Agent) in connection with Second Lien Agent obtaining a first-priority interest in the Pledged Collateral.

(e)   If Second Lien Agent has any Pledged Collateral in its possession or control, then, subject to section 1.1, “Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations,” and this section 1.6, Second Lien Agent will possess or control the Pledged Collateral as gratuitous bailee and/or gratuitous agent for perfection for the benefit of First Lien Agent as secured party, so as to satisfy the requirements of sections 8-106(d)(3), 8-301(a)(2), and 9-313(c) of the U.C.C.

(f)   Second Lien Agent will have no obligation to any First Lien Claimholder or Second Lien Claimholder to ensure that any Pledged Collateral is gen-uine or owned by any of the Grantors or to preserve rights or benefits of any Person except as expressly set forth in this section 1.6. The duties or responsibilities of Second Lien Agent under this section 1.6 will be limited solely to possessing or controlling the Pledged Collateral as bailee and/or agent for perfection in accordance with this section 1.6 and delivering the Pledged Collateral upon a Discharge of Second Lien Obligations [up to any Second Lien Cap] as provided in subsection (h) below.

(g)   First Lien Agent hereby waives and releases Second Lien Agent from all claims and liabilities arising out of Second Lien Agent’s role under this section 1.6 as bailee and/or agent for perfection with respect to the Pledged Collateral [except for claims arising by reason of Second Lien Agent’s gross negligence or willful misconduct].

(h)   Upon the Discharge of Second Lien Obligations up to any Second Lien Cap, Second Lien Agent will deliver or transfer control of any Pledged Collateral in its possession or control, together with any necessary endorsements (which endorsements will be without recourse and without any representation or warranty),

(1)   first, to First Lien Agent if any First Lien Obligations remain outstanding, and

(2)   second, to Borrower,

and will take any other action reasonably requested by First Lien Agent (at the expense of the Borrower or, upon default by the Borrower in payment or reimbursement thereof, First Lien Agent) in connection with First Lien Agent obtaining a first-priority interest in the Pledged Collateral.

1.7 LIMITATIONS ON DUTIES AND OBLIGATIONS

(a)   (1) First Lien Agent will be solely responsible for perfecting and maintaining the perfection of its Liens on the First Lien Collateral, and (2) except for First Lien Agent’s obligations under section 1.6, “Pledged Collateral,” Second Lien Agent will be solely responsible for perfecting and maintaining the perfection of its Liens on the Second Lien Collateral.

(b)   This Agreement is intended solely to govern the respective Lien priorities as between First Lien Claimholders and Second Lien Claimholders and does not impose on First Lien Agent or Second Lien Agent any obligations in respect of the disposition of Proceeds of foreclosure on any Collateral that would conflict with a prior perfected claim in favor of another Person, an order or decree of a court or other Governmental Authority, or applicable law.

(c)   Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, First Lien Agent will only be required to verify the payment of, or other satisfactory arrangements with respect to, First Lien Obligations arising under Cash Management Agreements or Hedge Agreements if First Lien Agent receives notice of such Obligations, together with any supporting documentation First Lien Agent requests, from the applicable Person.

(d)   Except for obligations expressly provided for herein, the Control Agent and First Lien Claimholders will have no liability to any Second Lien Claimholder for any action by a First Lien Claimholder with respect to any First Lien Obligations or Collateral, including

(1)   the maintenance, preservation, or collection of First Lien Obligations or any Collateral, and

(2)   the foreclosure upon, or the sale, liquidation, maintenance, preservation, or other disposition of, any Collateral.

(e)   First Lien Agent will not have by reason of this Agreement or any other document a fiduciary relationship with any First Lien Claimholder or Second Lien Claimholder. The parties recognize that the interests of First Lien Agent and Second Lien Agent may differ, and First Lien Agent may act in its own interest without taking into account the interests of any Second Lien Claimholder.

1.8 PROHIBITION ON CONTESTING LIENS; NO MARSHALING

(a)   First Lien Agent will not contest in any proceeding (including an Insolvency Proceeding) the validity, enforceability, perfection, or priority of any Lien securing a Second Lien Obligation, but nothing in this section 1.8 will impair the rights of any First Lien Claimholder to enforce this Agreement, including the priority of the Liens securing the First Lien Obligations or the provisions for exercise of remedies.

(b)   Second Lien Agent will not contest in any proceeding (including an Insolvency Proceeding) the validity, enforceability, perfection, or priority of any Lien securing a First Lien Obligation up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, but nothing in this section 1.8 will impair the rights of any Second Lien Claimholder to enforce this Agreement, including the priority of the Liens securing the Second Lien Obligations or the provisions for exercise of remedies.20

(c)   Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations, Second Lien Agent will not assert any marshaling, appraisal, valuation, or other similar right that may otherwise be available to a junior secured creditor.21

 [ADDITIONAL SECTIONS MORE FAVORABLE TO SECOND LIEN LENDERS]

[(d)  The assertion in any proceeding (including an Insolvency Proceeding) or otherwise by one Party (Party A) of the invalidity or nonperfection of the other Party’s (Party B’s) security interest as a defense to a claim or assertion by Party B against Party A for or alleging breach of this Agreement arising out of Party A’s exercise or assertion of claims or other rights or enforcement of remedies under this Agreement or any First Lien Loan Documents or Second Lien Loan Documents, as applicable, will not be a “contest” for purposes of this section 1.8.

(e)   A Second Lien Claimholder who intends to assert a claim or exercise a right or remedy that would violate this Agreement but for the invalidity or nonperfection of the Lien purporting to secure First Lien Obligations will give First Lien Agent at least five Business Days’ prior notice of the contemplated action, stating the basis for the claimant’s belief that the invalidity or nonperfection exists.

(f)  No First Lien Claimholder or Second Lien Claimholder will assert a claim that challenges the perfection or validity of a Lien or Indebtedness of another Claimholder that is based on allegations

(1)   of fraudulent conveyance, unlawful payment of distributions to equity holders, or other like allegations, or

(2)   that could be asserted with comparable merit against Liens, interests, or rights of the Person asserting the claim.]

[END OF ADDITIONAL SECTIONS]

1.9    CONFIRMATION OF SUBORDINATION IN SECOND LIEN COLLATERAL DOCUMENTS

Borrower will cause each Second Lien Collateral Document to include the following language (or language to similar effect approved by First Lien Agent) and any other language First Lien Agent reasonably requests to reflect the subordination of the Lien:

Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Lien and security interest granted to Second Lien Agent pursuant to this Agreement and the exercise of any right or remedy by Second Lien Agent hereunder are subject to the provisions of the Intercreditor Agreement, dated ________ (as amended, restated, supplemented, or otherwise modified from time to time, the “Intercreditor Agreement”), among _______________, as First Lien Agent, ______________, as Second Lien Agent, ______________, as Control Agent, and the Grantors (as defined therein) from time to time party thereto and other persons party or that may become party thereto from time to time. If there is a conflict between the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement and this Agreement, the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement will control.

1.10    RELEASE OF LIENS [OR GUARANTIES]

(a)   If First Lien Agent releases a Lien on Collateral[, or releases a Grantor from its Obligations under its guaranty of the First Lien Obligations which guaranty is secured by a Lien on Collateral,22] in connection with:

(1)   an Enforcement Action, or

(2)   a Disposition of any Collateral under the First Lien Loan Documents other than pursuant to an Enforcement Action (whether or not there is an event of default under the First Lien Loan Documents),

then any Lien of Second Lien Agent on such Collateral[, and the Obligations of the Grantor under such guaranty of the Second Lien Obligations,] will be, except as otherwise provided below, automatically and simultaneously released to the same extent, and Second Lien Agent will promptly execute and deliver to First Lien Agent [or the Grantor] such termination statements, releases, and other documents as First Lien Agent [or the Grantor] requests to effectively confirm the release, provided that such release will not occur without the consent of Second Lien Agent

(x)   for an Enforcement Action, as to any Collateral the net Proceeds of the disposition of which will not be applied to repay (and, to the extent applicable, to reduce permanently commitments with respect to) the First Lien Obligations, or

(y)   for a Disposition, if the Disposition is prohibited by a provision of the Second Lien Credit Agreement [other than solely as the result of the existence of a default or event of default under the Second Lien Loan Documents].23

(b)   Second Lien Agent hereby appoints First Lien Agent and any officer or agent of First Lien Agent, with full power of substitution, as its true and lawful attorney-in-fact with full power and authority in the place and stead of Second Lien Agent or in First Lien Agent’s own name, in First Lien Agent’s discretion to take any action and to execute any and all documents and instruments that may be reasonable and appropriate for the limited purpose of carrying out the terms of this section 1.10, including any endorsements or other instruments of transfer or release. This appointment is coupled with an interest and is irrevocable until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations or such time as this Agreement is terminated in accordance with its terms.

(c)   Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations, to the extent that First Lien Agent

(1)   releases a Lien on Collateral or a Grantor from its Obligations under its guaranty, which Lien or guaranty is reinstated, or

(2)   obtains a new Lien or additional guaranty from a Grantor, then Second Lien Agent will be granted a Lien on such Collateral and an additional guaranty, as the case may be, subject to section 1.1, “Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations.”

1.11    SUBORDINATION OF LIENS SECURING EXCESS FIRST LIEN OBLIGATIONS24

(a)   If this Agreement provides for a Second Lien Cap, then all Liens securing Second Lien Obligations up to but not exceeding the Second Lien Cap will be senior in all respects and prior to any Lien on the Collateral securing any Excess First Lien Obligations, as defined below (but only with respect to such excess amounts), and all Liens securing any Excess First Lien Obligations will be junior and subordinate in all respects to any Lien securing a Second Lien Obligation up to but not exceeding the Second Lien Cap. All Liens securing Excess First Lien Obligations will be senior in all respects and prior to any Lien on the Collateral securing any Excess Second Lien Obligations and all Liens securing any Excess Second Lien Obligations will be junior and subordinate in all respects and prior to any Lien securing Excess First Lien Obligations.
Example25: Suppose First Lien Obligations are $150 million, with a First Lien Cap of $100 million; Second Lien Obligations are $50 million, with a Second Lien Cap of $20 million; and the total Collateral has a fair market value of $175 million. Then First Lien Claimholders will have a first priority Lien on the first $100 million of Collateral (including Proceeds), Second Lien Claimholders will have a second priority Lien in the next $20 million of Collateral, First Lien Claimholders will have a third priority Lien in the remaining $55 million of Collateral up to the $50 million of Excess First Lien Obligations, and Second Lien Claimholders will have a fourth priority Lien in the remaining $5 million of Collateral. If all of the Collateral is sold at its fair market value, then the $175 million in sales proceeds will be sufficient to pay the First Lien Obligations of $150 million in full and $25 million of the Second Lien Obligations. See also section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds.”

(b)   If this Agreement provides for a First Lien Cap but does not provide for a maximum limitation of the amount of the Second Lien Obligations (i.e., a Second Lien Cap), then all Liens securing Second Lien Obligations will be senior in all respects and prior to any Lien on the Collateral securing any Excess First Lien Obligations, as defined below (but only with respect to such excess amounts), and all Liens securing any Excess First Lien Obligations will be junior and subordinate in all respects to any Lien securing a Second Lien Obligation.
Example: Suppose First Lien Obligations are $150 million, with a First Lien Cap of $100 million; Second Lien Obligations are $50 million with no Second Lien Cap; and the total Collateral has a fair market value of $175 million. Then First Lien Claimholders will have a first priority Lien on the first $100 million of Collateral (including Proceeds), Second Lien Claimholders will have a second priority Lien in the next $50 million of Collateral, and First Lien Claimholders will have a third priority Lien on the remaining $25 million in Collateral. If all of the Collateral is sold at its fair market value, then the $175 million in sales proceeds will be sufficient to pay $125 million of the First Lien Obligations of $150 million and the Second Lien Obligations totaling $50 million in full. See also section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds.”

(c)   Excess First Lien Obligations means any First Lien Obligations that are included in the Capped Obligations and that are in excess of the First Lien Cap.

(d)   With respect to the Excess First Lien Obligations and Collateral (including Proceeds),

(1)   First Lien Claimholders will have rights and obligations (other than the obligations in respect to the Standstill Period) analogous to the rights and obligations Second Lien Claimholders have under this Agreement with respect to the Second Lien Obligations [not in excess of any Second Lien Cap] and the Collateral (including Proceeds), and

(2)   Second Lien Claimholders will have rights and obligations analogous to the rights and obligations First Lien Claimholders have under this Agreement with respect to the First Lien Obligations that are included in the Capped Obligations and that are not in excess of the First Lien Cap, and the Collateral (including Proceeds).

(e)   Nothing in this section 1.11 will waive any default or event of default under the Second Lien Loan Documents resulting from

(1)   the incurrence of Obligations under the First Lien Loan Documents in excess of the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations, or

(2)   the grant of Liens under the First Lien Collateral Documents securing any such excess amounts,

or the right of Second Lien Claimholders to exercise any rights and remedies under the Second Lien Loan Documents as a result thereof.

2   MODIFICATION OF OBLIGATIONS26

2.1    PERMITTED MODIFICATIONS27

Except as otherwise expressly provided in this section 2,

(a)   the First Lien Obligations may be modified in accordance with their terms, and their aggregate amount increased or Refinanced, without notice to or consent by any Second Lien Claimholder, provided that the holders of any Refinancing Indebtedness (or their agent) bind themselves in a writing addressed to Second Lien Claimholders to the terms of this Agreement, and

(b)   the Second Lien Obligations may be modified in accordance with their terms, and their aggregate amount increased or Refinanced, without notice to or consent by any First Lien Claimholder, provided that the holders of any Refinancing Indebtedness (or their agent) bind themselves in a writing addressed to First Lien Claimholders to the terms of this Agreement.

However, no such modification may alter or otherwise affect sections 1.1, “Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations,” or 1.8, “Prohibition on Contesting Liens; No Marshaling.”

2.2    MODIFICATIONS REQUIRING CONSENT28

Notwithstanding the preceding section 2.1, [and except as otherwise permitted as DIP Financing provided by the First Lien Lenders and deemed consented to by the Second Lien Lenders pursuant to section 6.1, “Use of Cash Collateral and DIP Financing,”] Second Lien Agent must consent to any modification to or Refinancing of the First Lien Obligations, and First Lien Agent must consent to any modification to or Refinancing of the Second Lien Obligations, that:

(a)   increases the aggregate principal amount of loans, letters of credit, bankers acceptances, bonds, debentures, notes, or similar instruments or other similar extensions of credit [(but excluding obligations under Hedge Agreements or Cash Management Agreements) [and, for Second Lien Obligations, any increase resulting from payment of interest in kind permitted under the Second Lien Credit Agreement as in effect on the date hereof]] or commitments therefor beyond

(1)   for the First Lien Obligations, the amount permitted by the First Lien Cap, or29

(2)   for the Second Lien Obligations, the [amount theretofore permitted under the First Lien Credit Agreement][the amount permitted by the Second Lien Cap];

(b)   increases

(1)   the interest rate or yield, including by increasing the “applicable margin” or similar component of the interest rate or by modifying the method of computing interest, or

(2)   a letter of credit, commitment, facility, utilization, or similar fee so that the combined interest rate and fees are increased by more than [_____]% per annum30 in the aggregate [at any level of pricing], but excluding increases resulting from (A) increases in an underlying reference rate not caused by a modification or Refinancing of such Obligations,

(B)   accrual of interest at the “default rate” defined in the loan documents at the date hereof or, for a Refinancing, a rate that corresponds to the default rate, or

(C)   application of a pricing grid set forth in the loan documents at the date hereof;

(c)   for the First Lien Obligations, extends a scheduled amortization payment or the scheduled final maturity date of the First Lien Credit Agreement or a Refinancing beyond the scheduled final maturity date of the Second Lien Credit Agreement or Refinancing;

(d)   for the First Lien Obligations, modifies a mandatory prepayment provision in a manner [prohibited by the Second Lien Credit Agreement][that allows amounts that would otherwise be required to be used to prepay First Lien Obligations to be retained by the Grantors to an amount greater than permitted under the Second Lien Credit Agreement];

(e)   for the First Lien Obligations, increases the amount of Proceeds of dispositions of Collateral that are not required to be used to prepay First Lien Obligations and that may be retained by the Grantors to an amount greater than permitted under the Second Lien Credit Agreement;

(f)   for the First Lien Obligations, modifies a covenant or event of default that directly restricts one or more Grantors from making payments under the Second Lien Loan Documents that would otherwise be permitted under the First Lien Loan Documents as in effect on the date hereof;

(g)   for the Second Lien Obligations, modifies covenants, defaults, or events of default to make them materially more restrictive as to any Grantor, except for modifications to match changes made to the First Lien Obligations so as to preserve, on substantially similar economic terms, any differential that exists on the date hereof between the covenants, defaults, or events of default in the First Lien Loan Documents and the covenants, defaults, or events of default in the Second Lien Loan Documents;

(h)   for the Second Lien Obligations, accelerates any date upon which a scheduled payment of principal or interest is due, or otherwise decreases the weighted average life to maturity;

(i)   for the Second Lien Obligations, changes a prepayment, redemption, or defeasance provision so as to require a new payment or accelerate an existing payment Obligation; or

(j)   for the Second Lien Obligations,

(1)   changes a term that would result in a default under the First Lien Credit Agreement,

(2)   increases the Obligations of a Grantor, or

(3) confers additional rights on a Second Lien Claimholder in a manner materially adverse to a First Lien Claimholder.

[ADDITIONAL SECTION FOR ASSET-BASED LENDING TRANSACTION]

[(*)  for the First Lien Obligations, increases the Advance Rate applicable to the Borrowing Base to a rate higher than the Advance Rate on the date hereof, or modifies the definitions of “Borrowing Base,” “Eligible Account,” “Eligible Inventory,” or “Reserves” in the First Lien Credit Agreement on the date hereof so as to increase the amount of credit available to Borrower, provided that First Lien Agent’s discretion to establish additional reserves, to release reserves, and to determine eligibility will not be affected or limited in any manner.]

[END OF ADDITIONAL SECTION]

2.3    PARALLEL MODIFICATIONS TO SECOND LIEN OBLIGATIONS31

Subject to Section 2.2, “Modifications Requiring Consent,” if a First Lien Claimholder and a Grantor modify a First Lien Collateral Document, the modification will apply automatically to any comparable provision of a Second Lien Collateral Document in which the Grantor grants a Lien on the same Collateral, without the consent of any Second Lien Claimholder and without any action by Second Lien Agent or any Grantor, provided that no such modification will

(a)   remove or release Second Lien Collateral, except to the extent that (1) the release is permitted or required by section 6.1, “Use of Cash Collateral and DIP Financing ,” and (2) there is a corresponding release of First Lien Collateral,

(b)   impose duties on Second Lien Agent without its consent, [or]

(c)   permit other Liens on the Collateral not permitted under the terms of the Second Lien Loan Documents or section 6, “Insolvency Proceedings,” of this Agreement[, or (d) be prejudicial to the interest of Second Lien Claimholders to a greater extent than First Lien Claimholders (other than by virtue of their relative priorities and rights and obligations hereunder)].

2.4    NOTICE OF MODIFICATIONS32

First Lien Agent will notify Second Lien Agent, and Second Lien Agent will notify First Lien Agent, of each modification to the First Lien Obligations or Second Lien Obligations, respectively, within ten Business Days after the modification’s effective date and, if requested by the notified Agent, promptly provide copies of any documents executed and delivered in connection with the modification.

Notice and copies will not be required to the extent Borrower or a Grantor has provided the same to the Agent to be notified.

3   ENFORCEMENT33

3.1    WHO MAY EXERCISE REMEDIES

(a)   Subject to subsections (b) and (c) below, until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, First Lien Claimholders will have the exclusive right to

(1)   commence and maintain an Enforcement Action (including the rights to set off or credit bid their debt),

(2)   subject to section 1.10, “Release of Liens or Guaranties,” make determinations regarding the release or disposition of, or restrictions with respect to, the Collateral, and

(3)   otherwise enforce the rights and remedies of a secured creditor under the U.C.C. and the Bankruptcy Laws of any applicable jurisdiction, so long as any Proceeds received by First Lien Agent and other First Lien Claimholders in the aggregate in excess of those necessary to achieve Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to First Lien Obligations that are Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations are distributed in accordance with Section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds,” except as otherwise required pursuant to the U.C.C. and applicable law,34 subject to the relative priorities described in section 1.1, “Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations .”

(b)   Notwithstanding the preceding section 3.1(a), Second Lien Claimholders may commence an Enforcement Action or exercise rights with respect to a Lien securing a Second Lien Obligation if

(1)   [120–180] days have elapsed since Second Lien Agent notified First Lien Agent that the Second Lien Obligations were due in full as a result of acceleration or otherwise (the Standstill Period),35

(2)   First Lien Claimholders are not then diligently pursuing an Enforcement Action with respect to all or a material portion of the Collateral or diligently attempting to vacate any stay or prohibition against such exercise, [and]

(3)   any acceleration of the Second Lien Obligations has not been rescinded[, and

(4)   [no][the applicable] Grantor is [not] then a debtor in an Insolvency Proceeding].36

(c)   Notwithstanding section 3.1(a), [but subject to section 1.5, “First and Second Lien Collateral to Be Identical,”] a Second Lien Claimholder may

(1)   file a proof of claim or statement of interest, vote on a plan of reorganization (including a vote to accept or reject a plan of partial or complete liquidation, reorganization, arrangement, composition, or extension), and make other filings, arguments, and motions, with respect to the Second Lien Obligations and the Collateral in any Insolvency Proceeding commenced by or against any Grantor, in each case in accordance with this Agreement,

(2)   take action to create, perfect, preserve, or protect its Lien on the Collateral, so long as such actions are not adverse to the priority status in accordance with this Agreement of Liens on the Collateral securing the First Lien Obligations or First Lien Claimholders’ rights to exercise remedies,

(3)   file necessary pleadings in opposition to a claim objecting to or otherwise seeking the disallowance of a Second Lien Obligation or a Lien securing the Second Lien Obligation,

(4)   join (but not exercise any control over) a judicial foreclosure or Lien enforcement proceeding with respect to the Collateral initiated by First Lien Agent, to the extent that such action could not reasonably be expected to interfere materially with the Enforcement Action, but no Second Lien Claimholder may receive any Proceeds thereof unless expressly permitted herein, and

(5)   bid for or purchase Collateral at any public, private, or judicial foreclosure upon such Collateral initiated by any First Lien Claimholder, or any sale of Collateral during an Insolvency Proceeding; provided that such bid may not include a “credit bid” in respect of any Second Lien Obligations unless the proceeds of such bid are otherwise sufficient to cause the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations.

[OPTIONAL PROVISIONS]

[(6)  take or fail to take any Lien securing First Lien Obligations or any other collateral security therefor, or take or fail to take any action necessary or appropriate to ensure that any Lien is enforceable, perfected, or entitled to priority as against any other Lien or to ensure that any Proceeds of any property subject to a Lien are applied to the payment of any Obligation secured thereby, or

(7)   otherwise release, discharge, or permit the lapse of any Lien securing a First Lien Obligation.]

[END OF OPTIONAL PROVISIONS]

(d)   [Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement] [Except as otherwise expressly set forth in this section 3.1 [and ________]],37 Second Lien Claimholders may exercise any rights and remedies that could be exercised by an unsecured creditor [other than initiating or joining in an involuntary case or proceeding under the Bankruptcy Code with respect to a Grantor][prior to the end of the Standstill Period] against a Grantor that has guaranteed or granted Liens to secure the Second Lien Obligations in accordance with the terms of the Second Lien Loan Documents and applicable law, provided that any judgment Lien obtained by a Second Lien Claimholder as a result of such exercise of rights will be included in the Second Lien Collateral and be subject to this Agreement for all purposes (including in relation to the First Lien Obligations).

[OPTIONAL PROVISION]

[(e)  First Lien Agent will promptly notify Second Lien Agent of the Discharge of First Lien Obligations.]

[END OF OPTIONAL PROVISION]

3.2    MANNER OF EXERCISE38

(a)   A First Lien Claimholder may take any Enforcement Action

(1)   in any manner in its sole discretion in compliance with applicable law,

(2)   without consultation with or the consent of any Second Lien Claimholder,

(3)   regardless of whether an Insolvency Proceeding has been commenced,

(4) regardless of any provision of any Second Lien Loan Document (other than this Agreement), and

(5) regardless of whether such exercise is adverse to the interest of any Second Lien Claimholder.

(b)   The rights of a First Lien Claimholder or the Control Agent to enforce any provision of this Agreement or any First Lien Loan Document will not be prejudiced or impaired by

(1)   any act or failure to act of any Grantor, any other First Lien Claimholder, or the Control Agent, or

(2)   noncompliance by any Person other than such First Lien Claimholder with any provision of this Agreement, any First Lien Loan Document, or any Second Lien Loan Document, regardless of any knowledge thereof that any First Lien Claimholder or the Control Agent may have or otherwise be charged with.

(c)   No Second Lien Claimholder will contest, protest, object to, or take any action to hinder, and each waives any and all claims with respect to, any Enforcement Action by a First Lien Claimholder in compliance with this Agreement and applicable law.

3.3    SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE39

First Lien Agent and Second Lien Agent may each demand specific performance of this Agreement, and each waives any defense based on the adequacy of a remedy at law and any other defense that might be asserted to bar the remedy of specific performance in any action brought by a Second Lien Claimholder or a First Lien Claimholder, respectively.

3.4    NOTICE OF EXERCISE40

The First and Second Lien Agents will each provide reasonable prior notice to the other of its initial material Enforcement Action.

4   PAYMENTS

4.1    APPLICATION OF PROCEEDS41

Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations and the Discharge of Second Lien Obligations, and regardless of whether an Insolvency Proceeding has been commenced, Collateral or Proceeds received in connection with an Enforcement Action or subject to section 6.7, “Reorganization Securities,” received in connection with any Insolvency Proceeding involving a Grantor will be applied

(a)   first, to the payment in full or cash collateralization of all First Lien Obligations that are not Excess First Lien Obligations,

(b)   second, to the payment in full of the Second Lien Obligations [that are not Excess Second Lien Obligations],

(c)   third, to the payment in full of any Excess First Lien Obligations[,

(d)   fourth, to the payment in full of any Excess Second Lien Obligations],42 and

(e)   fifth, to the applicable Grantor or as otherwise required by applicable law.

in each case as specified in the First Lien Documents or the Second Lien Documents, or as otherwise determined by the First Lien Claimholders or the Second Lien Claimholders, as applicable.

[Notwithstanding the foregoing, until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to First Lien Obligations that are capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, any non-cash Collateral or non-cash Proceeds will be held by First Lien Agent as Collateral unless the failure to apply such amounts as set forth above would be commercially unreasonable.43]

4.2    INSURANCE44

First Lien Agent and Second Lien Agent will be named as additional insureds and/or loss payees, as applicable, under any insurance policies maintained by any Grantor. Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, and subject to the rights of the Grantors under the First Lien Loan Documents,

(a)   First Lien Agent will have the exclusive right to adjust settlement for any losses covered by an insurance policy covering the Collateral, and to approve an award granted in a condemnation or similar proceeding (or a deed in lieu of condemnation) affecting the Collateral, and

(b)   all Proceeds of such policy, award, or deed will be applied in the order provided in section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds,” and thereafter, if no Second Lien Obligations are outstanding, to the payment to the owner of the subject property, such other Person as may be entitled thereto, or as a court of competent jurisdiction may otherwise direct.

4.3    PAYMENT TURNOVER45

Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, whether or not an Insolvency Proceeding has commenced, Collateral or Proceeds (including insurance proceeds or property or Proceeds subject to Liens referred to in paragraph (d) of section 1.5, “First and Second Lien Collateral to Be Identical”) received by a Second Lien Claimholder in connection with an Enforcement Action or, subject to section 6.7, “Reorganization Securities,” received in connection with any Insolvency Proceeding, will be

(a)   segregated and held in trust, and

(b)   promptly paid over to First Lien Agent in the form received, with any necessary endorsements or as a court of competent jurisdiction may otherwise direct. First Lien Agent is authorized to make such endorsements as agent for the Second Lien Claimholder. This authorization is coupled with an interest and is irrevocable until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations.

4.4    REFINANCING AFTER DISCHARGE OF FIRST LIEN OBLIGATIONS46

If, after the Discharge of First Lien Obligations, Borrower issues or incurs Refinancing47 of the First Lien Obligations that is permitted to be incurred under the Second Lien Loan Documents, then the First Lien Obligations will automatically be deemed not to have been discharged for all purposes of this Agreement (except for actions taken as a result of the initial Discharge of First Lien Obligations). Upon Second Lien Agent’s receipt of a notice stating that Borrower has entered into a new First Lien Loan Document and identifying the new First Lien Agent (the New Agent),

(a)   the Obligations under such Refinancing indebtedness will automatically be treated as First Lien Obligations for all purposes of this Agreement, including for purposes of the Lien priorities and rights in respect of Collateral set forth herein,

(b)   the New Agent under such new First Lien Loan Documents will be First Lien Agent for all purposes of this Agreement,

(c)   Second Lien Agent will promptly

(1)   enter into such documents and agreements (including amendments or supplements to this Agreement) as Borrower or the New Agent reasonably requests to provide to the New Agent the rights contemplated hereby, in each case consistent in all material respects with the terms of this Agreement, and

(2)   deliver to the New Agent any Pledged Collateral held by it together with any necessary endorsements (or otherwise allow the New Agent to obtain control of such Pledged Collateral), and

(d)   the New Agent will promptly agree in a writing addressed to Second Lien Agent to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.

If any Obligations under the new First Lien Loan Documents are secured by Collateral that does not also secure the Second Lien Obligations, then the Grantors will cause the Second Lien Obligations to be secured at such time by a second priority Lien on such Collateral to the same extent provided in the First Lien Collateral Documents and this Agreement.

5   PURCHASE OF FIRST LIEN OBLIGATIONS BY SECOND LIEN CLAIMHOLDERS48

5.1    PURCHASE RIGHT

(a)   If there is

(1)   an acceleration of the First Lien Obligations in accordance with the First Lien Credit Agreement,

(2)   a payment default under the First Lien Credit Agreement that is not cured, or waived by First Lien Claimholders, within sixty days of its occurrence, or

(3)   the commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding,49 (each a Purchase Event), then Second Lien Claimholders may purchase all, but not less than all, of the First Lien Obligations that are included in the Capped Obligations up to but not in excess of the First Lien Cap plus all, but not less than all, of the First Lien Obligations that are not included in the Capped Obligations (the Purchase Obligations). Such purchase will

(A)   include all principal of, and all accrued and unpaid interest, fees, and expenses in respect of, all First Lien Obligations outstanding at the time of purchase that are included in the Capped Obligations up to but not in excess of the First Lien Cap plus all principal of, and all accrued and unpaid interest, fees, and expenses in respect of, all First Lien Obligations that are not included in the Capped Obligations,

(B)   be made pursuant to an Assignment Agreement [(as such term is defined in the First Lien Credit Agreement)][substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit A (the bracketed provisions therein to be appropriately modified to reflect the terms of the First Lien Documents and the outstanding First Lien Obligations)][in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to, and prepared by counsel for, First Lien Agent (with the cost of such counsel to be paid by the Purchasing Creditors)], whereby Second Lien Claimholders will assume all funding commitments and Obligations of First Lien Claimholders under the First Lien Loan Documents, and

(C)   otherwise be subject to the terms and conditions of this section 5.

Each First Lien Claimholder will retain all rights to indemnification provided in the relevant First Lien Loan Documents for all claims and other amounts relating to periods prior to the purchase of the First Lien Obligations pursuant to this section 5.

(b)   First Lien Claimholders will not commence an Enforcement Action while Second Lien Claimholders have a right to purchase the First Lien Obligations under this section 5.50

5.2    PURCHASE NOTICE

(a)   Second Lien Claimholders desiring to purchase all of the Purchase Obligations (the Purchasing Creditors) will deliver a Purchase Notice to First Lien Agent that

(1)   is signed by the Purchasing Creditors,

(2)   states that it is a Purchase Notice under this section 5,

(3)   states that each Purchasing Creditor is irrevocably electing to purchase, in accordance with this section 5, the percentage of all of the Purchase Obligations51 stated in the Purchase Notice for that Purchasing Creditor, which percentages must aggregate exactly 100% for all Purchasing Creditors,52

(4)   represents and warrants that the Purchase Notice is in conformity with the Second Lien Loan Documents and any other binding agreement among Second Lien Claimholders, and

(5)   designates a Purchase Date on which the purchase will occur, that is (x) at least five but not more than [fifteen] Business Days after First Lien Agent’s receipt of the Purchase Notice, and (y) not more than sixty days after the Purchase Event.

A Purchase Notice will be ineffective if it is received by First Lien Agent after the occurrence giving rise to the Purchase Event is waived, cured, or otherwise ceases to exist.

[ALTERNATIVE SUBSECTION FAVORABLE TO SECOND LIEN LENDERS]

[(5)  designates a Purchase Date on which the purchase will occur that is at least five but not more than [fifteen] Business Days after First Lien Agent’s receipt of the Purchase Notice.

The Purchase Notice must be received by First Lien Agent during the period following the occurrence of, and during the continuance of, a Purchase Event.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE SUBSECTION]

(b)   Upon First Lien Agent’s receipt of an effective Purchase Notice conforming to this section 5.2, the Purchasing Creditors will be irrevocably obligated to purchase, and the First Lien Creditors will be irrevocably obligated to sell, the First Lien Obligations in accordance with and subject to this section 5.

5.3    PURCHASE PRICE

The Purchase Price for the Purchase Obligations will equal the sum of

(a)   the principal amount of all loans, advances, or similar extensions of credit included in the Purchase Obligations (including unreimbursed amounts drawn on Letters of Credit, but excluding the undrawn amount of outstanding Letters of Credit), and all accrued and unpaid interest thereon through the Purchase Date ([including][excluding] any acceleration prepayment penalties or premiums53),

(b)   the net aggregate amount then owing to counterparties under Hedge Agreements that are First Lien Loan Documents, including all amounts owing to the counterparties as a result of the termination (or early termination) thereof to the extent not allocable to Excess First Lien Obligations,

(c)   the net aggregate amount then owing to creditors under Cash Management Agreements that are First Lien Loan Documents, including all amounts owing to the creditors as a result of the termination (or early termination) thereof to the extent not allocable to Excess First Lien Obligations, and

(d)   all accrued and unpaid fees, expenses, [indemnities,] and other amounts owed to the First Lien Creditors under the First Lien Loan Documents on the Purchase Date to the extent not allocable to Excess First Lien Obligations.

5.4    PURCHASE CLOSING

On the Purchase Date,

(a)   the Purchasing Creditors and First Lien Agent will execute and deliver the Assignment Agreement,

(b)   the Purchasing Creditors will pay the Purchase Price to First Lien Agent by wire transfer of immediately available funds,

(c)   the Purchasing Creditors will deposit with First Lien Agent or its designee by wire transfer of immediately available funds, [105%] of the aggregate undrawn amount of all then outstanding Letters of Credit and the aggregate facing and similar fees that will accrue thereon through the stated maturity of the Letters of Credit (assuming no drawings thereon before stated maturity), and

(d)   Second Lien Agent will execute and deliver to First Lien Agent a waiver of all claims arising out of this Agreement and the transactions contemplated hereby as a result of exercising the purchase option contemplated by this section 5.

5.5    EXCESS FIRST LIEN OBLIGATIONS NOT PURCHASED

Any Excess First Lien Obligations will, after the closing of the purchase of the First Lien Obligations in accordance with this section 5, remain Excess First Lien Obligations for all purposes of this Agreement.54

5.6    ACTIONS AFTER PURCHASE CLOSING

(a)   Promptly after the closing of the purchase of all Purchase Obligations, First Lien Agent will distribute the Purchase Price to First Lien Claimholders in accordance with the terms of the First Lien Loan Documents.

(b)   After the closing of the purchase of all Purchase Obligations, the Purchasing Creditors may request that First Lien Agent immediately resign as administrative agent and, if applicable, collateral agent under the First Lien Loan Documents, and First Lien Agent will immediately resign if so requested. Upon such resignation, a new administrative agent and, if applicable, a new collateral agent will be elected or appointed in accordance with the First Lien Loan Documents.

(c)   First Lien Agent will apply cash collateral to reimburse Letter of Credit issuers for drawings under Letters of Credit, any customary fees charged by the issuer in connection with such draws, and facing or similar fees. After giving effect to each such payment, any remaining cash collateral that exceeds [105%] of the sum of the aggregate undrawn amount of all then outstanding Letters of Credit and the aggregate facing and similar fees that will accrue thereon through the stated maturity of such Letters of Credit (assuming no drawings thereon before stated maturity) will be returned to the Purchasing Creditors (as their interests appear). When all Letters of Credit have been cancelled with the consent of the beneficiary thereof, expired, or been fully drawn, and after all payments from the account described above have been made, any remaining cash collateral will be returned to the Purchasing Creditors, as their interests appear.

(d)   If for any reason other than the gross negligence or willful misconduct of First Lien Agent, the cash collateral is less than the amount owing with respect to a Letter of Credit described in the preceding subsection (c), then the Purchasing Creditors will, in proportion to their interests, promptly reimburse First Lien Agent (who will then pay the issuing bank) the amount of the deficiency.

5.7    NO RECOURSE OR WARRANTIES; DEFAULTING CREDITORS

(a)   First Lien Claimholders will be entitled to rely on the statements, representations, and warranties in the Purchase Notice without investigation, even if First Lien Claimholders are notified that any such statement, representation, or warranty is not or may not be true.

(b)   The purchase and sale of the First Lien Obligations under this section 5 will be without recourse and without representation or warranty of any kind by First Lien Claimholders, except that First Lien Claimholders represent and warrant that on the Purchase Date, immediately before giving effect to the purchase,

(1)   the principal of and accrued and unpaid interest on the First Lien Obligations, and the fees and expenses thereof, are as stated in the Assignment Agreement,

(2)   First Lien Claimholders own the First Lien Obligations free and clear of any Liens (other than participation interests not prohibited by the First Lien Credit Agreement, in which case the Purchase Price will be appropriately adjusted so that the Purchasing Creditors do not pay amounts represented by participation interests), and

(3)   each First Lien Claimholder has the full right and power to assign its First Lien Obligations and such assignment has been duly authorized by all necessary corporate action by such First Lien Claimholder.

[ALTERNATIVE SECTION FAVORABLE TO FIRST LIEN LENDERS]

[(b)  The purchase and sale of the Purchase Obligations under this section 5 will be without recourse and without any representation or warranty whatsoever by First Lien Claimholders, except that First Lien Claimholders represent and warrant that on the Purchase Date, immediately before giving effect to the purchase, First Lien Claimholders

(1)   own the Purchase Obligations free and clear of all Liens (other than participation interests not prohibited by the First Lien Credit Agreement, in which case the Purchase Price will be appropriately adjusted so that the Purchasing Creditors do not pay amounts represented by participation interest), and

(2)   have the right to convey whatever claims and interests they may have in respect of the Purchase Obligations.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE SECTION]

(c)   The obligations of First Lien Claimholders to sell their respective Purchase Obligations under this section 5 are several and not joint and several. If a First Lien Claimholder (a Defaulting Creditor) breaches its obligation to sell its Purchase Obligations under this section 5, no other First Lien Claimholder will be obligated to purchase the Defaulting Creditor’s Purchase Obligations for resale to the holders of Second Lien Obligations. A First Lien Claimholder that complies with this section 5 will not be in default of this Agreement or otherwise be deemed liable for any action or inaction of any Defaulting Creditor, provided that nothing in this subsection (c) will require the Purchasing Creditors to purchase less than all of the Purchase Obligations.

(d)   Borrower and Holdings irrevocably consent, and will use their best efforts to obtain any necessary consent of each other Grantor, to any assignment effected to one or more Purchasing Creditors pursuant to this section 5.

6   INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS55

6.1    USE OF CASH COLLATERAL AND DIP FINANCING56

(a)   Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, if an Insolvency Proceeding has commenced, Second Lien Agent, as holder of a Lien on the Collateral, will not contest, protest, or object to, and each Second Lien Claimholder will be deemed to have consented to,

(1)   any use, sale, or lease of “cash collateral” (as defined in section 363(a) of the Bankruptcy Code), and

(2)   Borrower or any other Grantor obtaining DIP Financing if First Lien Agent consents57 in writing to such use, sale, or lease, or DIP Financing, provided that

(A)   Second Lien Agent otherwise retains58 its Lien on the Collateral, [and]

(B)   any Second Lien Claimholder may seek adequate protection as permitted by section 6.4, “Adequate Protection,” and, if such adequate protection is not granted, Second Lien Agent may object under this section 6.1 solely on such basis[.][,]

[(C) after taking into account the use of cash collateral and the principal amount of any DIP Financing (after giving effect to any Refinancing of First Lien Obligations) on any date, the sum of the then outstanding principal amount of any First Lien Obligations and any DIP Financing does not exceed the First Lien Cap59 on such date,60

(D)   such DIP Financing and the Liens securing such DIP Financing are pari passu with or superior in priority to the then outstanding First Lien Obligations and the Liens securing such First Lien Obligations,61 and

(E)   the interest rate, fees, advance rates, lending limits, and sublimits are commercially reasonable under the circumstances.62]

[Upon written request from First Lien Agent, Second Lien Agent, as holder of a Lien on the Collateral, will join any objection by First Lien Agent to the use, sale, or lease of cash collateral for any purpose other than adequate protection payments to Second Lien Claimholders.]63

[(b)  Any customary “carve-out” or other similar administrative priority expense or claim consented to in writing by First Lien Agent to be paid prior to the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations will be deemed for purposes of section 6.1(a)

(1)   to be a use of cash collateral, and

(2)   [not to be] a principal amount of DIP Financing
at the time of such consent.]64
[No Second Lien Claimholder may provide DIP Financing to a Borrower or other Grantor secured by Liens equal or senior in priority to the Liens securing any First Lien Obligations[, provided that if no First Lien Claimholder offers to provide DIP Financing to the extent permitted under section 6.1(a) on or before the date of the hearing to approve DIP Financing, then a Second Lien Claimholder may seek to provide such DIP Financing secured by Liens equal or senior in priority to the Liens securing any First Lien Obligations, and First Lien Claimholders may object thereto].]65

[(c) Nothing in this section 6.1 limits or impairs the right of Second Lien Agent to object to any motion regarding DIP Financing (including a DIP Financing proposed by one or more First Lien Claimholders) or cash collateral to the extent that

(1)   the objection could be asserted in an Insolvency Proceeding by unsecured creditors generally[, is consistent with the other terms of this section 6.1, and is not based on the status of any Second Lien Claimholder as holder of a Lien], or

(2)   the DIP Financing does not meet the requirements of section 6.1(a).]66

6.2    SALE OF COLLATERAL67

Second Lien Agent, as holder of a Lien on the Collateral and on behalf of the Second Lien Claimholders, will not contest, protest, or object, and will be deemed to have consented pursuant to section 363(f) of the Bankruptcy Code, to a Disposition of Collateral free and clear of its Liens or other interests under section 363 of the Bankruptcy Code if First Lien Agent consents in writing to the Disposition, provided that

(a)   either (i) pursuant to court order, the Liens of Second Lien Claimholders attach to the net Proceeds of the Disposition with the same priority and validity as the Liens held by Second Lien Claimholders on such Collateral, and the Liens remain subject to the terms of this Agreement, or (ii) the Proceeds of a Disposition of Collateral received by First Lien Agent in excess of those necessary to achieve the Discharge of First Lien Obligations, up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, are distributed in accordance with the U.C.C. and applicable law[,][.]

[(b)  the net cash Proceeds of the Disposition that are applied to First Lien Obligations permanently reduce the First Lien Obligations pursuant to section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds,” or if not so applied, are subject to the rights of Second Lien Agent to object to any further use notwithstanding section 6.1(a),68 and

(c)   Second Lien Claimholders [may][are not deemed to have waived any rights to]69 credit bid on the Collateral in any such Disposition in accordance with section 363(k) of the Bankruptcy Code.70]

Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, Second Lien Claimholders may object to any Disposition of Collateral that could be raised in an Insolvency Proceeding by unsecured creditors generally [so long as not otherwise inconsistent with the terms of this Agreement].71

[Upon First Lien Agent’s request, Second Lien Agent, solely in its capacity as holder of a Lien on Collateral, will join any objection asserted by First Lien Agent to any Disposition of Collateral during an Insolvency Proceeding.]72

6.3    RELIEF FROM THE AUTOMATIC STAY73

Until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, no Second Lien Claimholder may[, during any Standstill Period,]74 seek relief from the automatic stay or any other stay in an Insolvency Proceeding in respect of the Collateral without First Lien Agent’s prior written consent [or oppose any request by First Lien Agent for relief from such stay]75 [, except to the extent that

[a First Lien Claimholder (in such capacity)] [First Lien Agent] seeks or obtains relief from or modification of such stay[, or a motion for adequate protection permitted under section 6.4, “Adequate Protection,” is denied by the Bankruptcy Court]].76

6.4    ADEQUATE PROTECTION77

(a)   No Second Lien Claimholder will contest, protest, or object to

(1)   a request by a First Lien Claimholder for “adequate protection” under any Bankruptcy Law, or

(2)   an objection by a First Lien Claimholder to a motion, relief, action, or proceeding based on a First Lien Claimholder claiming a lack of adequate protection.

(b)   Notwithstanding the preceding section 6.4(a), in an Insolvency Proceeding:

(1)   Except as permitted in this section 6.4, no Second Lien Claimholders may seek or request adequate protection or relief from the automatic stay imposed by section 362 of the Bankruptcy Code [or other relief].78

(2)   [If a First Lien Claimholder is granted adequate protection in the form of additional or replacement Collateral in connection with a motion described in section 6.1,79Use of Cash Collateral and DIP Financing,” then] Second Lien Agent may seek or request adequate protection in the form of a Lien on [such] additional or replacement Collateral, which Lien will be subordinated to the Liens securing the First Lien Obligations and any DIP Financing (and all related Obligations) on the same basis as the other Liens securing the Second Lien Obligations are subordinated to the Liens securing First Lien Obligations under this Agreement.

(3)   Any claim by a Second Lien Claimholder under section 507(b) of the Bankruptcy Code will be subordinate in right of payment to any claim of First Lien Claimholders under section 507(b) of the Bankruptcy Code and any payment thereof will be deemed to be Proceeds of Collateral[, provided that, subject to section 6.7, “Reorganization Securities,” Second Lien Claimholders will be deemed to have agreed pursuant to section 1129(a)(9) of the Bankruptcy Code that such section 507(b) claims may be paid under a plan of reorganization in any form having a value on the effective date of such plan equal to the allowed amount of such claims80].

[(4)  So long as First Lien Agent is receiving payment in cash of [all] Post-Petition Claims [consisting of all interest at the applicable rate under the First Lien Loan Documents], Second Lien Agent may seek and, subject to the terms hereof, retain payments of Post-Petition Claims [consisting of interest at the [non-default][applicable] rate]81 under the Second Lien Loan Documents (Second Lien Adequate Protection Payments). If a Second Lien Claimholder receives Second Lien Adequate Protection Payments before the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations, then upon the effective date of any plan or the conclusion or dismissal of any Insolvency Proceeding, the Second Lien Claimholder will pay over to First Lien Agent pursuant to section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds,” an amount equal to the lesser of (i) the Second Lien Adequate Protection Payments received by the Second Lien Claimholder and (ii) the amount necessary to Discharge the First Lien Obligations. [Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, First Lien Claimholders will [not] be deemed to have consented to, and expressly [waive][retain] their rights to object to, the payment of Second Lien Adequate Protection Payments.82]]

6.5    FIRST LIEN OBJECTIONS TO SECOND LIEN ACTIONS83

Subject to section 3.1, “Who May Exercise Remedies,” nothing in this section 6 limits a First Lien Claimholder from objecting in an Insolvency Proceeding or otherwise to any action taken by a Second Lien Claimholder, including the Second Lien Claimholder’s seeking adequate protection [or asserting any of its rights and remedies under the Second Lien Loan Documents or otherwise].

[ALTERNATIVE SECTION FAVORABLE TO SECOND LIEN LENDERS]84
[6.5 FIRST LIEN OBJECTIONS TO SECOND LIEN ACTIONS

Subject to section 3.1, “Who May Exercise Remedies,” nothing in this section 6 limits a First Lien Claimholder from objecting in an Insolvency Proceeding or otherwise to any action taken by a Second Lien Claimholder, including the Second Lien Claimholder’s seeking adequate protection (other than adequate protection permitted under section 6.4(b)) or asserting any of its rights and remedies under the Second Lien Loan Documents or otherwise.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE SECTION]

6.6    AVOIDANCE; REINSTATEMENT OF OBLIGATIONS85

If a First Lien Claimholder or a Second Lien Claimholder receives payment or property on account of a First Lien Obligation or Second Lien Obligation, and the payment is subsequently invalidated, avoided, declared to be fraudulent or preferential, set aside, or otherwise required to be transferred to a trustee, receiver, or the estate of Borrower or other Grantor (a Recovery), then, to the extent of the Recovery, the First Lien Obligations or Second Lien Obligations intended to have been satisfied by the payment will be reinstated as First Lien Obligations or Second Lien Obligations, as applicable, on the date of the Recovery, and no Discharge of First Lien Obligations or Discharge of Second Lien Obligations, as applicable, will be deemed to have occurred for all purposes hereunder. If this Agreement is terminated prior to a Recovery, this Agreement will be reinstated in full force and effect, and such prior termination will not diminish, release, discharge, impair, or otherwise affect the obligations of the Parties from the date of reinstatement. [Upon any such reinstatement of First Lien Obligations, each Second Lien Claimholder will deliver to First Lien Agent any Collateral or Proceeds thereof received between the Discharge of First Lien Obligations and their reinstatement in accordance with section 4.3, “Payment Turnover.”]86 [No Second Lien Claimholder may benefit from a Recovery, and any distribution made to a Second Lien Claimholder as a result of a Recovery will be paid over to First Lien Agent for application to the First Lien Obligations in accordance with section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds.”]87

6.7    REORGANIZATION SECURITIES88

Nothing in this Agreement prohibits or limits the right of a Second Lien Claimholder to receive and retain any debt or equity securities that are issued by a reorganized debtor pursuant to a plan of reorganization or similar dispositive restructuring plan in connection with an Insolvency Proceeding[, provided that any debt securities received by a Second Lien Claimholder on account of a Second Lien Obligation that constitutes a “secured claim” within the meaning of section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code will be paid over or otherwise transferred to First Lien Agent for application in accordance with section 4.1, “Application of Proceeds,” unless such distribution is made under a plan that is consented to by the affirmative vote of all classes composed of the secured claims of First Lien Claimholders].

If, in an Insolvency Proceeding, debt Obligations of the reorganized debtor secured by Liens upon any property of the reorganized debtor are distributed pursuant to a plan of reorganization or similar dispositive restructuring plan, both on account of First Lien Obligations and on account of Second Lien Obligations, then, to the extent the debt Obligations distributed on account of the First Lien Obligations and on account of the Second Lien Obligations are secured by Liens upon the same property, the provisions of this Agreement will survive the distribution of such debt Obligations pursuant to such plan and will apply with like effect to the Liens securing such debt Obligations.89

6.8    POST-PETITION CLAIMS90

(a)   No Second Lien Claimholder may oppose or seek to challenge any claim by a First Lien Claimholder for allowance or payment in any Insolvency Proceeding of First Lien Obligations consisting of Post-Petition Claims.91

(b)   No First Lien Claimholder may oppose or seek to challenge in an Insolvency Proceeding a claim by a Second Lien Claimholder for allowance [and any payment permitted under section 6.4, “Adequate Protection,”] of Second Lien Obligations consisting of Post-Petition Claims.

6.9    WAIVERS92

Second Lien Agent waives

(a)   any claim it may hereafter have against any First Lien Claimholder arising out of any cash collateral or financing arrangement or out of any grant of a security interest in connection with the Collateral in an Insolvency Proceeding, so long as such actions are not in express contravention of the terms of this Agreement; [and]

(b)   any right to assert or enforce any claim under section 506(c) or 552 of the Bankruptcy Code as against First Lien Claimholders or any of the Collateral to the extent securing the First Lien Obligations93[; and

(c)   solely in its capacity as a holder of a Lien on Collateral, any claim or cause of action that any Grantor may have against any First Lien Claimholder, except to the extent arising from a breach by such First Lien Claimholder of the provisions of this Agreement].

6.10  SEPARATE GRANTS OF SECURITY AND SEPARATE CLASSIFICATION94

The grants of Liens pursuant to the First Lien Collateral Documents and the Second Lien Collateral Documents constitute two separate and distinct grants. Because of, among other things, their differing rights in the Collateral, the Second Lien Obligations, to the extent deemed to be “secured claims” within the meaning of section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code, are fundamentally different from the First Lien Obligations and must be separately classified in any plan of reorganization in an Insolvency Proceeding. Second Lien Claimholders will not seek in an Insolvency Proceeding to be treated as part of the same class of creditors as First Lien Claimholders and will not oppose or contest any pleading by First Lien Claimholders seeking separate classification of their respective secured claims.

6.11  EFFECTIVENESS IN INSOLVENCY PROCEEDINGS95

The Parties acknowledge that this Agreement is a “subordination agreement” under section 510(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, which will be effective before, during, and after the commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding. All references in this Agreement to any Grantor will include such Person as a debtor-in-possession and any receiver or trustee for such Person in an Insolvency Proceeding.

7   MISCELLANEOUS

7.1    CONFLICTS

If this Agreement conflicts with the First Lien Loan Documents or the Second Lien Loan Documents, this Agreement will control.

7.2    NO WAIVERS; REMEDIES CUMULATIVE; INTEGRATION

A Party’s failure or delay in exercising a right under this Agreement will not waive the right, nor will a Party’s single or partial exercise of a right preclude it from any other or further exercise of that or any other right.

The rights and remedies provided in this Agreement will be cumulative and not exclusive of other rights or remedies provided by law.

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties and supersedes all prior agreements, oral or written, relating to its subject matter.

7.3    EFFECTIVENESS; SEVERABILITY; TERMINATION

This Agreement will become effective when executed and delivered by the Parties.

Each First Lien Claimholder and each Second Lien Claimholder waives any right it may have under applicable law to revoke this Agreement or any provision thereunder or consent by it thereto.

This Agreement will survive, and continue in full force and effect, in any Insolvency Proceeding.

If a provision of this Agreement is prohibited or unenforceable in a jurisdiction, the prohibition or unenforceability will not invalidate the remaining provisions hereof, or invalidate or render unenforceable that provision in any other jurisdiction.

Subject to sections 1.6(d) and 1.6(g), “Pledged Collateral,” 4.1, “Application of Proceeds,” 4.4, “Refinancing After Discharge of First Lien Obligations,” 6.5, “First Lien Objections to Second Lien Actions,” and 6.6, “Avoidance; Reinstatement of Obligations,” this Agreement will terminate and be of no further force and effect

(a)   for First Lien Claimholders, upon the Discharge of First Lien Obligations, and

(b)   for Second Lien Claimholders, upon the Discharge of Second Lien Obligations.

7.4    MODIFICATIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT

A modification or waiver of any provision of this Agreement will only be effective if in writing signed on behalf of each Party or its authorized agent, and a waiver will be a waiver only for the specific instance involved and will not impair the rights of the Parties making the waiver or the obligations of the other Parties to such Party in any other respect or at any other time. Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither Borrower nor Holdings will have a right to consent to or approve a modification of this Agreement except to the extent its rights are directly affected.

7.5    INFORMATION CONCERNING FINANCIAL CONDITION OF BORROWER AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES

The Control Agent, First Lien Claimholders, and Second Lien Claimholders will each be responsible for keeping themselves informed of

(a)   the financial condition of the Grantors, and

(b)   all other circumstances bearing upon the risk of nonpayment of the First Lien Obligations or the Second Lien Obligations.

Neither the Control Agent nor any First Lien Claimholder will have any duty to advise any Second Lien Claimholder, and no Second Lien Claimholder will have any duty to advise the Control Agent or any first Lien Claimholder, of information known to it regarding any such condition or circumstances or otherwise.

If the Control Agent or a First Lien Claimholder provides any such information to a Second Lien Claimholder, or a Second Lien Claimholder provides any such information to the Control Agent or any First Lien Claimholder, the Control Agent or the First Lien Claimholder, or Second Lien Claimholder, respectively, will have no obligation to:

(a)   make, and it does not make, any express or implied representation or warranty, including as to accuracy, completeness, truthfulness, or validity,

(b)   provide additional information on that or any subsequent occasion,

(c)   undertake any investigation, or

(d)   disclose information that, pursuant to applicable law or accepted or reasonable commercial finance practices, it desires or is required to maintain as confidential.

7.6    NO RELIANCE

(a)   First Lien Agent acknowledges that it and each other First Lien Claimholder has, independently and without reliance on any Second Lien Claimholder, and based on documents and information the First Lien Claimholder deemed appropriate, made its own credit analysis and decision to enter into the First Lien Loan Documents and this Agreement, and will continue to make its own credit decisions in taking or not taking any action under the First Lien Loan Documents or this Agreement.

(b)   Second Lien Agent acknowledges that it and each other Second Lien Claimholder has, independently and without reliance on any First Lien Claimholder, and based on documents and information the Second Lien Claimholder deemed appropriate, made its own credit analysis and decision to enter into the Second Lien Loan Documents and this Agreement, and will continue to make its own credit decisions in taking or not taking any action under the Second Lien Loan Documents or this Agreement.

7.7    NO WARRANTIES; INDEPENDENT ACTION

(a)   Except as otherwise expressly provided herein,

(1)   no Second Lien Claimholder has made any express or implied representation or warranty to any First Lien Claimholder, including with respect to the execution, validity, legality, completeness, collectability, or enforceability of any Second Lien Loan Document, the ownership of any Collateral, or the perfection or priority of any Liens thereon, and

(2)   each Second Lien Claimholder may manage and supervise its loans and extensions of credit under the Second Lien Loan Documents in accordance with applicable law and as it may otherwise, in its sole discretion, deem appropriate.

(b)   Except as otherwise expressly provided herein,

(1)   no First Lien Claimholder has made any express or implied representation or warranty to any Second Lien Claimholder, including with respect to the execution, validity, legality, completeness, collectability, or enforceability of any First Lien Loan Document, the ownership of any Collateral, or the perfection or priority of any Liens thereon, and

(2)   each First Lien Claimholder may manage and supervise its loans and extensions of credit under the First Lien Loan Documents in accordance with law and as it may otherwise, in its sole discretion, deem appropriate.

No Second Lien Claimholder will have any duty to any First Lien Claimholder, and no First Lien Claimholder will have any duty to any Second Lien Claimholder, to act or refrain from acting in a manner that allows, or results in, the occurrence or continuance of an event of default or default under any agreements with Borrower or any other Grantor (including the First Lien Loan Documents and the Second Lien Loan Documents), regardless of any knowledge thereof that it may have or be charged with.

7.8    SUBROGATION

If a Second Lien Claimholder pays or distributes cash, property, or other assets to a First Lien Claimholder under this Agreement, the Second Lien Claimholder will be subrogated to the rights of the First Lien Claimholder with respect to the value of the payment or distribution, provided that the Second Lien Claimholder waives such right of subrogation until the Discharge of First Lien Obligations up to the First Lien Cap with respect to the Capped Obligations and in their entirety with respect to First Lien Obligations that are not Capped Obligations. Such payment or distribution will not reduce the Second Lien Obligations.

7.9    APPLICABLE LAW; JURISDICTION; SERVICE

This Agreement, and any claim or controversy relating to the subject matter hereof, will be governed by the law of the [State of New York].

All judicial proceedings brought against a Party arising out of or relating hereto may be brought in any state or federal court of competent jurisdiction in [the state, county, and city of New York]. Each Party irrevocably

(a)   accepts generally and unconditionally the nonexclusive personal jurisdiction and venue of such courts,

(b)   waives any defense of forum non conveniens, and (c) agrees that service of process in such proceeding may be made by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, to the Party at its address provided in accordance with section 7.11, “Notices,” and that such service will confer personal jurisdiction over the Party in such proceeding and otherwise constitutes effective and binding service in every respect.

7.10 WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL

Each Party waives its right to jury trial of any claim or cause of action based upon or arising hereunder. The scope of this waiver is intended to encompass any and all disputes that may be filed in any court and that relate to the subject matter hereof, including contract claims, tort claims, breach of duty claims, and all other common law and statutory claims. Each Party acknowledges that this waiver is a material inducement to enter into a business relationship, that it has already relied on this waiver in entering into this Agreement, and that it will continue to rely on this waiver in its related future dealings. Each Party further represents and warrants that it knowingly and voluntarily waives its jury trial rights following consultation with legal counsel. This waiver is irrevocable, meaning that it may not be modified either orally or in writing (other than by a mutual written waiver specifically referring to this section 7.10 and executed by each of the Parties), and will apply to any subsequent modification hereof. In the event of litigation, this Agreement may be filed as a written consent to a trial by the court.

7.11 NOTICES

(a)   Any notice to a First Lien Claimholder or a Second Lien Claimholder under this Agreement must also be given to First Lien Agent and Second Lien Agent, respectively. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, notices and consents must be in writing and will be deemed to have been given (i) when delivered in person or by courier service and signed for against receipt thereof, (ii) upon receipt of facsimile, and (iii) three Business Days after deposit in the United States mail with first-class postage prepaid and properly addressed. For the purposes hereof, the address of each Party will be as set forth below the Party’s name on the signature pages hereto, or at such other address as the Party may designate by notice to the other Parties.

(b)   Failure to give a notice or copies as required by section 2.4, “Notice of Modifications,” [or] section 3.4, “Notice of Exercise,” [or section 3.1(e) regarding notice of Discharge of First Lien Obligations] will not affect the effectiveness or validity of any modification or of this Agreement, or the effectiveness or validity of the exercise of remedies otherwise permitted hereunder and under applicable law, impose any liability on any First Lien Claimholder or Second Lien Claimholder, or waive any rights of any Party.

7.12    FURTHER ASSURANCES

First Lien Agent, Second Lien Agent, and Borrower will each take such further action and will execute and deliver such additional documents and instruments (in recordable form, if requested) as First Lien Agent or Second Lien Agent may reasonably request to effectuate the terms of and the Lien priorities contemplated by this Agreement.

7.13    SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

This Agreement is binding upon and inures to the benefit of each First Lien Claimholder, each Second Lien Claimholder, the Control Agent, and their respective successors and assigns. However, no provision of this Agreement will inure to the benefit of a trustee, debtor-in-possession, creditor trust or other representative of an estate or creditor of Borrower, or other Grantor, including where such estate or creditor representative is the beneficiary of a Lien securing Collateral by virtue of the avoidance of such Lien in an Insolvency Proceeding.

If either First Lien Agent or Second Lien Agent resigns or is replaced pursuant to the First Lien Credit Agreement or Second Lien Credit Agreement, as applicable, its successor will be a party to this Agreement with all the rights, and subject to all the obligations, of this Agreement. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, this Agreement may not be assigned to any Person except as expressly contemplated herein.

7.14    AUTHORIZATION

By its signature hereto, each Person signing this Agreement on behalf of a Party represents and warrants to the other Parties that it is duly authorized to execute this Agreement.

7.15    NO THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES

No Person is a third-party beneficiary of this Agreement and no trustee in bankruptcy for, or bankruptcy estate of, or unsecured creditor of, any Grantor will have or acquire or be entitled to exercise any right of a First Lien Claimholder or Second Lien Claimholder under this Agreement, whether upon an avoidance or equitable subordination of a Lien of First Lien Claimholder or Second Lien Claimholder, or otherwise. None of Borrower, any other Grantor, or any other creditor thereof has any rights hereunder, and neither Borrower nor any Grantor may rely on the terms hereof. Nothing in this Agreement impairs the Obligations of Borrower and the other Grantors to pay principal, interest, fees, and other amounts as provided in the First Lien Loan Documents and the Second Lien Loan Documents. Except to the extent expressly provided in this Agreement, no Person will have a right to notice of a modification to, or action taken under, this Agreement or any First Lien Collateral Document (including the release or impairment of any Collateral) other than as a lender under the First Lien Credit Agreement, and then only to the extent expressly provided in the First Lien Loan Documents. Except to the extent expressly provided in this Agreement, no Person will have a right to notice of a modification to or action taken under, this Agreement or any Second Lien Collateral Document (including the release or impairment of any Collateral) other than as a lender under the Second Lien Credit Agreement, and then only to the extent expressly provided in the Second Lien Loan Documents.

7.16    NO INDIRECT ACTIONS

Unless otherwise expressly stated, if a Party may not take an action under this Agreement, then it may not take that action indirectly, or assist or support any other Person in taking that action directly or indirectly. “Taking an action indirectly” means taking an action that is not expressly prohibited for the Party but is intended to have substantially the same effects as the prohibited action.

7.17    COUNTERPARTS

This Agreement may be executed in counterparts (and by different parties hereto in different counterparts), each of which will constitute an original, but all of which when taken together will constitute a single contract. Delivery of an executed counterpart of a signature page of this Agreement or any document or instrument delivered in connection herewith by telecopy or electronic facsimile or other electronic means will be effective as delivery of a manually executed counterpart of this Agreement or such other document or instrument, as applicable, and each Party utilizing telecopy, electronic facsimile, or other electronic means for delivery will deliver a manually executed original counterpart to each other Party on request.

7.18    ORIGINAL GRANTORS; ADDITIONAL GRANTORS

Borrower and each other Grantor on the date of this Agreement will constitute the original Grantors party hereto. The original Grantors will cause each Subsidiary of Borrower and of Holdings that becomes a Grantor after the date hereof to contemporaneously become a party hereto (as a Guarantor Subsidiary) by executing and delivering a joinder agreement (in form and substance satisfactory to First Lien Agent) to First Lien Agent. The Parties further agree that, notwithstanding any failure to take the actions required by the immediately preceding sentence, each Person that becomes a Grantor at any time (and any security granted by any such Person) will be subject to the provisions hereof as fully as if it constituted a Guarantor Subsidiary party hereto and had complied with the requirements of the immediately preceding sentence.

8   DEFINITIONS96

8.1    DEFINED TERMS

Unless otherwise stated or the context otherwise clearly requires, the following terms have the following meanings:

Affiliate means, for a specified Person, another Person that directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, controls or is controlled by or is under common control with the specified Person. For these purposes, “control” means the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management or policies of a Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise, and “controlled” has a correlative meaning.

Agreement is defined in the Preamble.

Assignment Agreement is defined in section 5.1(a)(B).

Bankruptcy Code means the federal Bankruptcy Code.

Bankruptcy Law means the Bankruptcy Code and any similar federal, state, or foreign bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership, or similar law affecting creditors’ rights generally.

Borrower is defined in the Preamble.

Business Day means a day other than a Saturday, Sunday, or other day on which commercial banks in [New York City] are authorized or required by law to close.

Capped Obligations is defined in section 1.4.

Cash Management Agreement means an agreement to provide cash management services, including treasury, depository, overdraft, credit or debit card, electronic funds transfer, or other cash management arrangements, to which a Grantor is a party and a lender under the First Lien Credit Agreement or an Affiliate of such lender is the applicable counterparty at the date hereof or at the time it enters into such agreement (even if such counterparty later ceases to be such a lender or Affiliate).

Collateral means all of the property of any Grantor, whether real, personal, or mixed, that is (or is required to be) both First Lien Collateral and Second Lien Collateral, including any property subject to Liens granted pursuant to section 6, “Insolvency Proceedings,” to secure both First Lien Obligations and Second Lien Obligations.97

[Alternative Definition]98

[Collateral means, at any time of determination, the First Lien Collateral and all other property of any Grantor in which each of First Lien Agent and Second Lien Agent has, pursuant to the First Lien Collateral Documents and the Second Lien Collateral Documents, respectively, a valid and perfected Lien (which Lien has not been avoided, disallowed, set aside, invalidated, or subordinated pursuant to Chapter 5 of the Bankruptcy Code or otherwise) securing payment of First Lien Obligations or Second Lien Obligations, respectively, and including any Liens granted pursuant to section 6, “Insolvency Proceedings,” to secure both First Lien Obligations and Second Lien Obligations.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION]

Control Agent is defined in the Preamble.

Defaulting Creditor is defined in section 5.7(c).

DIP Financing means the obtaining of credit or incurring debt secured by Liens on the Collateral pursuant to section 364 of the Bankruptcy Code (or similar Bankruptcy Law).

Discharge of First Lien Obligations99 means, except to the extent otherwise expressly provided in section 5, “Purchase of First Lien Obligations by Second Lien Claimholders ,”

(a)   payment in full in cash of the principal of and interest (including interest accruing on or after the commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding, whether or not such interest would be allowed in the proceeding)100 on all outstanding Indebtedness included in the First Lien Obligations, (b) payment in full in cash of all other First Lien Obligations that are due and payable or otherwise accrued and owing at or prior to the time such principal and interest are paid (other than indemnification Obligations for which no claim or demand for payment, whether oral or written, has been made at such time),101

(c)   termination or expiration of any commitments to extend credit that would be First Lien Obligations [(other than pursuant to Cash Management Agreements or Hedge Agreements, in each case as to which satisfactory arrangements have been made with the applicable lender or Affiliate)], and

(d)   termination or cash collateralization (in an amount and manner reasonably satisfactory to First Lien Agent, but in no event greater than 105% of the aggregate undrawn face amount) of all Letters of Credit.

[ALTERNATIVE CLAUSE]

[(d) [termination or cash collateralization (in an amount reasonably satisfactory to First Lien Agent) of any Hedge Agreement issued or entered into by any First Lien Claimholder] [termination of any Hedge Agreement and the payment in full by wire transfer of immediately available funds of all Obligations thereunder].

[END OF ALTERNATIVE CLAUSE]

Discharge of Second Lien Obligations means

(a)   payment in full in cash of the principal of and interest (including interest accruing on or after the commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding, whether or not such interest would be allowed in the proceeding) on all outstanding Indebtedness included in the Second Lien Obligations, and

(b)   payment in full in cash of all other Second Lien Obligations that are due and payable or otherwise accrued and owing at or prior to the time such principal and interest are paid (other than indemnification Obligations for which no claim or demand for payment, whether oral or written, has been made at such time).

Disposition means an “Asset Sale” (as defined in the First Lien Credit Agreement), or other sale, lease, exchange, transfer, or other disposition.

Enforcement Action102 means an action under applicable law to

(a)   foreclose, execute, levy, or collect on, take possession or control of, sell or otherwise realize upon (judicially or non-judicially), or lease, license, or otherwise dispose of (whether publicly or privately), Collateral, or otherwise exercise or enforce remedial rights with respect to Collateral under the First Lien Loan Documents or the Second Lien Loan Documents (including by way of set-off, recoupment notification of a public or private sale or other disposition pursuant to the U.C.C. or other applicable law, notification to account debtors, notification to depositary banks under deposit account control agreements, or exercise of rights under landlord consents, if applicable),

(b)   solicit bids from third Persons to conduct the liquidation or disposition of Collateral or to engage or retain sales brokers, marketing agents, investment bankers, accountants, appraisers, auctioneers, or other third Persons for the purposes of valuing, marketing, promoting, and selling Collateral,

(c)   to receive a transfer of Collateral in satisfaction of Indebtedness or any other Obligation secured thereby, [or]

(d)   to otherwise enforce a security interest or exercise another right or remedy, as a secured creditor or otherwise, pertaining to the Collateral at law, in equity, or pursuant to the First Lien Loan Documents or Second Lien Loan Documents (including the commencement of applicable legal proceedings or other actions with respect to all or any portion of the Collateral to facilitate the actions described in the preceding clauses, and exercising voting rights in respect of equity interests comprising Collateral), [or

(e)   effect the Disposition of Collateral by any Grantor after the occurrence and during the continuation of an event of default under the First Lien Loan Documents or the Second Lien Loan Documents with the consent of First Lien Agent or Second Lien Agent, as applicable,]103 provided that “Enforcement Action” will [not] be deemed to include the commencement of, or joinder in filing of a petition for commencement of, an Insolvency Proceeding against the owner of Collateral.104

Equity Interest means, for any Person, any and all shares, interests, participations, or other equivalents, including membership interests (however designated, whether voting or non-voting) of equity of the Person, including, if the Person is a partnership, partnership interests (whether general or limited) or any other interest or participation that confers on a holder the right to receive a share of the profits and losses of, or distributions of assets of, the partnership, but not including debt securities convertible or exchangeable into equity unless and until actually converted or exchanged.

Excess First Lien Obligations is defined in section 1.11(c).

Excess First Lien Principal Obligations is defined in section 1.4(a).

First Lien Agent is defined in the Preamble.

First Lien Cap is defined in section 1.4.

First Lien Claimholders is defined in section 1.3(d).

First Lien Collateral means the assets of any Grantor, whether real, personal, or mixed, as to which a Lien is granted as security for a First Lien Obligation.

[ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION]105

[First Lien Collateral means the assets of any Grantor, whether real, personal, or mixed, as to which a Lien is granted as security for a First Lien Obligation pursuant to the First Lien Collateral Documents, which Lien is, at any time of determination, a valid and perfected Lien that has not been avoided, disallowed, set aside, invalidated, or subordinated pursuant to Chapter 5 of the Bankruptcy Code or otherwise.]

[END OF ALTERNATIVE DEFINITION]

First Lien Collateral Documents means the [security] [Collateral] documents defined in the First Lien Credit Agreement, and any other documents or instruments granting a Lien on real or personal property to secure a First Lien Obligation or granting rights or remedies with respect to such Liens.

First Lien Credit Agreement is defined in the Preamble.

First Lien Lenders means the “Lenders” under and as defined in the First Lien Loan Documents.

First Lien Loan Documents means

(a)   the First Lien Credit Agreement and the “Loan Documents” defined in the First Lien Credit Agreement,

(b)   each other agreement, document, or instrument providing for, evidencing, guaranteeing, or securing an Obligation under the First Lien Credit Agreement,

(c)   any other document or instrument executed or delivered at any time in connection with Borrower’s Obligations under the First Lien Credit Agreement, including any guaranty of or grant of Collateral to secure such Obligations, and any intercreditor or joinder agreement to which holders of First Lien Obligations are parties, and

(d)   each other agreement, document, or instrument providing for, evidencing, guaranteeing, or securing any DIP Financing provided by or consented to in writing by the First Lien Lenders and deemed consented to by the Second Lien Lenders pursuant to section 6.1, “Use of Cash Collateral and DIP Financing,” to the extent effective at the relevant time[, provided that any such documents or instruments to which any First Lien Claimholder is a party in connection with a DIP financing (other than a DIP financing deemed consented to by Second Lien Lenders pursuant to section 6.1, “Use of Cash Collateral and DIP Financing”) will not be deemed First Lien Loan Documents unless so designated in writing by First Lien Agent].106

First Lien Obligations is defined in section 1.3(a).

Governmental Authority means any federal, state, municipal, national, or other government, governmental department, commission, board, bureau, court, agency, or instrumentality, or political subdivision thereof, or any entity or officer exercising executive, legislative, judicial, regulatory, or administrative functions of or pertaining to any government or any court, in each case whether associated with a state of the United States, the United States, or a foreign entity or government.

Grantor is defined in the Preamble.

Guarantor Subsidiaries is defined in the Preamble.

Hedge Agreement means

(a)   an Interest Rate Protection Agreement, or

(b)   a foreign exchange contract, currency swap agreement, futures contract, option contract, synthetic cap, or other similar agreement or arrangement, each of which is for the purpose of hedging the foreign currency risk associated with the operations of any Grantor, in either case, to the extent that the incurrence of the obligations in respect thereof was permitted under the First Lien Loan Documents as in effect on the date hereof.

Holdings is defined in the Preamble.

Indebtedness means and includes all Obligations that constitute “Indebtedness” under the First Lien Credit Agreement or the Second Lien Credit Agreement, as applicable.

Insolvency Proceeding means

(a)   a voluntary or involuntary case or proceeding under the Bankruptcy Code with respect to a Grantor,

(b)   any other voluntary or involuntary insolvency, reorganization, or bankruptcy case or proceeding, or any receivership, liquidation, reorganization, or other similar case or proceeding with respect to a Grantor or a material portion of its property,

(c)   a liquidation, dissolution, reorganization, or winding up of a Grantor, whether voluntary or involuntary and whether or not involving insolvency or bankruptcy, or

(d)   an assignment for the benefit of creditors or other marshaling of assets and liabilities of a Grantor.

Interest Rate Protection Agreement means an interest rate swap, cap or collar agreement, or other similar agreement or arrangement designed to protect a Grantor against fluctuations in interest rates.

Letters of Credit is defined in section 1.4.

Lien means any lien (including, without limitation, judgment liens and liens arising by operation of law, subrogation, or otherwise), mortgage or deed of trust, pledge, hypothecation, assignment, security interest, charge, or encumbrance of any kind (including any agreement to give any of the foregoing, any conditional sale or other title retention agreement, and any lease in the nature thereof), and any option, call, trust, U.C.C. financing statement, or other preferential arrangement having the practical effect of any of the foregoing, including any right of set-off or recoupment.

Modify, as applied to any document or obligation, includes

(a)   modification by amendment, supplement, termination, or replacement of the document or obligation,

(b)   any waiver of a provision (including waivers by course of conduct), and

(c)   the settlement or release of any claim,

whether oral or written, and regardless of whether the modification is in conformity with the provisions of the document or obligation governing modifications.

New Agent is defined in section 4.4.

Obligations means all obligations of every nature of a Person owed to any obligee under an agreement, whether for principal, interest, or payments for early termination, fees, expenses, indemnification, or otherwise, and all guaranties of any of the foregoing, whether absolute or contingent, due or to become due, now existing or hereafter arising, and including interest and fees that accrue after the commencement by or against any Person of any proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law naming such Person as the debtor in such proceeding, regardless of whether such interest and fees are allowed claims in such proceeding.

Party means a party to this Agreement.

Person means any natural person, corporation, limited liability company, trust, business trust, joint venture, association, company, partnership, Governmental Authority, or other entity.

Pledged Collateral is defined in section 1.6(a).

Post-Petition Claims means interest, fees, costs, expenses, and other charges that pursuant to the First Lien Credit Agreement or the Second Lien Credit Agreement continue to accrue after the commencement of an Insolvency Proceeding, to the extent such interest, fees, expenses, and other charges are allowed or allowable under Bankruptcy Law or in the Insolvency Proceeding.

Proceeds means

(a)   all “proceeds,” as defined in Article 9 of the U.C.C., of the Collateral, and

(b)   whatever is recovered when Collateral is sold, exchanged, collected, or disposed of, whether voluntarily or involuntarily, including any additional or replacement Collateral provided during any Insolvency Proceeding and any payment or property received in an Insolvency Proceeding on account of any “secured claim” (within the meaning of section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code or similar Bankruptcy Law).107

Purchase Date is defined in section 5.2(a)(5). Purchase Event is defined in section 5.1(a).

Purchase Notice is defined in section 5.2(a).

Purchase Obligations is defined in section 5.1(a).

Purchase Price is defined in section 5.3.

Purchasing Creditors is defined in section 5.2(a).

Recovery is defined in section 6.6.

Refinance means, for any Indebtedness, to refinance, replace, refund, or repay, or to issue other Indebtedness in exchange or replacement for such Indebtedness in whole or in part, whether with the same or different lenders, agents, or arrangers. “Refinanced” and “Refinancing” have correlative meanings.

Second Lien Adequate Protection Payments is defined in section 6.4(b)(4).

Second Lien Agent is defined in the Preamble.

Second Lien Claimholders is defined in section 1.3(d).

Second Lien Collateral means all of the property of any Grantor, whether real, personal, or mixed, as to which a Lien is granted as security for a Second Lien Obligation.

Second Lien Collateral Documents means the [security] [Collateral] documents defined in the Second Lien Credit Agreement, and any other documents or instruments granting a Lien on real or personal property to secure a Second Lien Obligation or granting rights or remedies with respect to such Liens.

Second Lien Credit Agreement is defined in the Preamble.

Second Lien Lenders means the “Lenders” under and as defined in the Second Lien Loan Documents.

Second Lien Loan Documents means

(a)   the Second Lien Credit Agreement and the “Loan Documents” defined in the Second Lien Credit Agreement,

(b)   each other agreement, document, or instrument providing for, evidencing, guaranteeing, or securing an Obligation under the Second Lien Credit Agreement, and

(c)   any other document or instrument executed or delivered at any time in connection with Borrower’s Obligations under the Second Lien Credit Agreement, including any guaranty of or grant of Collateral to secure such Obligations, and any intercreditor or joinder agreement to which holders of Second Lien Obligations are parties, to the extent effective at the relevant time.

Second Lien Obligations is defined in section 1.3(b).

Standstill Period is defined in section 3.1(b)(1).

Subsidiary of a Person means a corporation or other entity a majority of whose voting stock is directly or indirectly owned or controlled by the Person. For these purposes, “voting stock” of a Person means securities or other ownership interests of the Person having general power under ordinary circumstances to vote in the election of the directors, or other persons performing similar functions, of the Person. References to a percentage or proportion of voting stock refer to the relevant percentage or proportion of the votes entitled to be cast by the voting stock.

U.C.C. means the Uniform Commercial Code (or any similar legislation) as in effect in any applicable jurisdiction.

8.2 USAGES

Unless otherwise stated or the context clearly requires otherwise:

Agents. References to First Lien Agent or Second Lien Agent will refer to First Lien Agent or Second Lien Agent acting on behalf of itself and on behalf of all of the other First Lien Claimholders or Second Lien Claimholders, respectively. Actions taken by First Lien Agent or Second Lien Agent pursuant to this Agreement are meant to be taken on behalf of itself and the other First Lien Claimholders or Second Lien Claimholders, respectively.

Singular and plural. Definitions of terms apply equally to the singular and plural forms.

Masculine and feminine. Pronouns will include the corresponding masculine, feminine, and neuter forms.

Will and shall. “Will” and “shall” have the same meaning.

Time periods. In computing periods from a specified date to a later specified date, the words “from” and “commencing on” (and the like) mean “from and including,” and the words “to,” “until,” and “ending on” (and the like) mean “to but excluding.”

When action may be taken. Any action permitted under this Agreement may be taken at any time and from time to time.

Time of day. All indications of time of day mean [New York City] time. Including. “Including” means “including, but not limited to.”

Or. “A or B” means “A or B or both.”

Statutes and regulations. References to a statute refer to the statute and all regulations promulgated under or implementing the statute as in effect at the relevant time. References to a specific provision of a statute or regulation include successor provisions. References to a section of the Bankruptcy Code also refer to any similar provision of Bankruptcy Law.

Agreements. References to an agreement (including this Agreement) refer to the agreement as amended at the relevant time.

Governmental agencies and self-regulatory organizations. References to a governmental or quasi-governmental agency or authority or a self-regulatory organization include any successor agency, authority, or self-regulatory organization.

Section references. Section references refer to sections of this Agreement. References to numbered sections refer to all included sections. For example, a reference to section 6 also refers to sections 6.1, 6.1(a), etc. References to a section or article in an agreement, statute, or regulation include successor and renumbered sections and articles of that or any successor agreement, statute, or regulation.

Successors and assigns. References to a Person include the Person’s permitted successors and assigns.

Herein, etc. “Herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder,” and words of similar import refer to this Agreement in its entirety and not to any particular provision.

Assets and property. “Asset” and “property” have the same meaning and refer to both real and personal, tangible and intangible assets and property, including cash, securities, accounts, and general intangibles.

SIGNATURES

 

First Lien Agent:

[NAME OF FIRST LIEN AGENT],

as First Lien Agent
By:

Name:

Title:

[NOTICE ADDRESS]

Control Agent:

[NAME OF CONTROL AGENT],

as Control Agent
By:

Name:

Title:

[NOTICE ADDRESS]

Second Lien Agent:

[NAME OF SECOND LIEN AGENT],
as Second Lien Agent
By:

Name:

Title:

[NOTICE ADDRESS]

Acknowledged and Agreed to by:

Borrower:

[NAME OF BORROWER]

By:

Name:

Title:

[NOTICE OF ADDRESS]

Holdings:

[NAME OF HOLDINGS]
By:

Name:

Title:

[NOTICE ADDRESS]

The other Grantors:

[NAME OF GRANTOR]
By:

Name:

Title:

[NOTICE ADDRESS]

[NAME OF GRANTOR]
By:

Name:

Title:

[NOTICE ADDRESS]

__________________

* As of March 22, 2010.

1. LoanConnector, www.loanconnector.com (downloaded Apr. 1, 2010).

2. Id.

3. Id.

4. The first and second lien agents are parties to the intercreditor agreement, but the first and second lien lenders are not. Therefore, the first and second lien credit agreements should each (i) bind each lender to the terms of the intercreditor agreement, (ii) authorize the agent to enter into the intercreditor agreement on behalf of the lenders and to exercise all the agent’s rights and comply with all its obligations under the intercreditor agreement, and (iii) specify what lender direction or authorization is required for the agent to agree to consents, waivers, or amendments, or to take or refrain from other actions under the intercreditor agreement.

5. The parties may wish to provide for hedge agreements provided by a second lien lender or affiliate.

6. The heart of the intercreditor agreement is the lien subordination provision pursuant to which the second lien lenders agree that their lien on the common assets will be junior and second in priority to the lien of the first lien lenders, including typically both liens on personal property and liens on real estate. Even at this preliminary stage of the intercreditor agreement, the first lien lenders and the second lien lenders are likely to have different points of view as to how broadly the lien subordination provision should be worded. The first lien lenders are likely to insist that their lien on the common assets should remain superior (at least up to the amount of the first lien cap) even if the first lien lenders fail to perfect their lien properly or allow their lien to lapse or their lien is avoided in bankruptcy or otherwise. Second lien lenders will often take the position that only collateral in which both first and second lien lenders have a valid and perfected security interest not subject to avoidance as a preferential transfer or otherwise by the debtor or a trustee in bankruptcy should be subject to the lien priority provisions. See alternative section 1.1 and notes to that section and alternative section 1.7. In practice, the view of the first lien lenders has typically prevailed on this issue although there is increasing recognition of the unintended “payment subordination” by the second lien lenders that may result if the first lien lapses or is avoided in bankruptcy, and the second lien lenders are forced by their agreement to an “absolute” priority provision to be subordinate to the now unsecured first lien lenders.

7. First and second lien lenders typically agree not to challenge the priority, perfection, or validity of their respective liens. However, a first lien agent may fail to perfect, or maintain perfection, of its lien, or may be determined by a court to have participated in a fraudulent transfer or other transaction that results in their claims being disallowed or equitably subordinated. This has occurred in several recent high-profile cases. In such situations, second lien lenders will often argue, particularly in negotiated middle-market transactions, that an agreement to continue to treat an unperfected or equitably subordinated first lien lender as being perfected and senior to the second lien lender converts lien subordination into payment subordination to unsecured or equitably subordinated indebtedness that is not reflected in the coupon on or underwriting assumptions for the second lien obligations. This could place the second lien lenders in a far worse position than if they were unsecured creditors. Therefore, second lien lenders often take the position that only collateral in which both first and second lien lenders have a valid and perfected security interest not subject to avoidance as a preferential transfer or otherwise by the debtor or a trustee in bankruptcy should be subject to the lien priority provisions of the intercreditor agreement. Payment subordination as described in this note can occur if (i) the lien securing first lien obligations maintains priority, and a turn-over right, under the intercreditor agreement even if invalid, unperfected, equitably subordinated, or avoidable, or (ii) first lien obligations include amounts “whether or not allowable in an insolvency proceeding” and the amounts are not allowed. This can result in payment subordination of the claims of second lien lenders to the extent of first lien claims not allowed in an insolvency proceeding, which also leaves the second lien lenders with no enforceable subrogation rights in respect of such claims, and in a position that may be worse than that of an unsecured creditor. On the other hand, application of proceeds to second lien claimholders from unperfected first lien collateral may result in a greater recovery than had the first lien collateral been perfected, and some intercreditor agreements attempt to address this issue. As an example, consider a debtor with $100 million of assets, $50 million of first lien debt, $50 million of second lien debt, and $50 million of unsecured obligations. If the first lien lenders’ claims are unsecured for failure to maintain perfection, the second lien lenders will recover in full ($50 million) on their lien, but pay the entire recovery over to the first lien lenders, and have only an unsecured subrogation claim from the first lien lenders, which will result in a recovery of only $25 million, all due to the failure of the first lien lenders to perfect. If the first lien lenders’ claims are equitably subordinated or disallowed because of bad acts of the first lien lenders, the result for the second lien lenders will be catastrophic. In the example above, they would turn over their $50 million recovery to the first lien lenders, who would be paid in full notwithstanding their bad acts, and the innocent second lien lenders would have no recovery at all. For a detailed discussion of this issue, please see, among other articles, Robert L. Cunningham & Yair Y. Galil, Lien Subordination and Intercreditor Agreements, 25 REV. BANKING & FIN. SERVICES 49 (2009).

8. The typical second lien financing intercreditor agreement does not require payment subordination.

9. These changes in the definition of “First Lien Obligations” would typically be used in connection with the alternative definition of “First Lien Cap” and the alternative lien priority provisions in section 1.1 noted as being more favorable to second lien lenders.

10. Second lien caps are less common than first lien caps. If there is a second lien cap, the following definition should be added:

Second Lien Cap means $_______ minus the aggregate amount of principal payments on the term loan under the Second Lien Credit Agreement (other than payments in connection with a Refinancing).

11. The Model Agreement includes a fairly broad definition of “First Lien Obligations” that encompasses principal, interest, fees, indemnity obligations, the cost of unwinding hedging obligations, and cash management obligations. However, it also provides for a “first lien cap” in an agreed-upon maximum principal amount. The standard definition of “first lien cap” is limited to a cap on principal and a related cap on interest, premiums, and fees on the capped principal amount. The alternative definition more favorable to second lien lenders includes optional limits on other first lien obligations, including separate caps on interest payments and on obligations under hedge agreements. Many intercreditor agreements provide for a first lien cap but fail to address the consequences of the first lien lenders exceeding the cap. The Model Agreement specifically provides in section 1.1 (“Seniority of Liens Securing First Lien Obligations”) that the lien on collateral securing first lien obligations will have priority over the second lien obligations up to but not in excess of the first lien cap. The Model Agreement also deals with the question of how the first lien lenders’ lien securing first lien obligations in excess of the cap should be handled. See section 1.11, “Subordination of Liens Securing Excess First Lien Obligations,” which provides, among other things, that the second lien lenders will be subordinate only to the extent that the principal amount of the first lien loan does not exceed the first lien cap. Similarly, the buy-out provisions of the Model Agreement that permit the second lien lenders to purchase the first lien loan at par following the occurrence of an event of default only apply to the portion of the first lien loan that does not exceed the agreed-upon cap and the uncapped portion of the loan. While a first lien cap is designed to protect the second lien lenders from unanticipated increases in the first lien debt, the first lien lenders will want to make sure that they have a sufficient “cushion” under the first lien cap to increase the first lien loan by a reasonable amount to deal with additional cash needs by the borrower as part of a loan workout or otherwise. The first lien lenders also should consider including an additional “cushion” for debtor-in-possession (“DIP”) financing to be provided by the first lien lenders in the event of bankruptcy. The definition of first lien cap in the Model Agreement includes optional provisions for including DIP financing under the first lien cap. The Task Force has intentionally omitted any provision stating that a breach of the agreement occurs if the first lien lenders exceed the cap. Instead, the agreement provides that exceeding the cap will result in a subordination of the excess amount to the lien of the second lien lenders as provided in section 1.11. The parties may wish to consider including an express agreement by the first lien lenders not to exceed the first lien cap but, in most cases, the Task Force believes that the subordination of the excess will provide a sufficient and appropriate remedy for the second lien lenders. Section 1.11(e) expressly provides that the second lien lenders reserve any rights against the borrower under the second lien loan documents for any event of default resulting from the incurrence of obligations exceeding the first lien cap.

12. In the absence of unusual provisions in the first lien credit agreement (e.g., delayed draw term loans or accordion features), a typical first lien cap for a negotiated transaction would be in the range of 110 percent to 115 percent of the aggregate commitment under the first lien loan documents, with 110 percent being the most common percentage. If the modification section restricts extending scheduled amortization, consider whether the borrower should be prohibited from reallocating its term facility to revolving exposure. This form of agreement assumes that the parties have negotiated a reducing cap as opposed to, for instance, a leverage-based incurrence option or a flat, non-reducing cap. If the parties have agreed to a form of non-reducing cap, then appropriate changes will need to be made to the definition of “First Lien Cap.” This definition of first lien cap applies only to principal. Second lien lenders may argue that the cap should be expanded to include other first lien obligations, including interest, costs, expenses, indemnities, and obligations under hedge agreements and cash management agreements. See the alternative definition of first lien cap more favorable to second lien lenders.

13. It is common to see first lien caps that apply only to principal and do not directly address whether or not interest, fees, and premium (if any) on the “excess principal” above the first lien cap should be entitled to the same priority as interest and fees on outstanding principal up to the cap. That approach may leave open the question of how the “excess” fees, interest, and premium (if any) should be treated for priority purposes. The alternative followed in the Model Agreement is to provide in this section that interest, fees, and premium (if any) on principal up to the first lien cap will have the same priority as such principal, while interest, fees, and premium (if any) on principal in excess of the first lien cap will be treated as “excess first lien obligations” under section 1.11(c). Second lien lenders may logically object to the ability of the first lien lenders to capitalize all interest and add that capitalized interest as an additional priority principal obligation in excess of the stated dollar cap amount. First lien lenders may logically object to not having the ability to capitalize interest to help a debtor though difficult periods without eroding any principal cushion they may have available within the capped amount. The parties should attempt to balance these concerns by negotiation, perhaps by specifying when capitalized interest will not utilize the principal cap.

14. Include if section 6.4 permits second lien adequate protection payments.

15. The parties also need to decide whether a separate basket for potential DIP financing and carve-outs should be included. See also section 6.1 and notes to that section.

16. If this alternative definition of “First Lien Cap” is used, then the following definition should be added to section 8.1:

Availability means, at any time, the aggregate amount of the revolving loans, letter of credit accommodations, and other credit accommodations available to Borrower from the First Lien Lenders based on the Borrowing Base (as such term, and the definitions used in such term, are defined in the First Lien Loan Documents as in effect on the date hereof) (determined without regard to any revolving loans, letter of credit accommodations, or other credit accommodations then outstanding).

17. Include if section 6.4 permits second lien adequate protection payments.

18. If this alternative definition of “First Lien Cap” is used, then the following definitions should also be included in section 8.1:

Excess Second Lien Principal Obligations means Second Lien Principal Obligations in excess of the Second Lien Cap.

First Lien Principal Obligations means, at any time of determination, the aggregate unpaid principal of the loans outstanding under the First Lien Loan Documents together with the undrawn amount of all outstanding Letters of Credit under the First Lien Loan Documents.

Second Lien Principal Obligations means, at any time of determination, the aggregate unpaid principal of the loans outstanding under the Second Lien Loan Documents [together with the undrawn amount of all outstanding letters of credit under the Second Lien Loan Documents].

19. In asset-based transactions with foreign currencies, changes in exchange rates are taken into account in calculation of availability from time to time. The language above should not reverse that requirement to the detriment of the second lien lenders.

20. In light of the recent ION Media decision, if the second lien claimholders wish to preserve an express right to challenge priority on the grounds that certain property does not constitute “first lien collateral,” they may wish to consider arguing for adding language to the effect that: “Nothing in this section 1.8(b) shall prevent the Second Lien Agent or any Second Lien Claimholder from asserting that any property does not constitute First Lien Collateral under the First Lien Collateral Documents.” In the memorandum decision by the Bankruptcy Court in In re ION Media Networks, Inc., 419 B.R. 585 (Bankr. S.D.N.Y. 2009), the intercreditor agreement included an express acknowledgment by the parties “to the relative priorities as to the Collateral . . . as provided in the Security Agreement” and an agreement by the parties that such priority would not be affected or impaired by “any nonperfection of any lien purportedly securing any of the Secured Obligations.” Id. at 594 (emphasis omitted). The purchaser of the second lien obligations argued in a motion objecting to confirmation of the debtor’s plan of reorganization that certain FCC licenses owned by a special purpose vehicle within the debtor’s capital structure were immune from being encumbered due to their special character and that the licenses therefore did not constitute “collateral” for purposes of the intercreditor agreement. Id. at 589. While the first lien lender had a security interest in the proceeds of the FCC licenses, there were no proceeds to which the lien could attach. Id. The court found that the use of the term “purportedly securing” in the intercreditor agreement to describe the liens granted in the security agreement “evidenced the intent of the [s]ecured [p]arties to establish their relative legal rights [with respect to the FCC licenses themselves] vis À vis each other,” regardless not only of the ultimate validity of any lien therein granted by the debtors, but also regardless of whether a lien was even intended to be granted in the FCC licenses. Id. at 594. The court’s attempt to determine and enforce the intent of the parties based on the negotiated terms of the agreement is a positive step for the enforcement of intercreditor agreements based on the agreement of the parties rather than bankruptcy policy grounds. However, the court, in attempting to determine the parties’ intent, arguably ignored the clear language of the security agreement, which expressly excluded the FCC licenses from the collateral, and the fact that a lien on the FCC licenses (as opposed to proceeds thereof) would be prohibited by law. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the court concluded that “[a]t bottom, the language of the Intercreditor Agreement demonstrates that the Second Lien Lenders agreed to be ‘silent’ as to any dispute regarding the validity of liens granted by the Debtors in favor of the First Lien Lenders and conclusively accepted their relative priorities regardless of whether a lien ever was properly granted[, or intended to be granted,] in the FCC Licenses.” Id. First lien lenders can accomplish the result implicit in the court’s decision in a manner that does not ignore the law and the express language of the security agreement by (i) contractually prohibiting the second lien lenders from asserting claims such as those asserted by the second lien lender in ION Media, (ii) ensuring that the language of the granting clause in the security agreement picks up all general intangibles relating to the FCC licenses, including all enterprise value relating to the ownership thereof, as well as all proceeds of the disposition thereof, (iii) insulating the FCC licenses in a bankruptcy remote license subsidiary, and prohibiting any debt (other than the debt of the second lien lenders) in that subsidiary, (iv) subordinating the guarantee or other claims of the second lien lenders against the FCC license subsidiary, and (v) taking a first priority lien on the equity in that subsidiary.

21. Note that the marshaling waiver is not limited to collateral upon which both the first lien and second lien lenders have a lien. Many transactions may involve some collateral, such as foreign collateral, where there is no shared lien, and careful consideration should be given to the marshaling waiver in those circumstances.

22. The bracketed language is an alternative favorable to first lien claimholders. Rights to release a grantor should be considered carefully and may be limited to subsidiaries, as this provision has the effect of subordinating the claims of second lien claimholders to unsecured creditors of the grantor.

23. Bracketed language is a first lien favorable alternative.

24. Many intercreditor agreements simply state that amounts in excess of the first lien cap are not first lien obligations. These agreements do not address the matter further. This leaves a lot of room for speculation. What is the result of the first lien creditors exceeding the cap? The second lien lenders may argue that exceeding the cap is a breach of the intercreditor agreement by the first lien creditors and should allow the second lien creditors to assume first lien priority. That would be a result outside of the intent of the parties to the intercreditor agreement. Even though obligations in excess of the first lien cap are not intended by the parties to be treated as “first lien obligations,” the liens securing the first lien obligations (including U.C.C. Financing Statements and mortgages or deeds of trust) are usually filed before the second lien U.C.C. Financing Statements and mortgages or deeds of trust and would therefore remain first priority liens under the “first to file” rule. There is no guidance with respect to treatment of the excess in such a case. A common alternative in intercreditor agreements in which the parties and their counsel have actually considered this issue is to assign third lien priority to all first lien obligations in excess of the first lien cap. This most closely aligns with the parties’ expectations and assigns a specific “waterfall” of priorities. Section 1.11 takes that approach and goes further to deal with other priority issues relating to any second lien cap included in the intercreditor agreement. See also section 4.1, which establishes a “waterfall” for the application of proceeds received in connection with an enforcement action by either the first lien lenders or the second lien lenders. Although much less common than first lien caps, second lien caps do appear in some intercreditor agreements, particularly more negotiated middle-market transactions.

25. This and the following example are part of the agreement itself, rather than being comments to the agreement.

26. The modification provisions are intended to balance the desire of each class of creditor to ad-minister freely its loan documents and refinance the debt thereunder against the interest of the other class of creditor in protecting against any modification or refinancing that alters any fundamental assumption about the borrower’s capital structure relied on in underwriting the transaction. Fundamen-tal issues usually addressed in the modification provisions include prohibitions on:

i)   increasing the maximum permitted advances of first lien/second lien obligations above negotiated caps;

ii)   extension of the maturity of the first lien obligations beyond the maturity date of the second lien obligations;

iii)  accelerating the amortization/maturity of the second lien obligations or increasing any mandatory prepayment obligations; and

iv) increasing interest rates above specified levels.

Additional restrictions may or may not appear in the intercreditor agreement or in the first lien loan documents or second lien loan documents.

The scope of restrictions on amendments is highly negotiated and varies depending on the market in question. While first lien and second lien claimholders will usually object to the borrower or its counsel becoming deeply involved in negotiating the terms of the intercreditor agreement, the borrower will be highly motivated to scrutinize the modification restrictions and the debt cap definitions. The borrower’s interests will be aligned with those of the first lien claimholders as these provisions greatly impact the future flexibility of the borrower to incur additional debt, refinance existing debt on market terms, and obtain covenant relief.

27. The Model Agreement starts with the baseline concept that the first lien claimholders and second lien claimholders are generally free to amend their respective loan documents and refinance the obligations thereunder subject to meeting a limited set of parameters. This concept respects the status of the second lien obligations as debt that is senior in priority of payment and may be contrasted with the approach generally taken with respect to mezzanine or other payment subordinated obligations. Payment subordinated obligations are most often subject to broad restrictions on amendments and other modifications and will almost always prohibit any prepayment or refinancing of the subordinated obligations until the senior obligations are paid in full. While the Model Agreement focuses primarily on the economic terms of the obligations and does not prohibit the first and second lien claimholders from tightening or adding covenants or events of default, such amendments are usually prohibited by covenants in the first lien credit agreement in order to preserve any negotiated covenant cushion existing at the outset of the transaction. Likewise, cross-default provisions in the second lien loan documents should be reviewed and qualified as necessary to preserve any such negotiated covenant cushion.

28. The “laundry list” approach set forth in the Model Agreement is frequently encountered in middle-market transactions. Larger syndicated loan transaction and bond second lien deals often have fewer restrictions on the modification or refinancing of the first lien obligations. The restrictions in this section may also be largely addressed in the applicable loan documents rather than in the intercreditor agreement. As discussed above, restrictions on any modification or refinancing must be carefully considered relative to the definitions used to formulate any debt caps. See also note 12 above concerning potential restrictions on amendments that reallocate portions of term facility exposure to revolving exposure in cases where the second lien claimholders are seeking to require a minimum amount of amortization. While it is a case involving payment subordinated obligations, a worst-case scenario for a second lien claimholder (or a best-case scenario for a first lien claimholder) concerning flexibility to modify a class of debt with senior lien priority is illustrated by In Re Musicland Holding Corp., 374 B.R. 113 (Bankr. S.D.N.Y. 2007). In that case, a senior revolving credit facility was successfully modified pursuant to the terms of a broadly drafted intercreditor agreement to incorporate an additional term loan facility that “leapfrogged” the subordinated creditors in the priority of distribution of the debtor’s Chapter 11 estate. Id. at 118–19.

The amount of any permitted percentage increase in the interest rate is among the items subject to negotiation between the parties. A maximum 2 percent per annum increase has been a common agreed upon amount; however, this negotiated amount is being revisited by many in the aftermath of the recent market disruption and widespread re-pricing of transaction exposure. The alternative text with respect to asset-based lending transactions is often strongly resisted. To the extent that such alternative text is included, the first lien claimholders should consider whether sufficient flexibility to make protective advances or over-advances generally is included in the first lien loan documents or needs to be expressly addressed in the intercreditor agreement.

29. Consider whether subordination of excess first lien obligations is a sufficient remedy, or whether the agreement should also include an outright prohibition on extensions of credit in excess of the cap.

30. The amount of any permitted percentage increase in the interest rate is subject to negotiation between the parties. A maximum 2 percent per annum increase is a typical agreed-upon amount. would be customary geographic restrictions, maintenance, and insurance requirements applicable in vessel financings. Provisions pertaining to the application of casualty and condemnation proceeds also merit careful consideration.

31. Consistent with the expectation of the first lien claimholders to control issues related to common collateral, the Model Agreement provides that when the first lien claimholders amend the provisions of the first lien collateral documents, such revisions will automatically apply with respect to corresponding provisions of the second lien collateral documents. This “drag-along” concept is intended to cover only provisions that relate to the collateral and, accordingly, applies only to the collateral documents. It does not apply to covenants in the first lien credit agreement or second lien credit agreement that may relate directly or indirectly to the collateral, such as disposition or insurance covenants or tangible net worth requirements. To that end, the counsel to the first lien claimholders will closely review any such restrictions in the second lien credit agreement for appropriate cushion, where applicable, to allow some flexibility in dealing with the borrower on such issues without the need to obtain an amendment or waiver from the second lien claimholders. The drag-along provision obviates the need to negotiate cushion on potentially highly focused covenants and threshold amounts in the second lien collateral documents, which are generally duplicated from the corresponding first lien collateral documents. That said, the automatic amendment provisions will not apply to amendments that require the release of collateral, except to the extent that such releases are required by other sections of the Model Agreement. Releases of collateral in the context of an enforcement action or dispositions are addressed in section 1.10, “Release of Liens or Guaranties,” and releases in the context of an insolvency proceeding are addressed in section 6.2, “Sale of Collateral.” The automatic amendment provisions are, likewise, qualified to protect the second lien agent from being required to assume additional responsibilities, to protect the second lien claimholders from amendments that permit additional liens that could undermine their collateral position, and, in the case of the optional language, to protect from an amendment that could prejudice a second lien claimholder to a larger degree than a first lien claimholder. Such optional language may be objectionable to first lien claimholders based on the language being somewhat vague in nature and open to interpretation. Second lien claimholders may object to this section—especially in financings where specialized covenants are essential to preserve the expected value of the collateral or the validity of the liens. One such area that comes to mind

32. In order to allow the first lien claimholders and second lien claimholders to track compliance of the other party with the provisions in section 2 of the Model Agreement, we have provided a mutual notice provision. This notice requirement applies after the effectiveness of the modification in question and, while a claim for damages is theoretically possible, the failure to give such notice is not intended to impair the effectiveness of the agreement. Often, parties may prefer to put the burden of providing notices on the borrower; however, this provision is consistent with the general theme in the Model Agreement of attempting to foster reasonable cooperation between the creditors on administrative issues. As the notice provision is also acknowledged by the borrower, it also may provide a waiver by the borrower of confidentiality provisions that might otherwise restrict communication between the creditors on issues covered by the intercreditor agreement.

33. In addition to enjoying relative lien priority over second lien claimholders, first lien claimholders are afforded enforcement priority over the second lien claimholders with respect to the collateral. This lien enforcement priority is not unlimited, however. First lien claimholders are permitted a finite period in which to exercise their exclusive right to bring enforcement actions with respect to the collateral. This exclusive enforcement period afforded the first lien claimholders (which is referred to in the Model Agreement and in practice as a “Standstill Period”—i.e., a period during which second lien claimholders agree to refrain from exercising their subordinate security interests) frequently is a matter of intense negotiation. The length of the standstill period typically ranges from 120 to 180 days, depending upon factors such as the relative bargaining strength of the parties, the nature of the borrower’s business and the collateral, and other factors that may reduce or lengthen the amount of time necessary for first lien claimholders to evaluate whether or not to commence an enforcement action. Accordingly, the Model Agreement provides a range of days for the standstill period, rather than suggesting a single, specific period. Along with their exclusive right during the standstill period to commence an enforcement action with respect to the collateral, first lien claimholders have the exclusive right during the standstill period to exercise certain other rights and remedies. First lien claimholders may exercise all the rights and remedies of a secured creditor under the Uniform Commercial Code. Additionally, first lien claimholders may agree to release or dispose of the collateral (or to place or eliminate restrictions with respect to the collateral), so long as the consent of second lien claimholders is obtained if the proceeds received by first lien claimholders in connection with any such events are not applied to reduce the first lien obligations or if any such action is prohibited under the second lien loan documents. Following the expiration of the standstill period, second lien claimholders may commence an enforcement action against the collateral under certain conditions. These conditions include the requirement that first lien claimholders have not commenced an enforcement action with respect to all or a material portion of the collateral prior to the end of the standstill period and are not then continuing the diligent pursuit of such enforcement action (or diligently attempting to vacate any stay or prohibition against such enforcement action) and the requirement that second lien claimholders have not rescinded any acceleration of the second lien obligations. Even during the standstill period, second lien claimholders may take certain actions to preserve their position as provided in the Model Agreement. For example, second lien claimholders are granted the rights to file a proof of claim, to vote on a plan of reorganization, and to make other filings, arguments, and motions with respect to the second lien obligations and the collateral in any insolvency proceeding involving the borrower. A question of much current interest is whether or not the second lien claimholders should be allowed to join in an involuntary bankruptcy petition against the borrower in the exercise of their reserved rights as unsecured creditors or whether any right to join in an involuntary petition should be expressly excluded on the grounds that it effectively undermines the rights of the first lien claimholders to bring an enforcement action under the standstill provisions. See section 3.1(d) below, including optional language prohibiting the second lien claimholder from initiating or joining in an involuntary bankruptcy petition.

34. Under section 9-617(a) of the U.C.C., the lien securing the second lien obligations will not automatically attach to the proceeds of collateral received following a foreclosure of the first lien, as the second lien will be discharged. U.C.C. § 9-617(a) (2008).

35. Second lien lenders may seek to have an earlier trigger for the commencement of a standstill such as certain actions by the first lien lenders, and they may also oppose acceleration as a requirement for the commencement of the standstill.

36. Second lien claimants will likely take the position that the bankruptcy laws should dictate what rights the first and second lien claimholders have if an insolvency proceeding is commenced, and that a blanket prohibition on remedies is not appropriate. However, first lien claimants do not want the second lien claimants to exercise remedies against any loan parties or accompanying collateral that may not be subject to the protection of the bankruptcy court and may prefer to exercise remedies contemporaneously against all the loan parties.

37. Consider specifying provisions precluding objections to claims, liens, and other agreed provisions that might be more favorable to second lien lenders.

38. The right of first lien claimholders to take an enforcement action against the collateral is generally unfettered. The only real limitation on such right is that first lien claimholders must comply with applicable law. First lien claimholders otherwise are free to take an enforcement action without consultation with or the consent of second lien claimholders. This is so irrespective of whether an insolvency proceeding has been commenced, whether any second lien loan document provides to the contrary, or whether the enforcement action is adverse to the interest of second lien claimholders. Additionally, first lien claimholders are not impeded in bringing any enforcement action by any action or failure to act of the borrower, any guarantor, any other first lien claimholder, or any other party. Nor are first lien claimholders impeded in bringing an enforcement action by the non-compliance by any person other than first lien claimholders with any provision of the intercreditor agreement, the first lien loan documents, or the second lien loan documents, even if the first lien claimholders are aware of such non-compliance. Second lien claimholders specifically agree not to contest, protest, or otherwise take any action to interfere with any enforcement action properly conducted by first lien claimholders.

39. The Model Agreement recognizes that the right to bring an enforcement action or prevent an unauthorized enforcement action is an essential right for which the parties have specifically bargained under the Model Agreement. Accordingly, the Model Agreement grants each party the right to demand specific performance under the Agreement, and each party waives the right to assert the adequacy of a remedy at law or any other defense that might be asserted to bar the remedy of specific performance.

40. First lien claimholders and second lien claimholders have a common interest in the collateral and a common desire to ensure that enforcement actions are conducted in a manner that will yield the maximum possible proceeds for application to the first lien obligations and the second lien obligations. Accordingly, both first lien claimholders and second lien claimholders agree to give each other notice of their commencement of an initial material enforcement action.

41. As has been detailed earlier, among the primary benefits to the first lien claimholders of the Model Agreement are the priority of their liens over those of the second lien claimholders and the enforcement priority that they enjoy relative to their liens. See note 33 to section 3. The enforcement priority is effectuated by the standstill period, which provides the first lien claimholders a “head start” relative to enforcement of their liens. The Model Agreement also continues the exclusivity relative to lien enforcement if, prior to the expiration of the standstill period or prior to the permitted commencement of lien enforcement by the second lien claimholders, as applicable, the first lien claimholders have commenced and thereafter are diligently pursuing the exercise of their rights or remedies with respect to all or any material portion of the collateral. As a corollary to the exclusive enforcement remedies, this section provides for the application of proceeds received in connection with an enforcement action. Commonly referred to as a “waterfall” provision, the section expressly provides that it is applicable before or after the commencement of an insolvency proceeding. It should be noted, however, that this section does not apply to payments or other distributions made in an insolvency proceeding unless those payments or other distributions are received in connection with an enforcement action. It should also be noted that the section is applicable to collateral or proceeds received in connection with an enforcement action irrespective of whether the action was taken by the first lien claimholders or the second lien claimholders. In the unlikely event that the first lien claimholders have allowed the standstill period to expire and the second lien claimholders exercise their rights to take enforcement actions, this section still requires that the proceeds of such exercise be run through the waterfall. While, as to collateral that is subject to Article 9, this would appear to conflict with section 9-615(a) of the U.C.C., section 9-615(a) is not one of the sections of the U.C.C. that section 9-602 expressly states cannot be waived or varied by the debtor. Presumably, the execution of the Model Agreement by the various grantors would be deemed to be a waiver of the provisions of section 9-615(a) when the proceeds result from an enforcement action taken by the second lien claimholders. The waterfall provision establishes a priority of application of the proceeds of the collateral, first to the first lien obligations (up to the amount of the first lien cap), second to the second lien obligations (up to the amount of any second lien cap), third to the excess first lien obligations (i.e., the amount of the obligations owing under the first lien loan documents in excess of the first lien cap), and fourth to the excess second lien obligations (i.e., the amount of the obligations owing under the second lien loan documents in excess of a second lien cap). In each case, the application within a particular tier is as specified in the applicable loan documents. Presumably, the loan documents will contain their own order of application of payments, including applying collateral proceeds to the costs and expenses of enforcement, to accrued and unpaid interest, and to the outstanding principal balance of the loans. When combined with the other provisions of the Model Agreement, this section completes a trifecta, i.e., the liens of the first lien claimholders have priority, the enforcement rights of the first lien claimholders have priority, and the first lien claimholders have priority as to the application of the proceeds of any enforcement action. The section does not distinguish between cash proceeds and non-cash proceeds, but should be interpreted to require the application of cash proceeds to the applicable obligations as and when received and to defer the application of the non-cash proceeds to the applicable obligations until such non-cash proceeds have been monetized.

42. Some intercreditor agreements do not address the consequences of the first lien lender exceeding the first lien cap or the second lien lender exceeding a second lien cap. In the absence of an agreement between the parties as to the effect of the first lien lender exceeding the first lien cap, the second lien lender might argue that the breach by the first lien lender of the intercreditor agreement should preclude it from enforcing the agreement. One alternative for addressing this issue is to provide in the intercreditor agreement that excess first lien obligations (i.e., obligations in excess of the first lien cap) will be given a priority immediately after the second lien obligations. This “waterfall’ may be implemented without formally classifying the excess amount as “subordinated debt,” as such classification of a portion of the first lien obligations as “third lien” or “subordinated” may run afoul of the terms of the first lien lender’s credit approval. See section 1.11.

43. See U.C.C. § 9-615(c) (2008).

44. This section is an ancillary set of provisions in aid of the other priorities set forth elsewhere in the Model Agreement. First, it provides that the first lien agent and the second lien agent are to be named as additional insureds and loss payees, as applicable, of insurance policies maintained by the grantors. Of course, this includes insurance policies beyond those that cover casualty losses to the collateral. Second, the section provides that the first lien agent will have the exclusive right to adjust settlement of any claims under an insurance policy covering the collateral as well as approve any award in a condemnation or similar proceeding affecting the collateral. Last, continuing the priority theme discussed above, the section provides that the proceeds of any policy covering the collateral or proceeds of any award will be applied in a manner consistent with the waterfall provision relative to proceeds received from enforcement actions.

45. The requirement in this section that a second lien claimholder turn over any amounts it receives in connection with the exercise of enforcement actions (and certain other actions) is essential to the operation of the waterfall provisions of section 4.1. The section requires that all such amounts be segregated and held in trust for the benefit of the first lien agent and promptly paid over to the first lien agent. Once the second lien claimholders have turned over the proceeds of their enforcement activities, the first lien agent should apply those proceeds in accordance with the waterfall.

46. The first lien obligations may be paid off and, subsequently, the borrower may seek to incur new indebtedness on a first lien basis. This section allows for that possibility and provides that the newly incurred indebtedness should be entitled to the benefits of the Model Agreement to the same extent as if the original first lien obligations were not retired. The provisions of the section should not be interpreted to permit the incurrence of indebtedness that is not permitted under the second lien loan documents or to permit indebtedness in excess of the amount of the first lien cap to enjoy a first priority with respect to the collateral. If such refinancing indebtedness is incurred, the second lien agent is required to enter into appropriate documents and agreements to give effect to the substitution, and the new agent is required to agree with the second lien agent that it is bound by the terms of the Model Agreement.

47. Second lien claimholders may resist the application of this section 4.4 to situations other than the incurrence of new first lien obligations that are used to refinance then-existing first lien obligations, as opposed to a permanent subordination of second lien obligations to future first lien obligations not to exceed the first lien cap.

48. If the collateral agent for the first lien lenders arranges a private sale of the collateral to a third party at a price sufficient to satisfy both the first lien obligations and the second lien obligations, then the second lien lenders will be protected as secured parties second only to the first lien lenders and with a claim superior to all unsecured creditors. However, if the first lien lenders pursue a public sale of the collateral under the U.C.C., the first lien lenders can credit bid and purchase the collateral at the sale. Since the first lien lenders will not bid more than the amount of the first lien debt, the second lien lenders’ lien on the collateral will be extinguished unless the second lien lenders elect to outbid the first lien lenders at the public sale. A more orderly alternative to the uncertainties of a private or public sale of the collateral under the U.C.C. is for the second lien lenders to be granted a right in the intercreditor agreement to purchase the first lien debt following an acceleration of the first lien debt, the filing of bankruptcy proceedings, or for a short period of time (e.g., sixty days) following an uncured payment default. The purchase price is at par. Because first lien credit facilities often include hedge arrangements provided by one of the first lien lenders (usually the agent) or an affiliate of one of the first lien lenders, the Model Agreement includes specific provisions for the unwinding of any hedging obligations. Similarly, provisions are included to deal with undrawn letters of credit and with prepayment premiums. During most of the years that first lien/second lien transactions were closed, first lien debt typically traded on the secondary market at par or close to par. The right of the second lien lenders to purchase all of the first lien position at par was therefore a valuable right. During the financial crisis, first lien debt positions have often traded considerably below par, making it impractical and financially unfeasible for second lien lenders to purchase first lien debt under the intercreditor agreement at par. Still, even during distressed times, the option to purchase provisions provide a valuable starting point and framework for negotiations between first and second lien lenders for purchase of the first lien position by the second lien lenders following a default.

49. Second lien claimholders may wish to include additional purchase events such as (i) notice of a disposition or enforcement action that would force a lien release, or (ii) a payment default under the first lien credit agreement not cured or waived by a specified time period.

50. This concept may work only for purchase options that have a limited exercise window. First lien claimholders should have an exception if exigent circumstances exist.

51. First lien claimholders may wish to consider requiring that the purchase notice include all excess first lien obligations.

52. Second lien claimholders may also negotiate the right to receive (or preferably to have the second lien agent receive on their behalf) notice ten to fifteen days in advance of any acceleration or commencement of an enforcement action, or the taking of any action by the first lien claimholders, and of an estimate of the amount of first lien obligations (not in excess of the first lien cap), within which time, pursuant to specified procedures set forth in the intercreditor agreement or in the second lien credit agreement, (i) the second lien agent would notify the second lien claimholders of the event underlying the notice, (ii) each second lien claimholder would have a specified number of business days to notify the second lien agent as to whether it wishes to exercise its purchase right, and whether it is willing to purchase more (or less) than its pro rata share of the first lien obligations (and commitments) and irrevocably commit to purchasing its allocable portion of the first lien obligations not in excess of the first lien cap, (iii) non-committing second lien claimholders would lose their purchase right as to the event that is the subject of the notice, (iv) the second lien agent would allocate the total amount of first lien obligations not in excess of the first lien cap pro rata among the second lien claimholders wishing to exercise the purchase right (with any shortfall being allocated equitably to those willing to purchase more than their pro rata share), and (v) the second lien agent would send a binding notice to the first lien agent committing the purchasing second lien claimholders to consum-mate the purchase by a pre-negotiated deadline. A standstill would exist during the period specified prohibiting the first lien claimholders from taking any of the specified actions with an exception for exigent circumstances. This right allows the second lien claimholders to exercise their purchase right before significant damage (e.g., the loss of trade credit, the triggering of cross-acceleration clauses in other debt, etc.) is done to the enterprise value of the grantors that may result from an acceleration or the commencement of enforcement actions. The Model Agreement sets forth relatively basic purchase option mechanics. For syndicated transactions with a large number of lenders, consideration should be given to setting forth in detail procedures for the allocation and exercise of the purchase right.

53. Another option for the parties to consider regarding prepayment premiums is to provide that the purchasing creditors will pay to the first lien agent as a deferred portion of the purchase price any prepayment premium that is actually paid to the purchasing creditors within a designated period of time but will not pay any prepayment premium at the closing of the purchase unless the premium was then due and payable.

54. Please note section 1.11(e), which provides in part that, with respect to the excess first lien obligations, first lien claimholders will have rights and obligations (other than the obligations in respect to the Standstill Period) analogous to the rights and obligations that second lien claimholders have under the Agreement with respect of the second lien obligations. With respect to any excess first lien obligations remaining after the exercise of the purchase option by the second lien lenders, section 5.5 and section 1.11(e) would result, for example, in the first lien lenders having the same rights and obligations with respect to the excess first lien obligations that the second lien lenders have under the insolvency provisions in section 6.

55. Holders of a secured claim in bankruptcy have a variety of statutory rights to protect the creditor’s interest in the grantor’s property. When lenders hold a collective security interest under one granting clause, they act by majority instruction to the agent or at times by unanimous instruction. When the secured claims are divided into separate granting clauses, two groups (the first lien claimholders and the second lien claimholders) may assert the rights of secured creditors. Absent agreement to the contrary, the second lien claimholders’ assertion of these rights may be made in a manner that is in conflict with the interests of the first lien claimholders. Such actions may include consenting or objecting to financing secured by priming liens on the collateral, consenting or objecting to the use of cash collateral to operate during the bankruptcy, or consenting or objecting to sale of collateral free and clear of liens. On the other hand, if the second lien claimholders waive these rights as secured creditors, the grantors and first lien claimholders could agree to the use and disposition of collateral in a manner that could cause the diminution of the value of the interest of the second lien claimholders in the collateral. As such, one of the key functions of an intercreditor agreement is to set forth the extent to which the rights of second lien claimholders in collateral may be asserted in a manner that does not conflict with the interests of the first lien claimholders during the bankruptcy.

56. In a Chapter 11 bankruptcy where substantially all of the debtors’ assets have been pledged to secure the first and second lien debt, the debtors will have an urgent need to use cash collateral starting with the first days of the case. In addition, in most situations, the debtors will also want to incur DIP financing both to provide the debtors with liquidity and also to inspire confidence in customers, vendors, and employees. DIP lenders generally insist on super priority claims and priming liens that are senior to both the existing first and second liens. The first lien claimholders generally want to facilitate the debtors’ use of cash collateral under a budget that they approve, so as to preserve the value of the first lien claimholders’ collateral. They are also the most frequent source for DIP financing, given the reluctance of secured lenders to permit other lenders to prime their liens. In order for the debtors to have the right to use cash collateral of the first and second lien claimholders, or to have priming liens on collateral pledged to secure the first and second lien loans approved, they must either obtain the consent of both first and second lien claimholders, or secure an order of the bankruptcy court finding that adequate protection has been given to such claimholders to protect them from any loss of value from the use or priming. A finding of adequate protection can be difficult or impossible to obtain, and is not a requirement that debtors or first lien claimholders want to have imposed at the outset of the bankruptcy. As such, most intercreditor agreements include a deemed consent to the use of cash collateral by the second lien claimholders if supported by the first lien claimholders, as well as a deemed consent to permit a priming DIP financing if consented to by the first lien claimholders. The deemed consent typically has certain limitations and conditions. For example, a pre-consent to a DIP financing is typically conditioned on the amount of the DIP financing not exceeding a specified amount. The second lien claimholders will often reserve the right to object to provisions of a proposed DIP financing that would have the effect of dictating the terms of a restructuring, or that would require the company to liquidate its assets on a rapid schedule. While the second lien claimholders’ right to object to use of cash collateral or a priming DIP is limited, second lien claimholders typically do have the right to insist on replacement liens in the debtors’ post-bankruptcy assets to the extent of any loss of value in the collateral so long as any such replacement liens are junior to the approved DIP financing and any replacement liens granted to first lien claimholders.

57. See note to section 6.2 below.

58. First lien claimholders will want no interference with the use of cash collateral, but second lien claimholders will not want to have their other interests “primed” or have their liens stripped, by reason of the broad concept of “use” of collateral.

59. As noted above in connection with the definition of “First Lien Cap,” it may be desirable to formulate the cap differently in the context of a DIP financing. Common approaches include (i) an incremental cushion for a DIP financing, or (ii) a cap that is the lesser of the first lien cap and some cushion over outstanding first lien obligations at the commencement of the case.

60. This clause is applicable when the first lien cap is tied to a borrowing base. With respect to principal amounts of new loans that increase the first lien obligations and reduce the amount of collateral available for second lien obligations, most agreements limit the amount of diminution that would be suffered. However, most agreements do not limit the amount of diminution that may result from the use of cash collateral or other diminution of the borrowing base. Consideration should be given as to whether cash collateral objections could be asserted by the second lien agent if the amount of collateral diminution, when added to the first lien obligations, would exceed the first lien cap by reason of the erosion of the borrowing base.

61. First lien claimholders should consider deleting this requirement based upon the protection provided to second lien claimholders from the first lien cap and the fact that the first lien claimholders can condition consent to the DIP financing upon an intercreditor agreement with the DIP lender that subordinates the lien securing the DIP financing to the lien securing the first lien obligations. In addition, it may be beneficial to the first lien claimholders to have a DIP financing that is “junior” to the first lien obligations in connection with plan confirmation requirements for the payment in full of all DIP obligations.

62. First lien claimholders may regard this proviso as creating the potential for delay and uncertainty. The second lien claimholders have the right to assert objections that may be asserted by unsecured creditors that the terms of the DIP financing are not appropriate.

63. The market has developed to generally give first lien claimholders the power to compel second lien claimholders to consent to the diminution of collateral, in the form of use of cash collateral or permitting additional secured financing even if the first lien obligations are sufficiently oversecured that first lien claimholders are otherwise not motivated to police the excess use of cash collateral or DIP financing. On the other hand, the market has not similarly developed to give first lien claimholders the ability to use second lien claimholders’ rights of adequate protection in order to more effectively prevent the diminution of collateral. This draft proposes the first set of rights in favor of first lien claimholders and references the second as an alternative favorable to the first lien claimholders. To the extent that the second lien claimholders are required to join in, or prosecute, such an objection, they should consider requiring that their expenses be paid by the first lien claimholders, which could increase the size of the first lien claim, but will assure that the second lien claimholders will not go out of pocket.

64. Some intercreditor agreements attempt to restrict first lien claimholders from consenting to the subordination of the lien securing first lien obligations and, in turn, such agreements often exclude DIP financing from the scope of such restriction. However, the treatment of “carve-outs” is often omitted or not considered the same as if the first lien agent made advances to fund retainers for professionals. This form treats carve-outs as a use of collateral, but not as though they are the same as if being incurred or used as of the date such “carve-out” obligations are incurred. An alternative approach would be to treat administrative carve-outs as extensions of credit that need to be capped. If this approach is taken, additional consideration should be given to the first lien cap and the inclusion of additional, incremental amounts in the event of an insolvency proceeding, and to the need to reflect clear dollar limits on administrative carve-outs in the DIP orders. For a discussion of “carve-outs” generally, see Richard Levin, Almost All You Ever Wanted to Know About Carve Out, 76 AM. BANKR. L.J. 445 (2002).

65. First lien claimholders may want an absolute bar on second lien claimholders attempting to provide “priming” DIP financing, while second lien claimholders will generally resist any limitation against DIP financing due to the ability of third parties to propose the same. A compromise position is bracketed.

66. Second lien claimholders may seek to preserve unsecured creditor objections to a DIP financing, while first lien claimholders may expect second lien claimholders not to object in any capacity so long as a DIP financing satisfies the parameters specified in the intercreditor agreement. The parties may want to consider alternative permitted objections to DIP financing or cash collateral orders such as: (a) provisions that purport to bind parties to a plan, (b) provisions that compel the sale of collateral, and (c) provisions that are otherwise inconsistent with the intercreditor agreement and priorities of the liens.

67. Second lien creditors typically agree not to contest or object to a sale, lease, exchange, or transfer of collateral under section 363 of the Bankruptcy Code if the first lien creditors have consented in writing to such disposition, provided that (i) the liens of the second lien creditors attach to the proceeds of such disposition to the extent so ordered by the court, (ii) the net cash proceeds are applied to reduce the first lien obligations permanently, and (iii) the second lien creditors will not be deemed to have waived any right to bid in connection with such disposition (subject to the lien priorities set forth in the intercreditor agreement). Once again, second lien creditors may attempt to retain the right to assert any objection that may be available to unsecured creditors generally. First lien creditors will most likely object to this inclusion, as it provides the second lien creditors an opportunity to interfere with the first lien creditors’ exercise of remedies. Alternatively, the first lien creditors may require that such second lien objections be otherwise consistent with the other terms of the intercreditor agreement. The first lien creditors may also argue that the second lien creditors have the ability to protect themselves by the exercise of their buyout right. Some intercreditor agreements also require that the second lien creditors, solely in their capacity as holders of a lien on the collateral, join the first lien creditors in any objection to a sale of collateral to the extent asserted by the first lien creditors. The second lien creditors would typically resist this. In transactions where each party has priority in certain types of collateral, the parties should consider agreeing on a methodology to allocate value received in a disposition among the various categories of assets.

68. Second lien claimholders may seek to preserve rights to object to any proposed sale where liabilities of grantors are assumed (given that this permits trade debt to leapfrog the second lien in terms of priority) or where proceeds are not solely applied to repay first lien obligations or second lien obligations. Provisions of this kind may present impediments to sales, present complexities, and require careful negotiation and drafting. For example, cure payments in connection with the assumption and assignment of contracts would need to be carved out, as would payments of DIP financings (if not included in “First Lien Obligations”) and administrative claims entitled to a “carve-out” under any adequate protection arrangements.

69. Second lien claimholders may want assurances that they will be permitted to credit bid their claims in any bankruptcy sale. First lien claimholders will want merely to preserve any rights that second lien claimholders may have, not assure that they have such rights.

70. It may be desirable to include a provision that any credit bid must respect the priorities set forth in the intercreditor agreement, i.e., any credit bid of second lien obligations must contemplate the payment in full in cash of first lien obligations (other than excess first lien obligations) on closing of any resulting disposition.

71. Second lien lenders will generally expect to be permitted to assert any rights they may have to object to dispositions of collateral that would be available to unsecured creditors in a bankruptcy proceeding. First lien lenders may seek to restrict such rights, or to condition the exercise of such rights on there having been a concession or determination that all or a portion of the second lien obligations are unsecured, arguing that second lien claimholders have the ability to protect themselves through exercise of their buyout rights and that a price for the priority second lien claimholders enjoy over other creditors is that they must give up any rights to interfere with collateral dispositions that first lien claimholders support. An alternative approach is to rely solely on a provision like section 3.1(d), which generally preserves unsecured creditor rights. This approach can be favorable to the second lien, depending on how drafted, since it then applies to all aspects of the agreement that are not expressly carved out. The first lien may expect that certain waivers by second lien claimholders will be unqualified, such as waivers of objections to DIP financings supported or provided by the first lien, objections to liens or claims of first lien claimholders, and where commencement of an involuntary bankruptcy is included in the term “Enforcement Action,” the right to initiate or join in an involuntary bankruptcy.

72. First lien lenders may seek to require the second lien agent to actually support objections that the first lien may have to sales of collateral and other matters in an insolvency proceeding. This is not a usual provision, and many second lien lenders would resist it. To the extent that it is insisted upon, second lien claimholders should consider limiting this undertaking to withholding consent to the applicable disposition of collateral or filing a pleading indicating support for the first lien agent’s objections, and also including a requirement that the second lien claimholders be indemnified for any expenses or other losses incurred in complying with this requirement (that any reimbursement by first lien claimholders not add to the amount of priority first lien obligations).

73. The commencement of a bankruptcy case imposes an automatic stay on actions to foreclose on collateral or otherwise to seek collection of pre-bankruptcy claims. Secured creditors may nonetheless seek a bankruptcy court order lifting the stay and permitting the creditors to take enforcement actions against collateral under appropriate circumstances. First lien claimholders want to control the timing of any effort to pursue remedies against collateral following the bankruptcy filing, and it is thus typical for intercreditor agreements to prevent or severely limit second lien claimholders from seeking relief from the stay to take action against shared collateral.

74. Second lien lenders may seek to retain the right to take action following the standstill period (which would then be modified such that it does not extend indefinitely in bankruptcy). First lien lenders and borrowers would generally resist this.

75. Many agreements only require that second lien claimholders not seek relief themselves. More first lien favorable provisions would go on to preclude second lien claimholders from opposing relief sought by the first lien. This clause would operate in conjunction with section 6.4(b)(1) and could be provided for there as well.

76. First lien lenders would prefer the agreement not to seek relief from the stay to be unqualified.

77. As noted above, in order for the debtors to use cash collateral or grant priming liens on collateral, the debtors must either obtain consent of the secured lenders or must provide adequate protection for any diminution in the value of the secured lenders’ interest in the collateral. Adequate protection can take the form of cash payments of fees and/or interest, principal reductions, or liens on replacement collateral. If the second lien claimholders retain their right to seek adequate protection in connection with a proposed priming DIP financing or use of cash collateral, this can add a significant and perhaps prohibitive cost to the debtors.

It has become customary for intercreditor agreements to provide that second lien claimholders may only seek adequate protection in the form of replacement liens on collateral and many agreements restrict replacement liens unless the first lien claimholders also have been granted replacement liens in the same collateral as adequate protection. Note that the first lien claimholders may well have differing interests from the second lien claimholders in terms of whether replacement collateral is needed as adequate protection, because the first lien claimholders can have a significant cushion when the second lien claimholders do not. As such, the first lien claimholders may not insist upon, or be entitled to receive, replacement liens, while the second lien claimholders may suffer loss of value without them.

78. A pro-second lien provision would eliminate a general restriction against seeking adequate protection and limit the waivers to cash collateral, DIP financing, and asset sales.

79. While common in the marketplace, second lien claimholders and their counsel may question why this should be a condition to second lien claimholders obtaining junior replacement liens on collateral.

80. The parties should consider whether the payment of administrative claims arising under section 507(b) should be paid over to the first lien agent as proceeds of collateral and be applied to reduce the first lien obligations permanently. If first lien claimholders seek confirmation of a plan, the right of second lien claimholders to assert a claim under section 507(b) may preclude confirmation of the plan. The bracketed text would permit the confirmation of the plan so long as second lien claimholders’ section 507(b) claim would otherwise be satisfied under a “cram-down”-type test. The parties may wish to consider an alternative treatment for section 507(b) claims that may include being silent (pro-second) or subordinating the right to assert section 507(b) claims in their entirety until the discharge of first lien obligations.

81. Second lien adequate protection payments could include any or all post-petition claims, or other amounts as may be negotiated between the parties.

82. The bracketed language gives the parties the option to negotiate whether adequate protection payments may be contested or not by the first lien claimholders. To the extent the first lien agent asserts a lien on substantially all property of the applicable grantor, the first lien agent likely would assert that any payment constitutes “proceeds” of collateral and would be subject to turnover and application to payment of the first lien obligations. Second lien claimholders would want to provide expressly that any payments turned over to the first lien agent will be applied to reduce the first lien cap permanently.

83. The first lien claimholders prefer to have complete freedom to act in the bankruptcy, even where this means that they may choose to contest the claims and liens of the second lien claimholders or to oppose actions by the second lien claimholders that are not inconsistent with the intercreditor agreement. For example, the first lien claimholders may want to support the position that the second lien is wholly unsecured because this may facilitate the completion of a bankruptcy plan or sale. This provision preserves the right of the first lien claimholders to object generally to actions taken, or relief requested, by the second lien claimholders.

84. The second lien favorable version specifies that the first lien claimholders may not object to the second lien claimholders’ seeking of adequate protection consistent with the agreement.

85. A debtor or bankruptcy trustee may have the ability to “avoid” or set aside pre-bankruptcy payments or transfers of value as fraudulent or preferential transfers. Fraudulent transfers can be transfers with actual intent to hinder, delay, or defraud creditors. More common in large and mid-size cases are allegations of constructive fraud, where a payment or other transfer was made while the debtor was insolvent and for less than reasonably equivalent value. An example is the debtor repaying debt that was incurred as a result of a leveraged buyout, where the value from incurring the debt flowed to shareholders rather than the borrower. Preferential transfers are those made to creditors within the ninety days prior to a bankruptcy (a year in the case of insider creditors) that result in the creditor receiving more than if the payment had not been made and the debt had been liquidated. Preferences are not a concern where a creditor is, at all points since the offending transfer, oversecured. If a payment is avoided, the creditor will have a claim against the debtor for the value disgorged. Where a first lien loan or a second lien loan has been repaid prior to bankruptcy, the possibility exists that the payment could be subject to avoidance on one of the above theories. The purpose of section 6.6 is to specify that if that does occur, the intercreditor agreement continues to govern the relationship between the first and second lien claimholders, with respect to their claims against the debt as a result of the disgorgement. The more controversial language at the end of the section endeavors to compel second lien claimholders to disgorge to the first lien claimholders amounts that they may have received constituting collateral proceeds during the time between the initial payment to the first lien claimholder and the avoidance of that payment. Second lien claimholders often will strenuously resist any contractual undertaking that would require them to disgorge, on the basis that the payment made to them was permitted under the intercreditor agreement when made and they may well have passed the payment along to their own investors, with no power to obtain a return of such payment. When determining whether and to what extent to resist such provisions, note that the second lien claimholders are likely to be subject to a similar risk of avoidance. As such, though undertaking a contractual obligation to disgorge may be unpalatable, it may not greatly increase the actual risk of disgorgement.

86. Second lien claimholders will oppose disgorgement of proceeds of collateral received after the first lien obligations are discharged. The parties may negotiate a middle ground where disgorgement is applicable only if demanded within a set time period after payment is received by second lien claimholders.

87. Second lien claimholders will object to a pro rata disgorgement of avoidance action proceeds on the grounds that general unsecured creditors would have the right to share in such payments, and that the lien subordination should only pertain to the receipt of proceeds of collateral.

88. In a restructuring, it is common for holders of first and second lien debt to receive debt or equity securities in the reorganized company. One purpose of section 6.7 is to confirm that this is permissible and that second lien claimholders can receive distributions prior to payment in full of the first lien claimholders. The first lien favorable variation specifies that distributions to the second lien claimholders on account of their secured claims are only permitted if the first lien claimholder classes support the plan. Another purpose of this section is to specify that, if both first and second lien claimholders do receive new secured debt that shares collateral, the intercreditor provisions will continue to govern the relative priorities and other rights of such secured debt.

89. There is a hypothetical issue with the fact that this provision covers all debt securities issued with respect to the second lien obligations, in that it is possible that the second lien obligations could be bifurcated into a secured and unsecured component, and that secured debt obligations could be issued with respect to the unsecured component. To the extent that other unsecured creditors also receive the same type of security or the same security, the obligations issued to second lien claimholders could be treated differently because of this provision. Consider whether this potential should be addressed by carving out debt obligations to the extent issued to any unsecured claim held by second lien claimholders and, potentially, to the extent such debt obligations are also issued to other creditors holding unsecured claims.

90. In this section, the second lien claimholders agree not to oppose the allowance of post-petition claims held by the first lien claimholders and the first lien claimholders agree not to oppose the allowance of post-petition claims held by the second lien claimholders. This waiver applies to valuation of the collateral as a component of determination of the secured claim held by the first and second lien claimholders. In addition, the waiver prevents either the first lien or second lien claimholders from objecting to the allowance of the amount of first and second lien debt held by the other parties. Finally, if and to the extent the first lien claimholders have allowed secured claims, the second lien claimholders agree not to oppose the payment of the first lien debt. While this latter waiver is less common in the marketplace, it is consistent with the notion that the second lien claimholders have no right to payment from collateral until after the first lien claimholders have been paid and, therefore, the second lien claimholders should benefit, dollar-for-dollar, from the repayment of the first lien debt. The practical effect of these waivers is that third parties with an incentive to challenge the extent, validity, and priority of the first and/or second lien debt will be the ones to challenge the secured claims and there should not be a challenge commenced by either of the first or second lienholders against the other.

91. Many intercreditor agreements qualify the agreement not to object to claims based upon the extent of the value of any collateral securing the first lien obligations without regard to the existence of the lien securing the second lien obligations. This language is regarded as inconsistent with the notion that the parties to the intercreditor agreement should not interfere with each others’ claims against the grantors.

92. In the mezzanine world, where the junior creditor could not receive payment on its unsecured claims until the senior debt was paid in full, an election by the senior lender under section 1111(b) of the Bankruptcy Code could cause the waiver of the unsecured creditor “dividend” and make it more difficult for the junior creditor to ever receive payment under a plan. Hence, the subordination agreements in a mezzanine context often contained a “waiver” of any claims resulting from the senior lender making the section 1111(b) election. The Model Agreement deletes this waiver as the Task Force believes that the section 1111(b) election does not affect the rights of the second lien claimholders. The other waivers that relate to cash collateral, financing, and granting of security interests are general provisions that are consistent with the DIP financing and cash collateral provisions discussed above. Some second lien claimholders may prefer to be governed by those more specific sections and may object to the more general waiver.

93. Any payment received by a second lien claimholder as a result of a surcharge against collateral under section 506(c) of the Bankruptcy Code would result in the receipt of proceeds of collateral that would otherwise be required to be applied to payment of the first lien obligations.

94. Many forms in the marketplace have elaborate provisions dealing with the classification of claims. The Model Agreement attempts a more streamlined provision that should be sufficient under most circumstances. We believe that the more lengthy waiver grew out of structures where the second lien claimholders held claims under the same security documents, thereby creating the risk of classification in the same class. Separate granting clauses, at least with respect to the secured claims held by the first lien claimholders and second lien claimholders, should result in separate classification as a matter of law.

95. Section 510 of the Bankruptcy Code contains a general reference to the enforceability of “subordination” agreements. There is some difference of opinion as to whether the reference to subordination is to “debt subordination,” “lien subordination,” or both. From the perspective of waivers and estoppel, the Model Agreement takes the position that the claimholders should not dispute that the reference in section 510 includes “lien subordination.” Therefore, no claimholder should be permitted to avoid its contractual obligations set forth in the intercreditor agreement by arguing that the bankruptcy court lacks jurisdiction to enforce a contract between two non-debtors. Of course, the parties cannot confer jurisdiction on the court where none would otherwise exist, but at least this acknowledgement should be evidence of the parties’ intent and should dissuade parties from conduct inconsistent with that intent.

96. Much of the detail, and key substantive terms and distinctions, are found in the definitions. A few of the important ones are discussed briefly in footnotes below, but all of them should be scru-tinized as the most mundane could be important in a particular transaction. A quick note as to form: Breaking with tradition, at least for many of us, the Model Agreement does not group all of the defined terms into a separate section but rather sprinkles many of them throughout the agreement, providing a definition when a term is first employed. As editor Howard Darmstadter pointed out to the drafters of the Model Agreement, it is easier to read a document from the start if uninterrupted by searches for definitions. More common and obvious terms are found in the definition section at the end. Note also that section 8.2, “Usages,” sets forth various conventions as to certain terms and points of interpretation, including as to the calculation of time periods and the time of day, and that a reference to an agreement includes its amendments. Comments on the following few key definitions appear in notes to each of the applicable definitions: “Cash Management Agreement,” “First Lien Obligations,” “Hedge Agreement,” and “Obligations.” These terms all relate to the breadth of the Model Agreement—it includes all of the obligations and indebtedness held by the First Lien Lenders, and certain affiliates and potentially others, including obligations relating to bank products and cash management arrangements such as interest rate swaps and automated clearing services. This broad scope is mitigated by the concept of the first lien cap, and care should be taken as to its definition, as more fully discussed in note 11, and as to the definition of first lien obligations, as to which an alternative definition is provided.

97. Note the alternative definition, available for use with the alternative provisions of section 1.1. As a general matter, the first lien claimholders and second lien claimholders typically expect to hold liens on the same pool of assets (very often all assets), but exceptions to this often occur and the definition as well as the substantive provisions in section 1.5 may need to be adjusted.

98. If the parties use alternative section 1.1, then this definition of “Collateral” can be used.

99. This term is employed throughout the Model Agreement to indicate when the second lien claimholders are no longer subject to the restrictions of the intercreditor agreement and therefore is a key definition. See in particular note 45. Also, the parties should consider whether certain restrictions against the second lien claimholders contained in the intercreditor agreement, as well as certain other provisions of the Model Agreement, should apply only until the first lien obligations have been paid to the amount of the first lien cap or whether such restrictions or provisions should continue to apply until all first lien obligations have been paid in full.

100. If the parties agree as provided in section 1.3 that the first lien agent should not continue to have priority if its lien is not properly perfected, lapses, or is avoided in bankruptcy, then the language in parentheses concerning post-petition claims should be deleted.

101. Clause (b) excludes indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made. Consideration should be given to whether “Discharge of First Lien Obligations” should also include cash collateralization for contingent exposure on claims that have been made, threatened, or, in some cases, may reasonably be expected to be asserted.

102. This definition is broad in scope, capturing in clauses (a), (c), and (d) not only the foreclosure against collateral and other standard secured party remedies, but also the initial steps of a consen-sual disposition of collateral as described in clause (b). However, it does not include the filing of an involuntary bankruptcy proceeding or the exercise of other unsecured creditor remedies. The broad scope benefits the first lien claimholders since the first lien claimholders are given the exclusive right to exercise enforcement actions (section 3.1), and certain events such as the automatic release of liens on collateral securing second lien obligations are triggered by the first lien agent’s enforcement action (section 1.10). On the other hand, section 5.1(b) bars the first lien claimholders from commencing any enforcement action so long as the second lien claimholders’ purchase option right under section 5 is outstanding, thereby benefiting the second lien claimholders by the broad definition.

103. See section 1.10, “Release of Liens [or Guaranties].” First lien claimholders may wish to cause a disposition of collateral by an action of the grantor in lieu of a foreclosure sale.

104. Consider whether the enforcement action concept should, or should not, include commencement of an involuntary bankruptcy proceeding. First lien lenders may consider a right to interrupt their efforts to realize on collateral through filing an insolvency proceeding against a grantor as inconsistent with the proposition that the second lien will defer to the first lien in such efforts. A second lienor may argue that it should not be required to forfeit a right that it would have if it were entirely unsecured. In considering how much to value this right (or to fear it), the parties should note that to commence, or join in commencing, an involuntary bankruptcy petition, a second lienor would likely have to concede that its claims are not fully secured, making this a somewhat unattractive option. A common solution to this issue is to permit second lien claimholders to commence an involuntary insolvency proceeding after the expiration of the standstill period, making the remedy similar to that exercisable by unsecured mezzanine creditors.

105. If the parties use the alternative definition of “Collateral,” then this definition of “First Lien Collateral” can be used.

106. Many intercreditor agreements fail to address whether a non-conforming DIP financing (i.e., one that is not consented to by second lien claimholders) would be subject to the remaining terms and provisions of the intercreditor agreement insofar as the new DIP financing would likely be, at least in part, a refinancing of the first lien obligations. Second lien claimants may resist this provision as it gives first lien claimholders the benefit of opting into the pro-senior intercreditor agreement provisions for a non-conforming DIP financing.

107. Consider whether this additional clause is necessary or should be used in lieu of negotiated provisions regarding bankruptcy distributions in section 6.7, “Reorganization Securities.”